1628 of 2474

D800002X152
May 2010

Getting Started With Your

DeltaV™ Digital Automation System
 1629 of 2474

Printed in the Republic of Singapore

© Emerson Process Management 1996 - 2010. All rights reserved. For Emerson Process Management trademarks
and service marks, go to http://www.emersonprocess.com/home/news/resources/marks.pdf. All other marks are
property of their respective owners. The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes
only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are not to be construed as warranties or
guarantees, expressed or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability.
All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which are available on request. We reserve the right to modify
or improve the design or specification of such products at any time without notice.
 1630 of 2474

Contents

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
About this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Selecting from Menus or Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
What You Need to Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Chapter 1 DeltaV System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
DeltaV System Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
DeltaV Software Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Engineering Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Auto-Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Configuration Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Continuous Historian Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Control Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Database Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
DeltaV Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
DeltaV Operate Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
FlexLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Recipe Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
System Alarm Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
System Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
User Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Advanced Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
DeltaV Neural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
DeltaV Predict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
DeltaV PredictPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
DeltaV Simulate Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Inspect with InSight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Tune with InSight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Operator Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Batch History View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Batch Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
DeltaV Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Contents iii
 1631 of 2474

DeltaV Operate Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
MPC Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Process History View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Installation Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
OPC Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
DeltaV Excel Add-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
DeltaV Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
OPC Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Introducing DeltaV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Where to Find More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
DeltaV Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
DeltaV Books Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
DeltaV Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Paper Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Technical Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Windows Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Chapter 2 Overview of the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

A Look Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Scenario for the Tank Process Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Sequential Function Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Operator Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Let’s Get Started! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Chapter 3 Learning About the DeltaV Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Opening the DeltaV Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Navigating the DeltaV Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Opening and Closing Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Documentation Convention for DeltaV Explorer Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Exploring the Library Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Function Block Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Module Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
On Your Own. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

iv Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1632 of 2474

Chapter 4 Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Exercise 1: Creating and Naming Plant Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Exercise 2: Using the DeltaV Explorer to Copy a Module (MTR-101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Introducing Control Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Parameter Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Exercise 3: Creating a Control Module (XV-101) in Control Studio Using a Library Template. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Opening Control Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Modifying the XV-101 Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Exercise 4: Finishing Steps for All Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Identifying the Operator Pictures Associated with a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Assigning the Module to a Controller Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Saving the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Verifying the Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Exercise 5: Creating a New Module (LI-101) from Scratch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Finishing the LI-101 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Exercise 6: Creating a PID Control Loop (FIC-101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Looking at the Module in Control Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Modifying Alarms for the PID Loop Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Finishing the FIC-101 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Exercise 7: Modifying the Motor Module (MTR-101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Removing the Excess Condition Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Specifying Conditions with the Expression Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Parameter Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Interlock Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Finishing the MTR-101 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Exercise 8: Creating a Sequential Function Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
The Sequence for the Tank Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Creating the SFC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Finishing the SFC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Exercise 9: Downloading the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
A Look Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Chapter 5 Creating Operator Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

The DeltaV Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Developing a Picture Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
The Overview Picture and the UserSettings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Navigating to Other Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Switching Between Configure and Run Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Getting Started with DeltaV Operate (Configure Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Toolbars and the Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Contents v
 1633 of 2474

Line Styles and Fill Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Links, Dynamic Properties, and Parameter References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Creating Datalinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Switching to DeltaV Operate in Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Dynamos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Creating a Pump Using a Dynamo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Creating a Tank Using a Dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Finishing the Process Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Trend Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Setting Previous and Next Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Creating a Pushbutton to Start the SFC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Chapter 6 Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Main History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
The Standard Buttons in the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Faceplate and Detail Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Entering Data in User-Changeable Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Acknowledging Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
On Your Own. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Chapter 7 Collecting and Displaying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Continuous Process Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
History Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Continuous Historian and Alarms and Events Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Assign TANK-101 to the Continuous Historian Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Enable History Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Download the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
View the Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Chapter 8 Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses,

and Setting Up User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Configuring DeltaV Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Accessing DeltaV Workstation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
DeltaV Software Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Workstation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Redundant Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Loading and Assigning Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Loading Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Assigning Licenses to Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

vi Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1634 of 2474

Downloading the ProfessionalPLUS Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Configuring Other Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Configuring the Controller Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Configuring I/O Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Downloading the Controller Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Setting Up Your First User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Adding a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
The Groups and Keys Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Downloading the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Contents vii
 1635 of 2474

viii Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1636 of 2474

Welcome
Welcome to the Emerson Process Management DeltaV digital automation system.
The DeltaV system offers powerful, easy-to-use software for designing and operating
a process control application. The system uses many standard Windows features to
provide a familiar user interface.
This revision of Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System supports
DeltaV Version 10.3 software. For earlier versions of the DeltaV software, retain the
manual applicable to that version.

Important Information
This book is intended for users of a new system, not one that is already controlling a
process. We recommend that you do not perform any tutorial procedures that involve
installation of configuration information into an operational system without fully
considering the impact of these changes.
The first user must log into Windows using the Administrator account. The
procedure for the first user’s logon differs between workgroups and domains. Refer to
the important information in “Setting Up Your First User Account” on page 2-27 for
instructions.
It is assumed that Windows software and the DeltaV software are installed on your
computer and that you are using a new DeltaV system. The Emerson recommended
Windows installation and the DeltaV installation procedure set up your computer to
operate properly with DeltaV software. Do not make any registry changes to your
operating system as these may result in unpredictable behavior.

About this Book

This introduction to the DeltaV software applications will help you get a control
system up and running quickly. It is divided into eight chapters and a Glossary.
 Chapter 1, DeltaV System Overview, introduces basic concepts and terminology
and gives an overview of the system’s applications.
 Chapter 2, Overview of the Tutorials, describes the tutorial exercises in Chapters
3 through 8. The tutorials guide you through the development of a control

Welcome ix
 1637 of 2474

strategy and operator pictures for a simple process example. The scenario for the
process example is described in detail.
 Chapter 3, Learning About the DeltaV Explorer, shows you how to open the
DeltaV Explorer and use the navigation features.
 Chapter 4, Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy, steps you through the
creation of four modules for controlling a tank discharge and a sequential
function chart that defines the process startup sequence.
 Chapter 5, Creating Operator Pictures, introduces the basic tools for using
DeltaV Operate in configure mode and shows you how to create a set of operator
pictures complete with colorful graphics, faceplate and detail pictures,
pushbuttons, and a trend chart.
 Chapter 6, Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode, shows the operator pictures from
the operator viewpoint and explains how to navigate the pictures, change
operating parameters, acknowledge alarms, and perform other operator tasks.
 Chapter 7, Collecting and Displaying Data, shows how you can gather and display
system and process data using DeltaV tools, such as DeltaV Reporter and the
DeltaV Excel Add-In.
 Chapter 8, Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and
Setting Up User Accounts, steps you through the procedures for configuring
workstations, controllers, and I/O, and assigning licenses to workstations and
controllers.
 The Glossary is limited to the terms introduced in this book. A more complete
glossary can be found in the DeltaV Books Online.

Assumptions
It is assumed that you are a control engineer getting ready to configure a DeltaV
application. You are familiar with control theory and are somewhat familiar with the
implementation of control systems.

x Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1638 of 2474

Documentation Conventions
The following sections contain information on conventions used in this document for
using the mouse and selecting from menus.

Using the Mouse

Instructions for using the mouse follow the conventions below.
 Click means click the left mouse button (unless you are specifically told to click
the right mouse button).
 Double-click means rapidly click the left button twice.
 Drag-and-drop means point to the object, hold down the left mouse button,
point to a new position, and release the mouse button.
In most DeltaV applications, special context menus (also called shortcut menus) are
available when you point to a particular area or object and click the right mouse button.
The menu displayed will vary, depending on the application and where you are
pointing when you click the right mouse button.

Selecting from Menus or Hierarchies

A vertical bar is used to indicate that you should select items in sequence. For
example, to open the DeltaV Explorer application, the instruction would be to click
Start | DeltaV | Engineering | DeltaV Explorer. This means click the Start button,
select DeltaV, select Engineering, and click on DeltaV Explorer.

What You Need to Get Started

If you are the first user of a new DeltaV system, the minimum you need to get started
using the DeltaV system is a ProfessionalPLUS workstation with pre-installed DeltaV
software.
When you turn on your workstation for the first time, you will see a screen telling you
that you need to configure your workstation.

Welcome xi
 1639 of 2474

To be able to use the DeltaV system, the startup steps you need to perform are:

1. Configure the workstation.

2. Load and assign licenses.

3. Download the workstation setup data.

These basic steps are described in Chapter 8. After the three steps listed above are
done, you can go through the other tutorials in this book to get acquainted with the
system.

xii Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1640 of 2474

Chapter 1 DeltaV System Overview

This chapter gives an overview of the DeltaV digital automation system. It takes a
brief look at the hardware, describes the basic concepts and terminology, introduces
the major software components, and ends with a summary of the ways you can find
out more about the DeltaV system from the Help and Books Online.

Hardware
The manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System, also available as an online
book, describes the DeltaV system hardware and provides instructions for installing
and powering up the system.

The system hardware consists of the following:

 One or more DeltaV workstations
 A control network (optionally redundant) for communication between system
nodes
 Power supplies
 One or more DeltaV controllers (optionally redundant) that perform local
control and manage data and communications between the I/O subsystem and
the control network

DeltaV System Overview 1-1

 1641 of 2474

 At least one I/O subsystem per controller that processes information from field
devices
 System Identifier
The System Identifier, shipped in the License Pack, is a connector that plugs into the
parallel printer port or Universal Serial Bus (USB) on the ProfessionalPLUS
workstation. It gives each DeltaV system a unique identification that allows you to
download changes to the system. Install the System Identifier on the
ProfessionalPLUS workstation before you power up your system. DeltaV systems may
be engineered and configured using a Development System Identifier prior to going
online. DeltaV systems used for training or simulation may use a Multi-Node Simulate
System Identifier. Development and Multi-Node Simulate System Identifiers cannot
be used for online, running systems. Only a User System Identifier can be used with
an online system. Refer to the Knowledge Base for information on converting a
system based on a Development or Multi-Node System Identifier to one based on a
User System Identifier.

DeltaV System Concepts

The DeltaV system helps users create process control systems that are easy to set up,
easy to operate, consistent, and secure. To accomplish these goals, the DeltaV system
uses the following:
 Plug-and-play technology for hardware configuration
 A library of reusable control modules to simplify the initial configuration effort
 Integrated, context-sensitive help and online documentation
 Hardware and software approaches to ensure system security and integrity

Terminology
Control strategies in the DeltaV system are configured in modules. A module, which
is the smallest logical control entity in the system, contains algorithms, conditions,
alarms, displays, historical information, and other characteristics that define the
process equipment. Algorithms are the logical steps that define how the module
behaves. The DeltaV system provides control, equipment, and unit modules.
Generally, a control module contains one uniquely tagged control entity, such as a
control loop or motor, with its associated logic. Defining a module around a single
field device and its related control logic makes it easy to create, download, operate,
debug, and take a single module out of service without affecting other modules.

1-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1642 of 2474

Equipment modules coordinate the operation of control modules and other

equipment modules that work together to control related equipment. The algorithm
for the containing equipment module manages the operation of the contained
modules.
Unit modules can be used in non-batch applications to group control modules and
equipment modules for alarm management purposes. For example, alarms for a
specific unit, such as a boiler, can be combined. All control and equipment modules
associated with the unit will be contained within the unit module.
Function blocks are building blocks for creating the continuous and discrete
algorithms that perform the control or monitoring for the process. The DeltaV
Library contains function block templates for analog control (bias/gain, lead/lag,
PID, etc.), Logical, I/O (analog and discrete input/output), and other basic functions.
Each function block contains parameters that can be modified to customize the
algorithm. Algorithms range from simple input conversions to complex control
strategies. Function blocks can be combined into composite function blocks to build
complex algorithms.
In addition to Function Block algorithms, the DeltaV system supports Sequential
Function Charts (SFCs) as well as Command-driven and State-driven algorithms
for control tasks requiring sequencing strategies.
Parameters are the user-defined data used within a module’s algorithm to perform its
calculations and logic. Parameters can be described by the type of information they
provide, such as input or output. Tables listing the parameters and their properties are
included in the Books Online information.
The DeltaV system includes a library of pre-engineered module templates with basic
characteristics. You can customize these library modules or create your own modules
from scratch. Your customized modules can be added to the library, making them
available for reuse in the development of your control strategy.
Modules that work closely together to perform a specific process control function are
typically grouped in an area. An area is a logical division of a plant. Areas typically
represent plant locations or main processing functions. The configuration engineer
determines how to logically divide the plant into areas.
Nodes are physical pieces of equipment on the control network, such as a controller
or a workstation. You control your process by downloading modules in the controller
nodes. The configuration tells the node how to act and what information to receive or
save from the process.
Device Tags represent the instruments, valves, and other field devices. A Device
Signal Tag consists of a specific signal from a device.

DeltaV System Overview 1-3

 1643 of 2474

Alarms alert the operator that an event has occurred. (Alarms are assigned to
modules.) Typically, you want the operator to perform some action and respond to the
alarm. Alarms can be both visible and audible.
The database contains configuration information and lets you make off-line changes
without affecting the process. Online control algorithm monitoring and modification
are also available.
Following is a diagram showing the DeltaV system’s hierarchical structure.

DeltaV Software Applications

DeltaV system software includes a variety of applications to help you configure,
operate, document, and optimize your process. The primary applications are
categorized as Engineering Tools and Operator Tools. Additional tools are available
for Advanced Control, Installation, and Online Help.
There are several ways to start an application. One is to click Start (in the lower left
corner of your screen), point to DeltaV, point to the category, and click the name of

1-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1644 of 2474

the application. For instance, to start the DeltaV Explorer, the Start menu selection
would look like the following:

In this book, the instruction for starting the DeltaV Explorer is expressed as “Click
Start | DeltaV | Engineering | DeltaV Explorer.”
Many applications allow quick access to other DeltaV applications through buttons
on their toolbars and through an Applications menu. The following example shows
the Applications menu and some of the toolbar buttons in the DeltaV Explorer.

DeltaV System Overview 1-5

 1645 of 2474

In the paragraphs that follow, the application’s toolbar button or Start menu icon is
shown next to the description.

Engineering Tools
The main engineering tools are Configuration Assistant, DeltaV Explorer, Control
Studio, and, if you have a license for the batch applications, Recipe Studio. Others
include User Manager, Database Administrator, FlexLock, and System Preferences.

Auto-Update Service

Use the Auto-Update Service to set which files are automatically transferred
from the ProfessionalPLUS workstation to all other workstations after any node is
downloaded.

Configuration Assistant

If you are a first time user, Configuration Assistant is a great tool to learn the
basics of the DeltaV system. Once you become familiar with the configuration
methodology, you will most likely use the DeltaV Explorer.

1-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1646 of 2474

Continuous Historian Administration

The Continuous Historian Administration application provides tools to

manage Continuous Historian historical data. This application must be run on the
same workstation as the Continuous Historian.

Control Studio

Control Studio is used to design and modify the individual modules and
templates that make up your control strategy. With this application you can
graphically build a control module by dragging items from a palette to the module
diagram. You then “wire the items together” to create an algorithm for the module.

DeltaV System Overview 1-7

 1647 of 2474

Control Studio supports a range of industry concepts including Function Blocks (for
continuous control) and Sequential Function Charts (for sequential control). You can
mix elements of these control languages within a single control module.
The graphical languages are based on the IEC 61131-3 standard, and function blocks
were developed using the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus standard.

Database Administrator

The Database Administrator tools let users with the necessary administrator
privileges perform database maintenance tasks such as creating, deleting, copying, and
backing up databases.

DeltaV Explorer

DeltaV Explorer, similar in appearance to the Windows Explorer, is an

application that lets you define system components (such as areas, nodes, modules,
and alarms) and view the overall structure and layout of your system.

You can do many things with this application, including:

 Create, copy, or move modules

1-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1648 of 2474

 Configure system hardware

 Define types and priorities of alarms
 Launch Control Studio and other applications

DeltaV Operate Configure

The DeltaV Operate application functions in two modes. In configure mode,

you use it to build real-time process graphics. In run mode, control system operators
use these graphics in the daily monitoring and maintenance of the process.
In configure mode, you can incorporate scanned plant images, text, graphics,
animation, and sound into the process graphics. A predefined desktop template
simplifies the typical effort of designing operator displays. This application uses pull-
down menus, toolbox buttons, drag-and-drop features, and easy-to-use drawing tools.
It also provides sets of dynamos (reusable graphics, many of which have animation
capabilities) for use in designing operator graphics.

DeltaV System Overview 1-9

 1649 of 2474

FlexLock

The DeltaV FlexLock application creates dual desktops (Windows desktop and
the DeltaV desktop) on a single workstation to provide both a secure operating
environment and a wide open engineering environment. Access to a desktop is
determined by the current user's privileges.

1-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1650 of 2474

Recipe Studio

Recipe Studio is used to create and modify recipes. A recipe is a set of

information that uniquely identifies the ingredients, the quantities of ingredients, and
the production equipment required to manufacture a product. A recipe can be as
simple or as complex as you would like to make it. DeltaV Recipe Studio is modeled
after Control Studio.

System Alarm Management

The System Alarm Management application lets you view and work with
alarms within selected areas, units, modules, and Logic Solvers. It provides a way to
efficiently view multiple alarms, enable and disable multiple alarms, and set limits and
priorities on multiple alarms.

System Preferences

System Preferences allows you to tailor the Engineering Tools to hide any
functions that you do not require. Enabling or disabling a function causes the DeltaV
applications to reveal or conceal the applicable menus and choices without adding or
removing any application software.

User Manager

User Manager lets you specify access levels for groups and individuals. You
define the roles users can have (administrator, operator, engineer, and so on) and the
typical privileges and span of control required for each role. Then, when you create
individual user accounts, you specify the role or roles a user will have.
To be able to create or edit control modules, a user needs to have configure privileges.
Similarly, to download configuration changes, a user needs download privileges.

DeltaV System Overview 1-11

 1651 of 2474

Advanced Control
The advanced control applications are DeltaV Neural, DeltaV Predict, DeltaV
PredictPro, DeltaV SimulatePro (in DeltaV Simulate Suite), Inspect with InSight, and
Tune with InSight.

DeltaV Neural

DeltaV Neural is a collection of tools used to implement neural networks in

DeltaV environments. With DeltaV Neural you can create virtual sensors to monitor
and predict process parameters that are otherwise expensive, difficult, or impossible
to measure directly. Neural networks are sometimes referred to as intelligent or
software sensors. DeltaV Neural consists of:
 Neural Network (NN) function block

1-12 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1652 of 2474

 Lab Entry (LE) function block

 Neural application
 NN and Lab Entry dynamos
 NN and Lab Entry faceplates
 NN and Lab Entry detail displays

DeltaV Predict

DeltaV Predict implements model predictive control for small and medium-
sized multivariable processes in DeltaV environments. DeltaV Predict allows you to
control interactive processes within measurable operating constraints while
automatically accounting for process interaction and measurable disturbances. DeltaV
Predict consists of:
 Model Predictive Control (MPC) function block
 MPC Simulation function block
 Dynamos
 MPC Operate application

DeltaV PredictPro

DeltaV PredictPro implements model predictive control of large multivariable

processes in DeltaV environments. It allows you to define as many as five control
objectives for interactive processes within measurable operating constraints while
automatically accounting for process interaction and measurable disturbances. With
PredictPro you can easily address a wide variety of multivariable processes as large as
40x80 that can benefit from Model Predictive Control (MPC) technology. DeltaV
PredictPro consists of:
 Model Predictive Control Professional (MPCPro) function block
 MPC SimulatePro application
 Dynamos
 MPCPro Operate application

DeltaV System Overview 1-13

 1653 of 2474

DeltaV Simulate Suite

The DeltaV Simulate Suite consists of the following products:

 DeltaV Simulate Standalone
 DeltaV Simulate Multi-Node
 DeltaV SimulatePro
DeltaV Simulate Standalone and Multi-Node enable you to install all DeltaV software
on standalone or networked PCs for off-line development and operator training.
Using DeltaV Simulate, you can configure all of the features that the DeltaV system
supports (for example, continuous control, batch control, advanced control and its
associated workstation displays, alarms, and historical data collection) without DeltaV
hardware. DeltaV SimulatePro enables more memory and a user interface for
coordinating module execution, permitting interaction with any process simulation
package that uses an OPC interface running on the PC.

Inspect with InSight

Inspect with InSight provides advanced process monitoring that allows you to
instantly identify under-performing loops and malfunctioning field devices. InSight
performance monitoring takes full advantage of the fieldbus block architecture
supported in the DeltaV system. The InSight user interface provides indices that
quantify loop utilization, measurements with a Bad, Uncertain or Limited status,
limitations in control action, process variability, and availability of recommended
tuning.

Tune with InSight

Tune with InSight provides two basic approaches to loop tuning.

On-demand Tuning—Uses an on-demand test of the process to automatically
provide tuning recommendations for PID and Fuzzy Logic Control blocks. InSight
tuning identifies process dynamics and applies tuning rules to calculate the PID
tuning (gain, reset, and rate) or FLC scaling factors. Users can accept the new values,
calculate different tuning values, or continue operating with the present tuning values.
Adaptive Tuning—Uses normal operator changes in setpoint or output to identify
the process and provide tuning recommendations. Adaptive tuning is based on

1-14 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1654 of 2474

automatically learning the process by continuously evaluating your plant performance,

evaluating controller tuning, and calculating process models based on normal day-to-
day operations. A high quality model and the expected operation with the
recommended tuning is used as criteria for setting adaptive control.

Operator Tools
The operator tools are used for the day-to-day operation of the process control
system. The primary operator tools are DeltaV Operate Run, Process History View,
Diagnostics, and Batch Operator Interface. The DeltaV Login application is used to
log in and out of the DeltaV system and to change the DeltaV system password.

Batch History View

Batch History View retrieves batch-specific data from the Batch Historian
database and allows you to view the data in several different formats. It is also possible
to add comments and have them saved as part of a batch's history in the Batch
Historian database.

Batch Operator Interface

The Batch Operator Interface is the graphical interface used by the operator to
monitor and control all automated batch operations. The Batch Operator Interface
provides the operator many different views into the batch production process.
Operators can easily switch between views by clicking on toolbar buttons.

DeltaV Login

The DeltaV Login application shows the current user and lets operators log on
and off the DeltaV system and change their DeltaV system password.

DeltaV Operate Run

The DeltaV Operate application functions in two modes. In configure mode, it

is used to build high resolution, real-time process graphics. In run mode, control

DeltaV System Overview 1-15

 1655 of 2474

system operators use these graphics in the daily monitoring and maintenance of the
process.
In run mode, operators interact with the process control system through the DeltaV
Operate application. High-resolution graphics allow extensive detail and flexibility in
the way information is displayed. A standard operating desktop designed specifically
for DeltaV process control systems provides an easy-to-use, highly reliable operator
environment.
Alarm presentation and management focus the operator’s attention on the most
important alarms. Toolbar buttons enable single-click access to common operator
functions.

Diagnostics

The Diagnostics application provides you with information on the status and
integrity of the system devices. You can view the diagnostics information any time
after you have placed the system devices on the control network and downloaded
your workstations.

MPC Operate

The MPC Operate application provides an overview to the MPC (Model

Predictive Control) block operation. It contains faceplates to view and manipulate
parameter values associated with the block’s inputs and outputs and a trend chart to
view historical, current, and predicted values for Controlled and Constrained inputs.

Process History View

DeltaV Process History View displays real-time and historical data from the
Continuous Historian as well as from the Event Chronicle. Module and node
parameters are plotted on a graph and events are displayed in a tabular (grid) format.

1-16 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1656 of 2474

You use the application to examine how your process functioned at any point in time.
You must download the setup data for the workstation that has an enabled Event
Chronicle and Continuous Historian in order for the Process History View to view
the Continuous Historian and Event Chronicle data.

DeltaV System Overview 1-17

 1657 of 2474

Installation Tools
The main tools in this category are listed below.
 DeltaV Controller and I/O Upgrade Utility is used to update the firmware in the
controller when new software is released by Emerson Process Management. It is
also used to upgrade I/O modules, remote I/O nodes, DeltaV SIS components,
H1 fieldbus devices, and RS3 and PROVOX I/O interfaces.
 DeltaV Operator System Configuration Utility is used to configure aspects of the
Operator System, such as file paths for picture files and trend data.
 DeltaV Workstation Configuration is used to set up the ProfessionalPLUS
workstation and other workstations. Workstation Configuration is described in
detail in Chapter 8, under Configuring DeltaV Workstations.
 DeltaV Guardian Application is used by Emerson SureService support to enable
and disable monitoring of the DeltaV system when the system is enrolled in the
Guardian Support Plan.
 The SureService Registration utility is used to complete and submit your DeltaV
system registration form.

Other Applications
The following subsections contain information on other applications related to the
DeltaV system.

OPC Server
The DeltaV OPC Server works in the background and does not show up on the Start
menu. It makes data such as process data, alarms, diagnostics, and engineering
information easy to access and available for import into desktop applications such as
Microsoft Excel. The Real-Time Data Server also supports comprehensive analysis
tools such as historian packages, manufacturing systems, and laboratory management
systems.

DeltaV Excel Add-In

The DeltaV system provides an interface to Microsoft Excel to allow access to real-
time data from your DeltaV process system. You can then use Excel to generate
reports, create charts, and perform further analysis on the data.

1-18 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1658 of 2474

DeltaV Reporter
DeltaV Reporter provides functions and dialogs to aid in the creation of detailed
Excel worksheets containing historical data read from or interpolated from the
Continuous Historian or Event Chronicle database.

OPC Mirror
The OPC (OLE for Process Control) Mirror connects OPC servers on multiple
control systems and enables bidirectional data traffic from one system to another.
This linkage can be between DeltaV OPC servers, DeltaV and PROVOX servers, or
several other OPC server combinations.

Introducing DeltaV
Introducing DeltaV lets you choose between the Configuration Assistant for a guided
tour of the DeltaV system or the DeltaV Explorer so you can easily get started using
the DeltaV software.

Where to Find More Information

The DeltaV system provides online help to assist you when you need a description of
a field or step-by-step instructions for how to do something. It also has a set of online
reference books that discuss basic concepts and provide background information
about the major applications. Other sources of information include the DeltaV web
site, paper manuals, and a number of technical service support options.

DeltaV Online Help

The DeltaV system provides online assistance in several forms. The Help system
can be accessed in DeltaV applications by pressing the F1 key, by clicking the Help
Topics button on the toolbar, or by selecting Help | Help Topics on the menu bar.
The Help Topics dialog has three tabs: Contents (for an expandable list of topics),
Index (for keyword search), and Find (for full-text search). If you need assistance on
using Help, one of the topics in every Help application is “Using Help.” Below are
examples of the Contents and Index tabs from the DeltaV Explorer Help.

DeltaV System Overview 1-19

 1659 of 2474

Context-sensitive help is available in most applications by clicking the Help

(question mark) button. Context-sensitive help gives you more information about
what you see on your screen. Simply click the button and then click the field or area
for which you want a description.

The “What’s This?” help button is also available in several applications to

describe commands and objects. In some applications, you can point to an object,
click the right mouse button, and select “What’s This?” from the context menu to get
the same information.

DeltaV Books Online

The DeltaV Books Online is a set of online reference books on installing,

configuring, operating, and troubleshooting your DeltaV system. This Getting Started
book is also available online.
There are three main ways to access Books Online:
 Click the Books Online button on a DeltaV application toolbar.
 From the Help menu in a DeltaV application, select Books Online.

1-20 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1660 of 2474

 From your Windows desktop, click Start | DeltaV | Help | Books Online.
To open a book, simply click the plus sign (+) next to the title in the Table of
Contents.

Books Online provides an easy-to-use Table of Contents that lets you select a topic
from the contents on the left and view the topic in a window on the right. For
example, the figure below shows the contents under Function Blocks - General
Information (in the Configuration book). To move through a book, continue to click
the plus signs to expand the Table of Contents.

DeltaV System Overview 1-21

 1661 of 2474

DeltaV Web Site

Current information is available on the DeltaV web site.

Paper Manuals
Most DeltaV product information is in Books Online. You can print single pages,
chapters, or whole books. You can also order a paper copy of most manuals from
Emerson Process Management.

Technical Service
There are several options available for technical service, including help desk support,
remote diagnosis, 24-hour emergency support, and software update service. The
technical support options are described in the Maintenance manual in the Books
Online.
The Technical Support telephone numbers are listed in the Help System under
Frequently Asked Questions, as well as in the Maintenance manual in the Books
Online.

1-22 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1662 of 2474

Windows Online Help

If you are unfamiliar with Microsoft Windows, you can access the Windows online
Help by clicking Start | Help and Support.

DeltaV System Overview 1-23

 1663 of 2474

1-24 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1664 of 2474

Chapter 2 Overview of the Tutorials

The tutorials in this book will show you how to get a process system up and running
quickly. You will learn the basic concepts needed to configure workstation and
controller nodes, define I/O, develop a control strategy, and create operator pictures.
You will also see the process system from the operator’s point of view.
Hardware configuration is typically a one-time operation—and may already have been
done for your system. Therefore, we have put this information near the end (in
Chapter 8). If your workstation has not been configured, you may want to begin with
that section after reading this chapter.
Once your workstation has been configured, you can do almost all the tutorial
exercises in Chapters 3 through 7 without having actual controllers and I/O set up.
However, to make the examples more realistic and to be able to do some things (such
as assigning control modules to a controller), you need to have a controller
configured.

A Look Ahead
The tutorials focus on developing the control strategy and operator pictures for a
process that involves monitoring the level in a tank and controlling the flow while
discharging the contents. The book contains six tutorials:
 Chapter 3, Learning About the DeltaV Explorer, shows you how to open the
DeltaV Explorer and use the navigation features.
 Chapter 4, Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy, steps you through the
creation of four modules for controlling the tank process and a sequential
function chart that defines the process startup sequence.
 Chapter 5, Creating Operator Pictures, introduces the basic tools of the DeltaV
Operate application in configure mode and shows you how to create a set of
operator pictures complete with colorful graphics, faceplate and detail pictures,
pushbuttons, and a trend chart.
 Chapter 6, Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode, shows the operator pictures from
the operator viewpoint and explains how to navigate the pictures, change
operating parameters, acknowledge alarms, and perform other operator tasks.
 Chapter 7, Collecting and Displaying Data, shows how you can gather and display
system and process data using DeltaV tools, such as DeltaV Reporter and the
DeltaV Excel Add-in.

Overview of the Tutorials 2-1

 1665 of 2474

 Chapter 8, Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and

Setting Up User Accounts, steps you through the procedures for configuring
workstations, controllers, and I/O.

Scenario for the Tank Process Example

The diagram below shows the main parts of a hypothetical process system that
controls the flow while discharging liquid from a tank. In the tutorial lessons that
follow, you will configure the control strategy for this process and automate a
sequence for it.

Control Modules
The first thing you will do is create four control modules for the process equipment
and flow loop. In the figure above, the labels in the ovals (LI-101, MTR-101, and so
on) are the names you will give to the DeltaV control modules. The labels LT-1, FT-1,
XI-1, and so on, are the Device Tags that you will use for the transmitters, valves, and
other I/O instruments.

2-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1666 of 2474

Table 2-1 contains information about the control modules and I/O Device Tags that
will be used in the tutorial.
Table 2-1 Control Modules and Associated I/O Device Tags

Control Module Description Purpose Input Device Output Device

Tags Tags

LI-101 Level Indicator Monitor level of product in tank LT-1

MTR-101 2-State Motor with Start and stop pump XI-1 ZX-1
interlocks

XV-101 Block Valve Open/close valve for tank LSC-1 XV-1

discharge

FIC-101 Flow Control Loop Regulate flow rate FT-1 FY-1

The Device Tags are assigned to I/O card channels as part of the I/O configuration
process, which is described in Chapter 8.

Sequential Function Chart

After you create the control modules, you will create a module (SFC-START) that
uses a Sequential Function Chart algorithm to automate emptying of the tank. The
steps in the sequence are listed below.

1. Set to automatic the flow loop controlling the outlet flow valve (FIC-101).

2. Specify a desired setpoint for the flow loop.

3. Wait for the regulatory valve to open, then open the block valve (XV-101).

4. Start the outpump motor (MTR-101).

5. Confirm the motor start.

Operator Pictures
You will also create a graphical representation of the tank system, similar to the one
shown below, for operators to use in monitoring and controlling the process.

Overview of the Tutorials 2-3

 1667 of 2474

Let’s Get Started!

Now that you have an overall picture of what you can expect to accomplish in the
tutorials, you can decide if you want to try the exercises online or simply read through
the material.

2-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1668 of 2474

Chapter 3 Learning About the DeltaV Explorer

The DeltaV Explorer allows you to define system characteristics and view the overall
structure and layout of the system hardware and configuration. In addition to viewing
your database, you can copy and move objects, modify the properties of objects, and
add new objects.
Some of the things you can do with the DeltaV Explorer are:
 Add workstations and controllers to the database
 Add plant areas and control modules to the database
 Add and edit alarm types and edit alarm priorities
 Create named sets that can be used by control modules
 Edit network, controller, and workstation properties
 Download control modules in controllers
 Load and assign licenses
 Export data for use in an external editing tool such as a spreadsheet or database
 Import data from an external editing tool such as a spreadsheet or database
The DeltaV Explorer also provides a fast way to add control modules to your
database. When creating your control strategy, you can simply drag-and-drop control
modules from the template library into a plant area. While you are still in the DeltaV
Explorer, you can edit the module parameters to tailor them to your application. (For
more extensive editing, you can use Control Studio).
You will learn more about the DeltaV Explorer as you go through the tutorials in this
book. For now, let’s take a quick look at how to open and navigate this application.

Opening the DeltaV Explorer

 To open the DeltaV Explorer

Click Start | DeltaV | Engineering | DeltaV Explorer.

Learning About the DeltaV Explorer 3-1

 1669 of 2474

Tip If the Start button is not visible on your Windows desktop, the Windows taskbar/Start
button may be hidden. Point to the lower left corner. If the taskbar/Start button do not
pop up, try the other corners of the screen.

The DeltaV Explorer opens.

3-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1670 of 2474

Views
Under the View menu, there are several options you may want to try. You can change
from small icons (the default) to large. You can also choose to have additional details
displayed in the right pane. As you work with the DeltaV Explorer, you will determine
which view option is best for the work you are doing.

Navigating the DeltaV Explorer

The left pane of the DeltaV Explorer shows the information in your configuration
database. The right pane lists the contents of the object selected in the left pane.

Opening and Closing Levels

Here are a few tips about opening and closing levels in the DeltaV Explorer hierarchy.
To open or expand an object, do one of the following:
 Click the beside an object.
 Double-click the object’s name.
 Select the object and press the right arrow key on the keyboard.
To close or collapse the objects under an object:
 Click the beside an object.
 Double-click the object’s name.

Learning About the DeltaV Explorer 3-3

 1671 of 2474

 Select the object and press the left arrow key on the keyboard.

Documentation Convention for DeltaV Explorer Navigation

In future references to navigating the DeltaV Explorer, we will use a vertical bar
between items to indicate that you should open successive levels. For example,
Library | Module Templates | Analog Control | PID_LOOP
means open the Library, open the Module Templates, open Analog Control, and
select (click) the module named PID_LOOP.

Exploring the Library Templates

In the following exercises, you will use the DeltaV Explorer to look at some of the
function block and module templates available in the library.

Function Block Templates

Function block templates each contain a single function block.

 To see a list of the basic function blocks in the DeltaV library

1. Open the DeltaV Explorer if it is not already open.

2. Expand Library | Function Block Templates.

3-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1672 of 2474

The items listed are the categories of function block templates available.

3. Click the Details button or select View | Details.

This lets you see at a glance the object name, the type of object, a description, and
other details.

4. Select Analog Control.

Learning About the DeltaV Explorer 3-5

 1673 of 2474

The items listed in the right pane are the basic function blocks used in analog
control, including bias/gain, deadtime, filter, lead/lag, and so on.

Tip You can change the width of the columns in the right pane by pointing to the line between
columns in the column title bar, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging the line
right or left to the column size desired.

5. Click the other Function Block Template categories to see their contents.
6. Close the Function Block Templates.

Module Templates
Module templates provide basic control strategies for common control tasks such as
analog control, monitoring, motor control, and valve control.

 To see some of the module templates in the library

1. Expand Module Templates and Analog Control.

2. Click Analog Control to see the details on the module templates in this category.

3. Select PID_LOOP.
The contents are listed in the right pane.
4. Expand Motors-2State, then select MTR-11_ILOCK.

3-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1674 of 2474

You will use this module template later to configure a pump for the tank process
example.

5. Click beside Motors-2State to close the category.

Context Menus
Pointing to an object and clicking the right mouse button displays a context menu that
allows you to perform different tasks, depending on the type of object.

 To see the context menu for a workstation

1. Select System Configuration | Physical Network | Control Network and point to

a workstation.

2. Click the right mouse button.

Learning About the DeltaV Explorer 3-7

 1675 of 2474

System Time
The Set/Synchronize Network Time application determines the date and time for the
DeltaV system. A single workstation called the master time node keeps time for the
entire system and broadcasts the time to the other nodes. The ProfessionalPLUS
workstation is the master time node by default. You use the DeltaV Explorer to:
 Set and synchronize the system time
 Define another workstation as the master time node

 To set/synchronize the system time

1. Click Tools | Set/Synchronize Network Time.

2. Specify the new time and date.

3. Click Apply to send the time and date changes to the master time node, which
broadcasts the time to all nodes on the Control Network.

4. Click Close to close the dialog box without changing the time.

3-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1676 of 2474

 To define another workstation as the master time node

1. Navigate to Physical Network (under System Configuration).

2. Click Physical Network.

3. Click the right mouse button, and then click Properties.

4. In the Physical Network Properties dialog box, click Browse and select the
workstation that you want to be the source for the master time.

Caution Do not change the time using the Windows date and time properties. Windows date and time
properties do not synchronize the time in all the workstations and controllers. Instead, use the
Set/Synchronize Network Time tool (accessed from the Tools command in the DeltaV
Explorer) to change the system time. This ensures that all workstations and controllers are
synchronized.

Be aware that setting and synchronizing the system time affects event journals and historical
data.

On Your Own
Take a few minutes to open and close different levels in the hierarchy to get familiar
with the database contents and with the navigation tools.
You can also take a look at some of the context menus. This will give you an idea of
how much you can do in the DeltaV Explorer application. At this point, however, do
not make any selections from the context menus.

Learning About the DeltaV Explorer 3-9

 1677 of 2474

3-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1678 of 2474

Chapter 4 Creating and Downloading the Control

Strategy
In the following exercises, you will perform these steps to create the control strategy:
 Create and name a plant area to hold the control modules.
 Create the modules that specify the input, processing, output, alarms, and
conditions for the process equipment, control loops, and other parts of the
process.
 Create a Sequential Function Chart (SFC) to automate the process.
Strictly speaking, you do not need to create an SFC. You can set up your process
system in such a way that an operator would activate specific equipment, change
setpoints, and perform other operations. However, in many cases, it is useful to define
a Sequential Function Chart to automate the process (or parts of the process, such as
startup or shutdown procedures) with minimal operator intervention.
When creating the control modules that make up your control strategy, sometimes
you will create a module from scratch (using the basic function blocks), but more
often you will start with one of the predefined module templates.
There are a number of ways to create the control modules.
 In the DeltaV Explorer, you can copy a module template from the library by
dragging and dropping it onto your plant area and then renaming it.
 In Control Studio, you can start from a module template, modify the module, and
save it in your plant area under a new module name.
 In Control Studio, you can start from scratch by dragging and dropping function
blocks and other items from palettes of predefined items, connecting the blocks,
and modifying block parameters.
 In Configuration Assistant, you can copy a module template from the library.
In the exercises in this chapter, you will learn how to use the first three methods.

Note This manual assumes that you are working on a new system or one that is in the
beginning stages of configuration—not one that is controlling a process.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-1

 1679 of 2474

Exercise 1: Creating and Naming Plant Areas

Plant areas are logical, software-based divisions of your control system, which may or
may not correspond to physical areas in your plant. Plant areas contain the modules
that make up the control strategy. You can have as many as 100 plant areas. How you
define your plant areas affects your overall system security scheme because you can
authorize access to the system based, in part, on plant areas.
The DeltaV system provides a default system area called AREA_A. You cannot delete
AREA_A because it is essential for system operations and for performing certain
DeltaV functions. If you decide to create additional plant areas, you may want to put
your control modules in other areas and reserve AREA_A for only these system
operations and functions. (You can rename AREA_A to a more meaningful name for
your process.)
In the next procedure we will create a plant area named TANK-101 to hold the
tutorial modules. The name must be 16 characters or less, and may contain only
alphanumeric characters, hyphens (-), and underscores (_). Hyphens or underscores
are typically used to represent spaces between words.

 To add a plant area

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, point to Control Strategies and click the right mouse
button.

2. Select New Area from the context menu.

A new area, named AREA1, is added and appears in an edit box in the right pane.
3. Enter a new name (for our example, TANK-101) and press Enter.
Now you are ready to start creating the control modules.

4-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1680 of 2474

Exercise 2: Using the DeltaV Explorer to Copy a Module

(MTR-101)
The tank process has a pump with a two-state (on or off) motor. The motor interlocks
under certain conditions. In this exercise, you will use DeltaV Explorer to copy a
module template from the Library to the TANK-101 area and rename it. Later, you
will use Control Studio to modify the module. (Modifying includes specifying the
conditions for the interlocks.)
When you copy a module template from the Library, the module includes history
collection. History collection is added to a module or node parameter field and
defines the history collection strategy (the value recorded, how it is displayed, the
sampling period, and so on) for that field value. Library modules include history
collection so that you do not have to set up history collection when you copy a library
module to an area. You can add additional history collection to the module if you
wish. We will add history collection to the module that we create from scratch in
Exercise 5: Creating a New Module (LI-101) from Scratch. Later, we will use the
Process History View application to view the field value.

Note In naming the motor (MTR) templates, the following convention was used: the first digit
after MTR is the number of outputs; the second is the number of inputs. Thus, MTR-
11_ILOCK is for a motor with one output, one input, and interlocks.

 To copy the module and rename it

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, open Library | Module Templates | Motors-2State, and

select MTR-11_ILOCK.

2. Drag-and-drop the MTR-11_ILOCK module onto the TANK-101 plant area.

To drag-and-drop, point to MTR-11_ILOCK, hold down the left mouse button,
move the pointer to TANK-101, and release the mouse button. TANK-101 now
contains a copy of the module, named MTR-11_ILOC_1.

3. Open TANK-101 and select MTR-11_ILOC_1. The name is highlighted.

4. Click the module name a second time (or click the right mouse button and select
Rename from the context menu).

Note If you are copying a module from an area, you must hold down the Ctrl key or the module
will be moved rather than copied to the new location. If you are copying a module from
the library, it is not necessary to hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the module.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-3

 1681 of 2474

5. Enter the new name for the module: MTR-101.

Note If you are creating a module in a DeltaV Batch application, module names are limited
to 16 characters (letters, numbers, and underscores) and the first character must be a
letter. Dashes should not be used in any control module that will be used in the DeltaV
Batch system.

6. Click the minimize button in the upper right corner to minimize DeltaV
Explorer. It appears on the Windows taskbar at the bottom of your screen. To
reopen it later, simply click on its name in the taskbar.

It’s that easy. You now have a control module in your TANK-101 plant area.

Introducing Control Studio

Take a few minutes and read the next few pages to learn about the Control Studio
application before you open Control Studio and create a module. The Control Studio
window has different sections called views, that are used to define the characteristics of
a module. Each view can be closed or resized individually so that you can optimize the
size of the view you are working in.
You can set the size of the overall window by dragging the sides or corners. Then, on
the View tab, in the Windows group, click Arrange to automatically reshape the views
to a predefined arrangement.

4-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1682 of 2474

The figure above shows the default arrangement of the Control Studio views. The
views are:
 Diagram View - used to create a module’s control algorithm graphically on a
diagram (includes a palette of items that can be placed on the diagram)
 Parameter View - used to define the module’s characteristics, alarm limits,
default values, mode, and other parameters
 Hierarchy View - used to see a hierarchy of the elements that make up the
module
 Alarm View - used to see the alarms that are defined, their limits, priorities, and
other information
The palette shows the items that can be added to the diagram using the drag-and-drop
technique. Several palettes are available. You can change to a different palette by
clicking on the palette name.

Note If the palette is not showing, point to the edge of the Diagram window, hold down the
mouse button and drag the side of the window to resize it to show the palette column.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-5

 1683 of 2474

The palette can be moved from one side of the Diagram View to the other. To do this,
point anywhere on the palette, click the right mouse button, and select Switch Sides
from the menu.
The items in the palette may be displayed with either large or small icons. To change
the selection, point anywhere on the palette, click the right mouse button, and select
the desired icon size.

Note If another user has changed the Diagram Preferences (on the Diagram tab in the Layout
group), your pictures may look different than the ones in this book. The default settings
are shown below:

Parameter Filtering
Parameters are data used in module function blocks to perform calculations and logic.
Some parameters are defined and unchangeable for certain function blocks. Some
default to a most common value, but may be modified. Others must be set by the user.
Some function blocks have a large number of parameters. To help you quickly access
the ones you need, a number of parameter filtering options are available. In the
Parameter view, the Common configuration filter setting lists the parameters that are
most often used for the configuration of the control module. These parameters
generally have default values set, but should be modified to fit the application.
Parameters and parameter filtering are described in detail in the Books Online
Configuration manual.

4-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1684 of 2474

Exercise 3: Creating a Control Module (XV-101) in Control

Studio Using a Library Template
In this exercise you will use a module template to create a control module for the
block valve. This time you will use Control Studio, rather than the DeltaV Explorer, to
create the module from a library template.

Opening Control Studio

 To open Control Studio and create a module from a template

1. Click Start | DeltaV | Engineering |Control Studio.

(Another way to launch Control Studio is to click its button in the DeltaV
Explorer toolbar. We have minimized the Explorer to keep the desktop

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-7

 1685 of 2474

uncluttered; if you are comfortable using Windows, you can have several DeltaV
application windows open at once.)

2. To choose a template from the library, click the Main button, then click
New. On the New dialog, select Start from Existing and click the Browse button.

The Browse dialog box appears.

3. Click in the Object Type field at the bottom of the dialog box, and select Module
Templates.

4-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1686 of 2474

4. In the large center box that lists the contents of Module Templates, double-click
Valves-Normally Closed.
5. From the contents of Valves-Normally Closed, select VLVNC-11. (This name is
automatically placed in the Object name field.)

6. Click OK in the Browse dialog box.

7. Click OK in the New dialog box.

Control Studio now displays an untitled copy of the VLVNC-11 module.

Modifying the XV-101 Control Module

The module template is fairly simple, consisting of only one function block. To
customize the module for the tank application, all you need to do is identify the
Device Signal Tags for the input and output. (Device Tags are assigned to the I/O

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-9

 1687 of 2474

channels as part of the I/O card configuration process, described in Chapter 8.) Refer
to the Glossary for definitions of Device Tag and Device Signal Tag.

 To modify the control module

1. In Diagram View, click the Device Control function block, DC1.

Four small black squares (called “handles”) appear at the corners to indicate that
this block is the currently selected item on the diagram.
Filtering may be applied to limit the list of parameters displayed.

2. Select a parameter, click the right mouse button, and select Filter Parameter List.

The Parameter Filtering dialog box opens.

3. Select Common configuration to display the group of parameters that are

identified as the most commonly used in process control configuration and
select On-line to display the parameters most commonly used for operating a
process.

4-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1688 of 2474

4. Deselect any other boxes that may be checked by clicking on each, and click OK
to close the dialog.

5. In the Parameter View, scroll down the list if necessary, and select IO_IN_1.

6. Double-click the IO_IN_1 parameter to open the Properties dialog box.

7. In the Device Tag field, enter LSC-1. (LSC-1 is the Device Tag used in our tank
example for Limit Switch-Closed.)
The Device Tags for the tank application are listed in the table in Chapter 2.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-11

 1689 of 2474

The IO_IN_1 parameter is given a value of FIELD_VAL_D. (You can click in

the Parameter field to see this value. It also appears in the Parameter view.) LSC-
1, together with the FIELD_VAL_D parameter define the Device Signal Tag
(DST).
(If you have configured placeholders for the I/O cards, as described in Chapter 8,
you can browse for the Device Tags. Clicking the Browse button opens a dialog
box that lists all the configured I/O card channels and their assigned Device Tags.
You can scroll down the list, select the appropriate Device Tag, and click OK.
Click the Alphabetic tab to alphabetize the list and scroll past the entries
beginning with COxx to get to the Device Tag names such as LSC-1.)
8. Click OK.

9. In the Parameter View, double-click IO_OUT_1.

The Properties dialog box appears.
10. In the Device Tag field, enter XV-1 and click OK.
XV-1 is the Device Tag used in our example for the Block Valve. The DST is
given a default parameter value of OUT_D.
The Parameter list should now look like this:

4-12 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1690 of 2474

Exercise 4: Finishing Steps for All Control Modules

There are four things that you should do every time you create a control module.
 Identify the operator pictures that will be associated with the module.
 Assign the module to a controller.
 Save the module to the database.
 Verify the module’s configuration.
The procedures for accomplishing these tasks follow. (An additional step is
downloading. Modules can be downloaded to a controller individually. However, we
will download our whole control strategy at one time, as you will see at the end of this
chapter.)

Identifying the Operator Pictures Associated with a Module

Three types of operator pictures are associated with control modules: the Primary
Control picture, the Faceplate picture, and the Detail picture.
You will see what these pictures look like and how they are used in Chapter 5,
Creating Operator Pictures and Chapter 6, Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode. For
now, you simply need to know how to associate the module with the pictures.

 To identify the Primary Control picture associated with this control module

1. In Control Studio, click the Main button, point to Module, then click Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-13

 1691 of 2474

2. Click the Displays tab and, under Primary Control, enter TANK101.
This will be the name for the Primary Control picture that will be associated with
this control module. You will create the Primary Control picture TANK101 later
(in Chapter 5).

Note Picture file names must be alphanumeric and cannot contain the hyphen character, begin
with a number, or use a Visual Basic reserved word.

Note that the fields for Detail picture and Faceplate picture are already filled in.
All the control module templates in the library have pre-defined Detail and
Faceplate pictures associated with them.

3. Click OK.

Assigning the Module to a Controller Node

If you configured a controller or created a placeholder controller, you will be able to
assign the module to the controller. If you have not configured a controller, go to the

4-14 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1692 of 2474

section “Configuring the Controller Node” on page 8-17 for information on how to
do this. For information on connecting your controller hardware, refer to the
hardware manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System.

 To assign the control module to a controller node

1. Click the Main button, point to Download, then click Assign to Node.
The Browse dialog box opens.

2. In the Browse dialog box, select the controller.

3. Click OK.

Note After clicking OK in the Browse dialog box, an information message appears, notifying
you that assigning a module to a node will modify the database. Click Yes to confirm
that you want to assign the module.

Saving the Module

 To save the control module

1. Click the Save button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

The Browse dialog box opens.

2. In the Objects Type box, select Modules.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-15

 1693 of 2474

3. In the Look In field select Control Strategies, and double-click TANK-101.

MTR-101, the module we created earlier in the DeltaV Explorer, is in the list of
modules.

4. In the Object Name box, type XV-101 as the name for this module and click
Save.

Verifying the Module Configuration

 To verify the module’s configuration

1. Click the Main button, point to Module, then click Properties.

The Properties dialog box opens.

2. Click the Tools tab.

4-16 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1694 of 2474

3. Click the Verify Now button.

A message is displayed it may contain minor warnings due to I/O references.

4. Click OK to close the message box and click OK on the Properties dialog.
You now have two control modules, one for the motor and one for the block
valve. You have learned quite a bit, which you will be able to put to use in the
following exercises.
If you want to take a break you can quit Control Studio by clicking the Close button in
the upper right corner. Before starting the next exercise, simply start Control Studio
from the Start button.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-17

 1695 of 2474

Exercise 5: Creating a New Module (LI-101) from Scratch

In this exercise, you will use Control Studio to create from scratch a module to
monitor the tank level. The module will have one analog input function block (to
allow reading of the analog input signal) and one output, a promoted parameter.
Promoted parameters are available under the Special Items palette. The promoted
output parameter allows this value to be more easily accessed systemwide.
Four other changes will be made.
 The IO parameter of the analog input block will be edited to identify the Device
Signal Tag for the level transmitter, LT-1.
 The OUT_SCALE parameter on the analog input block will be changed from the
default value of 100 to 10,000 to reflect the 10,000-gallon capacity of the tank.
 The HI_HI_LIM value will be changed to 1000.
 History collection will be added to the PV of the AI block so that the tank level
can be trended in the Process History View application.

 To create a new module

1. In Control Studio, click the Main button, then click New. The New dialog box
appears.

2. Click OK to accept the default settings in the New dialog.

Control Studio opens with a blank, untitled Function Block diagram.

4-18 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1696 of 2474

 To add and modify a function block for analog input

1. Select IO palette category. A list of function blocks related to I/O appears.

2. Select the Analog Input (AI) function block from the palette; drag-and-drop it
onto the Function Block diagram.

3. To find out more about this function block, point to the AI block, click the right
mouse button and select What’s this? from the menu.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-19

 1697 of 2474

Tip To access detailed information, you can click the Books Online (Reference) icon at the end
of the pop-up text. After reading about the function block, click the Close button in the
Books Online window to quit that application and return to Control Studio.

4. Make sure the block is selected.

5. In the list of parameters, double-click HI_HI_LIM (or click the right mouse
button and select Properties).

6. In the Properties dialog box, change the value to 1000 and click OK.

7. Double-click the IO_IN parameter.

4-20 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1698 of 2474

8. In the Properties dialog box, enter the Device Signal Tag, LT-1 (for the level
transmitter), and click OK. The system selects the default parameter.
In the Parameter list, note that the parameter named L_TYPE (linearization type)
has a default value of Indirect. This must remain Indirect for you to be able to
define the Engineering Units of the input.
9. To set the Engineering Units (EU) and the scale, double-click the OUT_SCALE
parameter.

10. Modify OUT_SCALE as follows:

• Change the 100% scale from 100 to 10000 (for 10,000 gallons).
• For Engineering unit descriptor, select gal (for gallons).
11. Click OK.
For our example, we would like to make the output value easy to reference system
wide. Promoting the parameter to the module level allows the value to be referenced
throughout the system as LI-101/PV rather than LI-101/AI1/OUT.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-21

 1699 of 2474

 To add a module-level parameter for output of the process value

1. Select the Special Items palette.

2. Select the Output parameter, click the right mouse button, and select What’s
This? from the menu to get a description.

3. Drag-and-drop the Output parameter onto the diagram to the right of the AI
function block.
A Properties dialog box appears.

4. Change the parameter name to PV (for process value).

4-22 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1700 of 2474

5. Select Floating point with status in the Parameter field, select I/O in the
Parameter category field, accept the default status (it will be overwritten), and
click OK.
The block named PV now appears on the Function Block Diagram.

 To add history collection to the PV

1. Select the AI block in the Diagram View.

2. In the Parameter View list, click the right mouse button on PV and select Add
History Recorder.
The Add History Collection dialog opens.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-23

 1701 of 2474

3. The path to the current value for the PV (AI1/PV.CV) appears in the Parameter
field path box. (If this path does not appear here, click the Browse button and
browse for it.)

4. Click Enabled.

5. Click Line as the Display Representation.

Note The line style can be changed in the Process History View application.
6. Use the default value of 60 seconds as the sampling period.

7. Click OK.
Later, we will assign the area (TANK-101) to the Continuous Historian subsystem,
enable history collection on the workstation, and download the workstation in order
to collect and view the historical data for the field values.

 To connect the two blocks

1. Click the Out connector on the AI block and hold down the left mouse button.
(The focus must be in Diagram View for this button to be active.)

4-24 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1702 of 2474

2. While holding down the left mouse button, draw a line from the Out parameter
on the AI block to the PV parameter.
The pencil changes to a * when you are over the right spot for making the
connection.

Tip If you want to rearrange the diagram, click one of the function blocks and move it. The
connector line moves and resizes automatically.

Your finished diagram should look like this:

Finishing the LI-101 Module

 To finish the module

We have abbreviated the instructions for finishing the module. If you have forgotten
any of the steps, refer to the details in Exercise 4.
1. Right-click the Diagram View, then click Properties and set the Primary Control
picture to TANK101.

2. Assign the control module to the controller.

3. Save the control module in area TANK-101 under the object name LI-101.
When you have finished, quit Control Studio. Do not simply minimize Control
Studio. In the next exercise, we will show you a new way to open Control Studio
directly from the Explorer. If you minimize Control Studio, you will have two copies
of Control Studio open.
If you have the DeltaV Explorer minimized, restore it to full size by clicking on its
name in the Windows taskbar at the bottom of your screen. Otherwise, open it from
the Start button.

Exercise 6: Creating a PID Control Loop (FIC-101)

In this exercise, you will use the PID_LOOP module template from the Analog
Control group as the basis for a module to control the outlet flow valve. This time,

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-25

 1703 of 2474

you will use the DeltaV Explorer to create the module, assign it to a controller, and
modify most of the parameters.

 To create the control module and assign it to the controller

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select Library | Module Templates | Analog Control |

PID_LOOP and drag it to the TANK-101 area.

2. In the TANK-101 area, select PID_LOOP_1 and rename it to FIC-101.

3. Select FIC-101, click the right mouse button, and select Assign.
Alternatively, drag-and-drop FIC-101 from the TANK-101 area to the controller
object under the Physical Network | Control Network.

4. In the Browse dialog box, select the controller and click OK.

Note After clicking OK in the Browse dialog box, an information message appears, notifying
you that assigning a module to a node will modify the database. Click Yes to confirm
that you want to assign the module.

 To modify the control module

1. Double-click FIC-101 in the left pane to open the module.

2. If necessary, click the List button to display the contents of the right pane as
shown in the next figure.

3. Select PID1 (the PID loop function block) and make the following changes to
the parameters in the right pane.

4-26 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1704 of 2474

a. Double-click IO_IN. In the Properties box, enter the Device Tag of FT-1.

b. Double-click IO_OUT and enter the Device Tag of FY-1.

c. Double-click GAIN and change the value from .5 to 1.

d. Double-click RESET and change the value from 10 to 3 (that is, 3 seconds per
repeat).

e. Double-click PV_SCALE and change the Engineering unit descriptor to GPM

(gallons per minute).
4. In addition, note these default settings for other parameters:
• On the CONTROL_OPTS (control options) parameter, Direct acting is not
selected, meaning that it is set as reverse acting.
• On the IO_OPTS (I/O options) parameter, Increase to close is not selected,
meaning that it is set as increase to open.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-27

 1705 of 2474

Looking at the Module in Control Studio

Now let’s take a look at the module in Control Studio.

 To open the FIC-101 module for further editing in Control Studio

1. Select FIC-101 in the DeltaV Explorer.

2. Click the right mouse button and select Open | Open with Control Studio from
the context menu.
Control Studio opens with module FIC-101 preloaded.
3. Resize the individual views as necessary so that your screen looks similar to this:

4-28 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1706 of 2474

Modifying Alarms for the PID Loop Module

Alarms are used in the DeltaV Operate application (in run mode) to notify operators
about changes in the process that might require their attention. Alarms are visible on
the Alarm Banner at the bottom of the operator picture, as well as on any Faceplate
pictures or other pictures that are set to show alarms.
Alarms have been set up in the PID_LOOP template which we used as the basis for
the FIC-101 module. Take a closer look at the alarms that appear in the Alarm view,
the bottom pane in Control Studio.

Only three of the alarms, HI_ALM, LO_ALM, and PVBAD_ALM are enabled. For
the example, you will modify the HI_ALM slightly to change the value from 95 to 90.
This means that an alarm will be activated if the flow goes above 90 gallons per
minute.

 To modify the alarm

1. Double-click HI_ALM (or select HI_ALM in the Alarm View, click the right
mouse button, and select Properties).

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-29

 1707 of 2474

2. Change the Limit value from 95 to 90 and click OK.

Finishing the FIC-101 Module

 To finish the module

You have already named the module and assigned it to the controller.

1. Set the Primary Control picture to TANK101.

2. Save the module.

Exercise 7: Modifying the Motor Module (MTR-101)

Earlier in this chapter, in Exercise 2, you created the MTR-101 module in the
Explorer by copying the MTR_11_ILOCK template to the TANK-101 area. In this
lesson, you will open the module for editing in Control Studio. This module looks
complex at first, but becomes more understandable as you look at the individual parts.

Tip If you have access to a printer, you can print out the diagram, which includes
Configuration Tips. Click the Main button, then click Print. Click the diagram check

4-30 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1708 of 2474

box.

The motor module, shown later in this exercise, includes these function blocks, all of
which are from the palette group named Logical:
 Eight Condition blocks (CND)
 Boolean Fan Input (BFI) block
 Logical And (AND), logical Not (NOT), and logical Or (OR) blocks
 Device Control (DC) block
The CND, BFI, AND, NOT, and OR blocks are used to specify the interlock logic.
The DC block is for motor control.
Some of the things you will do in this exercise are:
 Delete the excess condition blocks.
 Specify the interlock conditions using the remaining three condition blocks.
 Specify the Device Signal Tags for the input and output parameters.
 Change the Detail picture associated with this module to one that has three
conditions rather than eight.

 To open the module for editing

1. In Control Studio, click the Main button, then click Open.

The Browse dialog box appears.

2. Select Modules in the Object Type field.

3. If TANK-101 is not in the Look in field, open the pull down list and select
Control Strategies. In the large center box that lists the contents of Modules,
double-click TANK-101.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-31

 1709 of 2474

4. Select MTR-101 and click Open.

The MTR-101 module is displayed in the Diagram view.
5. Enlarge the Control Studio application window to its full size by clicking the
Maximize button in the upper right corner.

6. Change the palette to Logical so you can easily access the descriptions for the
individual blocks.
(Remember, you can point to a palette item or a function block on the diagram, click
the right mouse button, and select What’s This? for a description.)

4-32 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1710 of 2474

Removing the Excess Condition Blocks

Although it does not matter if there are unused condition blocks on the Function
Block Diagram, it will improve the appearance to delete the ones that will not be
needed. You can remove the excess condition blocks and their connecting lines by
selecting one or more than one and pressing the Delete key. To select more than one,
click them while holding the Shift key, or drag a selection box around the whole
group.

 To remove the excess condition blocks

1. Place the mouse pointer outside the upper left corner of CND4.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-33

 1711 of 2474

2. Click and hold the mouse button, then drag to include the lower right corner of
the CND8 box.

The boxes named CND4 Through CND8 should be selected. If not, click a blank
spot and try again.

3. Press the Delete key to delete the selected items. (Or click the right mouse
button and select Delete from the context menu.)

4. Click Yes when asked to confirm the deletion.

The blocks and connection lines are deleted.

Specifying Conditions with the Expression Assistant

The motor should shut off if any of the following three conditions occurs:
 The block valve is closed.
 The tank level is less than 100 gallons.
 The regulatory valve is less than 5 percent open.

4-34 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1712 of 2474

Now we need a way to specify these requirements. The condition blocks serve this
purpose. Each condition will have associated with it an expression that identifies the
condition precisely in mathematical or logical terms. Expressions are made up of
operands, operators, functions, constants, and keywords.
Two guidelines for writing an expression for a condition are:
 The expression must end with a semi-colon (;).
 Parameter values are enclosed by single quotes (').
The DeltaV system provides an Expression Assistant to help you define these
expressions. After you have entered an expression, the Expression Assistant checks
the syntax, indicates problems, and identifies any unresolved parameters. The
Expression Assistant is accessed through the Object menu or context menu (right
mouse click) for Action, Calculation/Logic, and Condition function blocks. The
dialog box for the Expression Assistant looks like this:

The Expression Assistant inserts the characters shown in the following table when
constructing expressions. If you type the expressions without using the Expression
Assistant, you need to use these characters in the same way.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-35

 1713 of 2474

Table 4-1 Characters for Constructing Expressions

Characters Use Example

/ Precedes a reference to an internal

parameter (one within the current module).
Use the Insert Internal Parameter button to
browse for these parameters.

^/ Precedes a reference to an internal

parameter up one block level. Use the Insert
Internal Parameter button to browse for
these parameters.

// Precedes a reference to an external '//XV-101/DC1/PV_D.CV'

parameter (one within another module). Use
the Insert External Parameter button to
browse for these parameters.

## In Batch processing, used to enclose an

alias.

: Used to separate a named set from the 'vlvnc-sp:OPEN’

named set value.

:= Used to assign values. Step actions use this 'SP':='SFCCTRL:IDLE'

operator. The value of the right operand is
assigned to the left operand.

= Used to compare values. Similar operators 'SP'='SFCCTRL:START'

include >, <, >=, <=,!= (not equal to), <> (not
equal to). Transitions use these operators.

+ Used for addition of numeric values or for

concatenation of strings.

'' Single quotes are used to enclose

parameters.

"" Double quotes are used to enclose strings.

; Used to continue action statements on

subsequent lines of the Expression
Assistant.

Parameter Tagnames
Parameter values are defined by their tagnames (tags, for short) in the form:
module/function block/parameter
When identifying parameter tags, you can build the tags from scratch by typing them
in or you can use the parameter browser, which is a tool for searching the database.

4-36 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1714 of 2474

Interlock Conditions
In this procedure, we will use the Expression Assistant to specify the interlock
conditions on the three condition blocks.

 To specify the first interlock condition (the block valve is closed)

1. On the View tab, in the Windows group, click Arrange so that you can see all the
views again.

2. Select the block named CND1.

3. Click the right mouse button and select Expression from the menu to open the
Expression Assistant.

4. Highlight and delete the default first line of FALSE.

5. Click the External Parameter button. This button browses for parameters that
are external to the current parameter.
The Browse dialog box opens.

6. Open the TANK-101 area.

7. Double-click these items in each succeeding level: XV-101, DC1, PV_D and CV.
The Expression Assistant assembles the tagname and puts it in the Expression
box.

8. Click or type “=”.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-37

 1715 of 2474

9. Click Named State, double-click the named set vlvnc-pv, select the state
CLOSED, and click OK.
10. Type a semicolon at the end of the expression.
The completed expression now reads as follows:
'//XV-101/DC1/PV_D.CV' = 'vlvnc-pv:CLOSED';

XV-101 is the module for the block valve; DC1 is the function block; PV_D.CV is the
current value for the process value; and CLOSED is one of the states in the named
set, vlvnc-pv. The expression indicates that an interlock should occur (the motor
should shut off) if the block valve is closed. (A named set is simply a way to define
names and equate them to integer values. Named sets are defined in the DeltaV
Explorer, under System Configuration | Setup.)

11. Click Parse.

The Expression Assistant checks the syntax. If there are any errors, correct them.

12. Click OK.

 To specify the second condition

1. Select the CND2 block and use the Expression Assistant to specify the interlock
condition as:
'//LI-101/AI1/PV.CV'< 100;

LI-101 is the control module for the level indicator. AI1 is the analog input
function block. PV.CV is the parameter for the analog input current value. The
expression indicates that an interlock should occur (the motor should shut off) if
the tank level goes below 100 gallons.

2. Click Parse, correct if necessary, and click OK.

 To specify the third condition (the regulatory valve is less than 5 percent open)

1. Select the CND3 block and use the Expression Assistant to specify the interlock
condition as:
'//FIC-101/PID1/PV.CV' < 5;

FIC-101 is the module for controlling the outlet flow (regulatory) valve. PID1 is
the loop function block, and PV.CV is the parameter indicating the current state
of the valve (percent open). The expression indicates that an interlock should
occur if the valve is less than 5 percent open.

4-38 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1716 of 2474

2. Parse the expression and click OK.

 To specify the DSTs for MTR-101

1. In the Function Block diagram, click the Device Control function block, DC1.

2. In the Parameter window, double-click the IO_IN_1 parameter. (This is the

parameter for the run status signal.)

3. In the Properties dialog box, type XI-1 in the Device Tag field and click OK.
(If you have configured the controller and I/O channels, as described in Chapter
8, you can browse for the Device Tag under the controller.)
The parameter field is automatically set to the correct parameter,
FIELD_VAL_D.

4. Double-click the IO_OUT_1 parameter. (This is the output signal from the
Discrete Loop block to the field device.)

5. In the Properties dialog box, type ZX-1 in the Device Tag field and click OK.
The parameter field is automatically set to OUT_D.

Finishing the MTR-101 Module

 To finish the module

1. Open the Properties dialog and set the Primary Control picture on the Displays
tab to TANK101.
Note that this module has two predefined pictures: DL_DT8 for the Detail
picture and DL_FP for the Faceplate picture.

2. Change the Detail picture to DL_DT3 to match the number of conditions.

3. Assign the control module to the controller.

4. Save the control module by clicking the Save button. (The module has already
been named.)

5. Minimize Control Studio by clicking the Minimize button in the upper right
corner.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-39

 1717 of 2474

Exercise 8: Creating a Sequential Function Chart

Sequential Function Charts (SFCs) are types of module algorithms that are useful for
controlling time-event sequences, such as startup or shutdown of a process. SFCs are
made up of steps and transitions. Steps contain a set of actions. A transition allows a
sequence to proceed from one step to the next when the transition condition is true.
Each time the SFC scans, the system evaluates the active steps and transitions. When a
transition evaluates as True, the step prior to the transition is made inactive and the
step following the transition becomes active.
There are no predefined module templates for SFCs since process sequences are
highly individual. In defining an SFC, you may find it helpful to first define the steps
in the process, and then identify the conditions that must be met before proceeding
from step to step.

The Sequence for the Tank Process

For the tank process, you will create an SFC to control the tank discharge. As a way to
start and stop the SFC, you will create an SFC parameter called SP that the operator
will be able to change. The SP will be manipulated with a named set called SFCCTRL.
A named set defines names and equates them to integer values. For the tank example,
you will create the named set with two values: 0=IDLE and 1=START.
Following is a suggested sequence for the tank discharge application.
Step 1: Stop (that is, set the SP to IDLE).
Transition: Wait for the user to change the SP to START.
Step 2: Put the flow loop in auto mode and set the setpoint to 50 gpm.
Transition: Wait for the regulatory valve to be 30% open.
Step 3: Open the block valve.
Transition: Confirm that the block valve is open.
Step 4: Start the pump.
Transition: Confirm that the pump has started.
First, you will create the named set, SFCCTRL, in the DeltaV Explorer. Then you
will go to Control Studio to create the module containing the Sequential Function
Chart.

4-40 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1718 of 2474

 To create the named set

1. Open (or restore) the DeltaV Explorer.

2. Select System Configuration | Setup | Named Sets.

3. Point to Named Sets in the left pane, click the right mouse button and select
New | Named Set.
A new entry, NamedSetn (where n is the next number available), is added to the
end of the list of existing named sets. The entry is in an edit box, ready to be
renamed.

4. Type the new name, SFCCTRL, and press Enter.

5. Double-click SFCCTRL (or select SFCCTRL, click the right mouse button, and
select Properties from the menu).
The Properties dialog box appears.
6. Type Sequence Control in the description box.

7. Click Add.
The State Properties dialog box appears.

8. Type IDLE in the Name box and click OK.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-41

 1719 of 2474

Note Named sets are case-sensitive. They may be defined using uppercase or lowercase
characters, but all future references to the state must be as originally defined.

9. To add another state, click Add.

10. Type START in the Name box and click OK.
The Properties dialog box now has 2 named states, IDLE and START.

11. Click OK to save the set and close the dialog box.

12. Minimize the DeltaV Explorer.

4-42 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1720 of 2474

Creating the SFC Module

Now you are ready to create the Sequential Function Chart. Here are the things you
will do in the following exercises:
 Create an SFC module.
 Add a parameter, SP, to the module to let the operator change the state from
IDLE to START.
 Add the steps and transitions to the SFC.

 To create a Sequential Function Chart

1. Restore Control Studio by clicking its button on the Windows task bar.

2. Click the Main button, then click New.

3. In the New dialog box, select Control Module or Template as the Object Type.

4. Select Sequential Function Chart as the Algorithm Type and click OK.
A new SFC diagram opens, with a single step, S1.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-43

 1721 of 2474

 To add the SP parameter

1. Click in the Parameter View, click the right mouse button, and select Add from
the menu.
The Properties dialog box appears.

2. Type SP as the Parameter Name.

3. Select Named Set as the Parameter type.

4. For the Named set and Named state, browse and select SFCCTRL |IDLE.

5. Click OK. The parameter is added to the module.

 To create a step action in the SFC

1. In the Diagram View, select the step box named S1.

2. Click the name, S1, and change it to STOP_AND_WAIT.

4-44 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1722 of 2474

3. In the step Action View (in the lower right corner), click the right mouse button
and select Add.
The Properties dialog box appears.

4. Enter the Step Description: Stop and Wait.

5. For the Action type, select Assignment. (This type assigns the result of an
expression to a destination.)

6. For the Action qualifier, select P Pulse.

A pulse action of any type means the action is only active on the first scan when
the step goes active. Thus, the assignment statement is evaluated and the
assignment made on the first scan through the step actions when the step goes
active. After the first scan, the assignment destination retains the assigned value; it
is not rewritten for each scan.

7. To set the setpoint to the IDLE state, type the Action expression:
'SP':='SFCCTRL:IDLE'; (remember: named sets are case-sensitive.)

An alternative is to click the Expression Assistant button to open the Expression

Assistant to define the Action expression. (The Expression Assistant was used
earlier to define the interlock conditions for the motor control module.) Click the

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-45

 1723 of 2474

Insert Named State button in the Expression Assistant to define the Action
expression.
8. Click OK on the Properties dialog box. If necessary, make any corrections, and
click OK.

9. Select the step action (A1) in the Step Action View, right-click and select
Rename, and change the name to SET_TO_IDLE.
Giving the step actions meaningful names instead of A1, A2, etc., helps you
identify a particular action you may want to modify.

 To create a transition in the SFC

1. From the palette of All SFC Items, click Transition, drag to a point below
the box named STOP_AND_WAIT, and release the mouse button.
A plus sign named T1 appears.
2. Click the right mouse button and select Properties (or double-click the
transition).
The Properties dialog box appears.
3. Enter the transition description (Wait until Start), open the Expression Assistant
and build the condition statement:
'SP'= 'SFCCTRL:START'

4-46 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1724 of 2474

4. Click Parse on the Expression Assistant. Correct, if necessary, and click OK on

both dialogs.
5. Rename the transition to WAIT_UNTIL_START.

 To complete the Sequential Function Chart diagram

1. Repeat the procedures for adding steps and transitions using the information in
Table 4-2, which follows. (Drag-and-drop Step and Transition icons from the
palette or use the Sequence item on the palette to automatically add multiple steps
and transitions in one operation. Use a Termination icon for the last transition.)

Tip On the View tab, in the Diagram group, click Diagram Preferences and check Display
Grid and Snap to Grid to help you line up the SFC objects on the diagram.

Note In the example, all Action Types are Assignment; all Action Qualifiers are Pulse,
except for Action 2 in Step 2, which has an Action Qualifier of Non-stored. (The reason
is that if Action 2 Step 2 were Pulse, it might not get set because it waits until the actual
mode is Auto. It would fail on the first try and never be set.)
2. Use the Connect Mode tool to connect the steps and transitions in order.
3. Change the step and transition names by clicking the right mouse button,
selecting Rename, and typing the Name listed in the table.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-47

 1725 of 2474

Note Read the table footnote for important information about statement syntax.
Table 4-2 Actions and Transitions in the SFC

Step/Transition Name Action Text or Condition Text* Description

S1 STOP_AND_WAIT 'SP':='SFCCTRL:IDLE'; Inhibits startup sequence

(until the user changes the
SP to START).

T1 WAIT_ UNTIL_START 'SP'='SFCCTRL :START' Waits until operator selects

START. If SP is START,
proceeds to the next step.

S2 SET_FLOW_RATE A1: '//FIC-101/PID1/MODE. Sets the flow loop to AUTO.

TARGET':= AUTO;
Sets the setpoint at 50 GPM.
A2: '//FIC-101/PID1/SP':=50;
(Action Qualifier is Non-Stored.)

T2 WAIT_FOR_OUT_30 '//FIC-101/PID1/OUT' > 30 Waits for the regulatory valve

to be 30% open.

S3 OPEN_BLK_VLV '//XV-101/DC1/SP_D':=1; Opens the block valve.

T3 WAIT_VLV_OPEN '//XV-101/DC1/PV_D'=1 Confirms that the block valve

is open.

S4 START_PUMP '//MTR-101/DC1/SP_D':=1; Starts the pump.

T4 WAIT_PUMP_START '//MTR-101/DC1/PV_D'=1 Confirms the pump started.

* IMPORTANT: Step actions use a special assignment operator (:=) and end with a semicolon (;). Transitions use an
equals sign (=) to indicate that when the condition is true, the next step should be made active. Parameter values are
enclosed in single quotes.

4-48 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1726 of 2474

The finished SFC looks like the following.

Finishing the SFC Module

 To finish the SFC

1. Select File Properties and set the Primary Control picture to TANK101.

2. Click the Assign to Node button on the toolbar and assign the SFC module to
the controller.

3. Click the Save button and save the SFC module as SFC-START.

4. Quit Control Studio by clicking the Close button in the upper right corner.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-49

 1727 of 2474

Exercise 9: Downloading the Modules

Now that the control modules are all defined, you need to download the control
strategy to the controller, assuming you have a controller configured. If you are
working with a controller placeholder, you can assign the modules to the
placeholder, but you cannot do a download.
There are several different levels of downloads. In the DeltaV Explorer, you can
download:
 individual modules
 the controller node
 the control network, including the workstations and controllers

Important If you are working on a system that is controlling a process, it is recommended that you
do not perform any downloads for this tutorial unless you understand the impact of doing
so.

Note You must load and assign the controller licenses before downloading the modules to the
controller. Loading and assigning licenses is described in Chapter 8.

 To download the modules

1. Open (or restore) the DeltaV Explorer and open System Configuration |
Physical Network | Control Network | CTLR1 (or your controller name) |
Assigned Modules. (This shows you all the modules you have assigned to the
controller.)
2. Point to Control Network, click the right mouse button, and select Download
| Control Network.

4-50 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1728 of 2474

3. When asked, confirm that you want to proceed with the download.

4. When asked, confirm that you want to check the configuration.

A window opens to show you the progress of the download and to let you know
when it is complete.

Creating and Downloading the Control Strategy 4-51

 1729 of 2474

5. When the download is complete, click Close.

6. Quit DeltaV Explorer and any other DeltaV applications you have open.

A Look Ahead
That’s it for creating and downloading the control strategy. You have created the four
control modules needed for the tank application and the sequential function chart
module for automating the process.
In the next chapter you will learn about the DeltaV operating environment and how
to create the operator pictures.

4-52 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1730 of 2474

Chapter 5 Creating Operator Pictures

In this section you will learn how to use DeltaV Operate in configure mode to create
an operator picture (TANK101) for the example process system. Before creating
process graphics, you need to understand some things about the DeltaV Operate
application—to learn the importance of designing for the operating environment. Later you
will see the finished picture from the operator’s point of view.

Important There are a few things you should know and a few rules that you must follow when
designing operator pictures. Pay particular attention to the paragraphs marked
Important.
The DeltaV Operate application has extensive online documentation in the DeltaV
Books Online. If you will be using this application, you will want to become familiar
with the full range of features it provides. This tutorial only touches the surface.
One very helpful feature is the ability to toggle between the two DeltaV Operate
modes: configure and run. While you are creating a picture in configure mode, you
can preview the picture in run mode. This lets you test the elements of the picture,
such as links and push buttons, as you create them.

The DeltaV Operating Environment

It is important to understand the operating environment for a DeltaV process system
before you start creating pictures to be used in that environment. The DeltaV Operate
application functions in two modes:
 Configure mode — used to create pictures
 Run mode — used to run pictures in the DeltaV Operate application
Let’s start by taking a look at the standard DeltaV operator desktop, as seen in the
DeltaV Operate application in run mode.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-1

 1731 of 2474

This desktop was designed specifically for use with DeltaV process systems. It is made
up of three windows: the Toolbar window, the main window, and the Alarm Banner
window. The Toolbar buttons provide single-click access to important pictures,
directories, and other applications.

Important Although it is possible to add, modify, or delete buttons from the Toolbar and make
other changes to the operator desktop, it is recommended that you do not do any
customizing until you are thoroughly familiar with the purpose and function of all its
elements.
The Alarm Banner at the bottom of the desktop also has important predefined
functions. The large buttons are used to notify the operator of the highest priority
alarms that have been activated. When an alarm is tripped, the name of the associated
control module (such as XV-101) is displayed on one of the alarm buttons. By clicking
one of these buttons, the operator goes directly to the appropriate process graphic for
taking action on that alarm (the Primary Control picture and/or the Faceplate
picture). The Alarm Banner also includes a node monitor button to let you monitor
the current status of your controllers and workstations.

5-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1732 of 2474

You may remember that we assigned a Primary Control picture to each control
module as one of the finishing steps. For modules created from library templates,
Faceplate pictures are predefined. A little later you will learn more about the Alarm
Banner and how to acknowledge alarms.
The main window is where the operator views a main picture, which is typically a
process graphic that provides a view of the process or equipment. A main picture is
any picture created using the main template. The main template has some predefined
features, such as a small toolbar (with five buttons) in the upper left corner. The
template also contains some picture commands that are required by the DeltaV
environment.
Even in relatively small process systems, there are likely to be a number of main
pictures. Each main picture is created and saved as a picture file with its own unique
name.

Important The most important thing to remember about main pictures is that they must start from
the predefined template named main. Only subordinate pictures, such as pop-up
messages to operators, should be created without using the main template. If you create a
new picture file from scratch or use a different template as a basis, much of the DeltaV
Operate environment will not work.

Developing a Picture Hierarchy

A process application normally has a number of linked pictures, such as plant
overview, process monitoring, system status, alarm summary, and trend pictures.
There may also be pop-up windows for things like operator messages and help.
Therefore, in addition to creating individual pictures, you will need to develop a
system for linking pictures so that operators can easily get to the one they need.

The Overview Picture and the UserSettings File

The DeltaV system starts you off with an Overview picture that you can tailor to fit
your application. Generally, the Overview is used as the top level in the hierarchy. You
can add pushbuttons to the Overview that let you link to other pictures. You can even
use a photograph or drawing with hotspots (rather than pushbuttons) that link your
Overview to other pictures.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-3

 1733 of 2474

The design of your Overview picture is limited only by your imagination. Here is an
example:

Important The Overview picture has its own button on the Toolbar, so no matter how deep
an operator gets into the hierarchy of pictures, it is always easy to get back to the
Overview. This is one reason why you should put some thought into your Overview
picture and how to make it useful for navigating to other important pictures.
The Overview picture has initial text explaining how to rename the Overview picture
by editing the file UserSettings (or User_Ref) in the Standard folder in the system tree.
This file is for advanced users who want to rename the Overview, set up the Display

5-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1734 of 2474

History List with a predefined list of pictures, modify or add global variables, and do
other tasks that define the operator’s startup environment. It is beyond the scope of
this introductory manual to go into this in detail. To learn more about the
UserSettings file and global variables, refer to Books Online.

Navigating to Other Pictures

Important When you set up navigational tools, the new picture should in most cases replace the
current picture loaded in the main window. The operator should not have more than one
main picture open at a time.
Here are some of the ways operators can move from one picture to another.

 Each picture can have a Next Picture and Previous Picture defined for
it. The operator can easily jump to those pictures using the forward and back
arrows in the upper left corner of a picture created with the main template.

 The Main field above the tools

on the Toolbar shows the name of the current main picture. The button next to
the Main field opens a History List. Simply click a picture in the list to go to that
picture. The list can be predefined and locked to show only a select group of
pictures or it can be set up to act as a “most recently used” list that is updated with
each new jump.

 The operator can use the Open button to replace the current picture in
the main window with the selected picture file.
There can be buttons or other hotspots that activate a jump to a new graphic. The
hotspot can be a word, an icon, a section of a photograph, or whatever you want
to use as a visual clue to the jump’s destination.

 The Alarm List picture is available through a Toolbar button.

Clicking on an alarm button in the Alarm Banner immediately replaces the
current main picture with the Primary Control picture for the module and pops
up the Faceplate picture for the module indicated on the button.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-5

 1735 of 2474

Switching Between Configure and Run Modes

We mentioned earlier that you can switch to run mode from configure mode. You do
this by selecting Workspace | Switch to Run or pressing Ctrl/W. (To return to
configure mode, click the right mouse button and select Quick Edit or press Ctrl/W.)
The appearance of the DeltaV Operate window in run mode is dependent upon
settings that you make in configure mode. There are security settings that allow you to
secure the run-time environment and choose the specific actions that you want to
restrict. For example, you can restrict the operator from closing the current picture
and switching to another application. Click Workspace | User Preferences and select
the Environment Protection tab. Select the Enable Environment Protection check
box and then select the options that you want to enable.

You can control how DeltaV Operate opens in run mode by clicking the DeltaV
User Settings button on the toolbar. Experiment with these settings and refer to the
online help and to Books Online for more information.
So, for now, when you switch to run mode, do not be concerned if your pictures do
not look exactly like the images in this chapter.

Getting Started with DeltaV Operate (Configure Mode)

Let’s get started now with DeltaV Operate in configure mode.

 To launch DeltaV Operate in configure mode

1. Click Start | DeltaV | Engineering | DeltaV Operate Configure.

Note You can Press Ctrl+W or select Workspace | Switch to Run to switch to Operate run
mode. To return to configure mode, press Ctrl+W or right-click and select Quick Edit.

Note The User Preferences dialog (accessed by clicking Workspace | User Preferences)
provides means to define the DeltaV Operate start environment. To ensure security in
your plant, it is very important that you carefully develop your security scheme before
making changes to the start environment. Refer to the online help and Books Online for
more information before making changes to the User Preferences dialog.
DeltaV Operate (in configure mode) opens with a blank drawing. In addition to the
menu bar and toolbars, the window is made up of a system tree and the work area.

5-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1736 of 2474

The system tree shows a hierarchical view of the files on the local node and all objects
associated with each file. The system tree can be resized, moved, or hidden. Opening
and closing folders in the system tree is the same as opening and closing folders in the
Windows Explorer: click a plus sign (+) to open a folder and see its contents; click a
minus sign (-) to close a folder and hide its contents.
Take a few minutes now to become familiar with the system tree. Open a folder and
double-click on a file to open the file in the work area. Click the plus sign (+) next to
the file and select an object associated with the file. Notice how that object is
highlighted on the picture in the work area. Select File | Close to close the file or click
the right-mouse button and select Close. Continue to explore the system tree, and
when you ready, continue to the next section.

 To open the main template

1. In the system tree, click the plus signs next to the Pictures folder to expand its
contents, and then click the plus sign next to the Templates folder to expands its
contents.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-7

 1737 of 2474

2. Double-click the main template picture.

The main template and the Toolbox open in the Work Area. (If the Toolbox is not
visible, select Toolbars from the Workspace menu, select Picture as the toolbox
owner, and then click DeltaV_Toolbox.) Notice how a plus sign appears next to
the main picture. Click the plus signs to see the objects that make up the main
template. The main template has instructional text, including a description of the
five buttons in the upper left corner. In your system, the background color may
be gray rather than white, as shown in this document. Later, we will tell you how
to change picture background color, as well as object colors.

5-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1738 of 2474

3. Read the information on this template. Then delete the text by clicking in the
center of the page, clicking the right mouse button, and selecting Delete (or
pressing the Delete key).

4. Select File | Save As. The Save As dialog box appears.

5. Click the Up One Level button to go to the Pic folder.

6. Enter the File Name as TANK101 and click Save. (Be sure the picture is saved in
the Pic folder.)

Note Picture file names must be alphanumeric and cannot contain the hyphen character, begin
with a number, or use a Visual Basic reserved word, such as “new.”

Toolbars and the Toolbox

Toolbars contain buttons that provide shortcuts to menu commands. For

example, instead of selecting File | Save, you can click the Save Picture button on the
Toolbar. Buttons that perform similar functions are grouped into separate toolbars.
For example, the standard toolbar usually contains the Open, Close, Save, and Print
buttons.
Toolbars are owned by the WorkSpace or by Picture. The toolbar's owner defines
when the toolbar appears. For instance, WorkSpace toolbars appear when the
WorkSpace runs, Picture toolbars appear only when one or more pictures are
displayed.

Note Picture toolbars are assigned to all pictures. You cannot assign toolbars to specific
pictures.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-9

 1739 of 2474

 To see the Toolbars

1. Click Workspace | Toolbars.

The Toolbars dialog box appears. By default the Workspace toolbars are
displayed.

2. Make sure that Show Screen Tips on toolbars in the lower left corner is selected.
With Screen Tips enabled, when you pause the pointer over a tool in the Toolbox,
its name will pop up.

3. Uncheck and recheck the various toolbars to see the buttons that belong to each
toolbar. (Watch the toolbar across the top of the window and see which buttons
disappear and then reappear.)

4. Click the Customize button and use the online help to familiarize yourself with
the Customize Toolbars dialog.
Click the Help button for overall help on the dialog. For help on individual fields

in the dialog, click , then click on the field for which you want help.
Later, when you are more familiar with the tools, you can add and remove buttons
and toolbars to suit your needs.

5. Click Close on the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

6. Click Workspace | Toolbars to reopen the Toolbars dialog and select Picture in
the owner field.

5-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1740 of 2474

7. Select the DeltaV_Toolbox if it is not already selected.

DeltaV_Toolbox is a group of toolbars assembled in one dialog. It saves space on
your picture because you do not have to keep several toolbars open. By default,
docking is not enabled for the DeltaV_Toolbox and it floats regardless of its
position on the screen. The DeltaV_Toolbox contains everything from simple
drawing tools for creating lines, rectangles, and circles to complex charting tools.

8. In the Toolbars dialog, select DeltaV_Operating_Experts, if it is not already

selected.

9. Click Close on the Toolbars dialog box.

 To move and resize the Toolbox

1. Click the Toolbox title bar, hold the mouse button down, drag to a new location,
and release the mouse button.

2. Point to any corner or side of the Toolbox. The pointer changes to a two-sided
arrow.

3. Hold the mouse button down and drag to reshape the box.

4. Release the mouse button when the Toolbox is in the desired shape.

5. Repeat the moving and resizing steps as needed to suit your personal
preferences.

 To enable docking the Toolbox

1. Click Workspace | Toolbars.

2. Click Picture and click the Customize button.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-11

 1741 of 2474

3. Select DeltaV_Toolbox.

4. Select Enable docking for selected toolbar and click Close.

5. Move the toolbox to the top edge of the screen and notice how the toolbox
“docks” to the edge rather than floats over the screen.

6. Disable or enable docking to suit your personal preferences.

 To hide the Toolbox

You can hide the Toolbox by selecting its title bar, clicking the right mouse button,
and selecting Hide. You can move and resize the Toolbox and enable docking. To
open the Toolbox after hiding it, click Workspace | Toolbars, and then select Picture
in the Owner field. Scroll down, select the DeltaV_Toolbox check box, and then click
Close in the Toolbars dialog box.

Color
You can use color in two ways:

1. Adding foreground, background, or edge color to a selected object.

2. Adding color to more than one object.

To add color to a selected object, select the object, click the right mouse button,
choose Color, and then select Foreground, Background, or Edge. Once you select a
color, click OK, and close the dialog box. To add color to multiple objects, select the
Color button on the Toolbox. The Color dialog box stays on your screen as you select
colors. For the exercises in this book, we will use the first method.
The Color Selection dialog box contains two tabs that let you choose the color from a
palette or from a list of names. You select a color by clicking the color in the palette or
selecting a color from the list.
Default colors appear in the Shape Preferences tab of the User Preferences dialog
box. To change the default colors, click Workspace | User Preferences | Shape
Preferences, and then click the color box that you want to change (Foreground,
Background, or Edge) and select the new default color from the palette.

Note Changes to the default colors do not change the colors of objects that are already in the
picture.

5-12 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1742 of 2474

Tip To change the background color of the entire picture, click Edit | Picture, click in the
Background Color box, and a color palette appears from which you can select a
background color. Click OK to return to the picture and display the new background
color.

Line Styles and Fill Styles

You can also change the default line styles, widths, and fill styles using a procedure
similar to that for changing color defaults. To change the default edge styles, width,
and fill, click Workspace | User Preferences | Shape Preferences, and then edit the
default item that you want to change.
You may want to take a few minutes to experiment with drawing basic shapes and
changing the foreground, background, and edge colors. To get started, use the
following procedure.

 To draw and color a rectangle with a crosshatch appearance

1. Click the rectangle button on the Toolbox. The pointer changes to a +.

2. Hold down the mouse button, drag the pointer to set the desired size, and release
the mouse button to place a rectangle on the picture.

3. Select the rectangle, click the right mouse button and select Fill Style | Cross
Hatch.
For the remaining steps, make sure the rectangle is selected.

4. Click the right mouse button, select Edge Style | Dash Dot.
5. Click the right mouse button, select Color | Foreground and select yellow in the
palette.

6. Draw another rectangle. Note that none of the default colors, line style, or fill
style have changed.
Now you can add some basic shapes and text to your drawing using the rectangle,
oval, line, polyline, polygon, and text tools. Try coloring, moving, and resizing the
objects. (If you use the polyline or polygon tools, double-click to finish the object.)
When you have finished, click File | Close and do not save the work you have done on
the file.
If you are ready to continue, open TANK101 from the Pictures folder in the system
tree.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-13

 1743 of 2474

Links, Dynamic Properties, and Parameter References

Links allow you to display real-time and system data in the DeltaV Operate
application in run mode. There are several different types of links. The links
introduced in this tutorial are datalinks and trend links.
In configure mode, properties are parameters of objects that you can alter using tools,
menu commands, and dialog boxes. Dynamic properties are object parameters that
change in DeltaV Operate run mode based primarily on changes in database values.
(For example, a tank may change color as it fills, that is, as the current value of the
level indicator changes.)
A parameter reference identifies the database field that supplies data to a link or dynamic
property. The parameter reference syntax is
node:tag.field
where tag is usually in the form: module/function block/parameter.
For example,
DVSYS.FIC-101/PID1/SP.F_CV
is the parameter reference identifying the current value of the setpoint field
(parameter) in the PID1 function block of the FIC-101control module.
If you enter only the tag (for example, FIC-101/PID1/SP), DeltaV Operate fills in
the default node of DVSYS and uses a default current value field of either F_CV
(floating point current value) or A_CV (ASCII current value), based on the type of
data (Numeric or Text) you specify for the link. If the tag does not exist, you are asked
if you want to use it anyway.

In most dialog boxes that require entry of a parameter reference, a browser is

available to help you search through the network for a particular parameter reference.
To access the browser, click the ellipsis button next to the Source field to access the
Browse dialog box.
The Data Source Browser from the Expression Builder box appears first. Then the
Browse dialog appears after you select Browse DeltaV Control Parameters. (The first
time the parameter browser is called, it may take a few seconds for the Browse dialog
to appear.)

5-14 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1744 of 2474

Creating Datalinks
Datalinks can be used to display data as numbers or text. For the TANK101 picture,
you will create five datalinks for the following purposes:
 To display the current value of the tank level (parameter reference: LI-101/AI/
PV)
 To display the current value of the loop process value (parameter reference:
FIC-101/PID1/PV)
 To allow entry of a setpoint value for the flow loop (parameter reference:
FIC-101/PID1/SP)
 To allow the operator to set the regulatory valve position (parameter reference:
FIC-101/OUT)
 To allow the operator to start and stop the pump motor (parameter reference:
MTR-101/DC1/SP_D)

Creating Operator Pictures 5-15

 1745 of 2474

After you have created the links, your working area will look like this:

 To create a datalink for the tank level

1. Click the Datalink Stamper button in the Toolbox.

The Datalink dialog box appears.

2. To search for the parameter reference, click the ellipsis button.

5-16 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1746 of 2474

The Expression Builder dialog box appears.

3. Select Browse DeltaV Control Parameters to open the Browse dialog box. (This
may take a few seconds.)

Creating Operator Pictures 5-17

 1747 of 2474

4. If TANK-101 is not displayed in the Look in: field, click the Up One Level
button to go to Control Strategies, and then double-click the TANK-101 area.

The Up One Level button can be used to move up one level in the hierarchy.
The contents of the selected level are displayed in the list box.
A list of the modules assigned to the TANK-101 area is displayed.

5. Double-click the module name, LI-101. A list of function blocks and module-
level parameters is displayed.
6. Double-click the AI1 function block. A list of parameters is displayed for that
function block.

7. Double-click the PV parameter. A list of fields is displayed.

8. Click the CV (current value) field, then click OK. (Or, simply double-click the
CV field.)
DeltaV Operate assembles the node, tag, and field information and enters it into
the Expression Builder dialog box.

9. Click OK to return to the Datalink dialog box.

10. In the Datalink dialog box, set the Formatting Type field to Numeric, and then
click OK.
If you have not assigned the module to a controller or if you set up a placeholder
controller, you may get a message about the parameter reference not existing.
Click the Use Anyway button to be able to use this parameter reference for the
tutorial.

5-18 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1748 of 2474

Note The DeltaV Operate application reads the datalink and automatically configures the
settings in the Datalink dialog box based on the datalink.
The stamper and datalink appear and “float” on the picture.

11. Click the mouse button in the upper left quadrant to place the datalink on the
picture. (See the TANK-101 picture under Creating Datalinks for the
approximate location.)
The datalink appears on the picture as #####.##, surrounded by handles.

12. To label the datalink, click the Text button in the tool box, click to the left of
the datalink, and type LI-101/PV.

After clicking the text tool the pointer remains in text mode. Click the mouse to
change it back to an arrow pointer.

Tip To move any object, you can select it and drag it to a new location. You can use the
alignment tools to align objects horizontally and vertically. You can also use the arrow
keys on the keyboard to make minor adjustments in the position of any selected object.

 To create a datalink for the loop setpoint

1. Click the Datalink Stamper button.

2. Type in the new parameter reference as FIC-101/PID1/SP.

If you use the Parameter Browser, click the Up One Level button to go up to
the module level.
The system changes the parameter reference to DVSYS.FIC-101/PID1/
SP.F_CV. The default node for all parameter references is DVSYS.

3. Select In-Place in the Data Entry Type field (this allows operators to change the
value), and then set the Formatting Type field to Numeric.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-19

 1749 of 2474

4. Click OK.

Tip If you accidentally close the Datalink dialog box before completing your selections, double-
click the link to reopen the dialog.

5. Place the datalink in the lower right quadrant of the screen.

6. Use the Text button to add this label: FIC-101/SP.

 To create a datalink for the loop process value

1. Click the Datalink Stamper button. (This datalink will be placed below the loop
setpoint.)

2. Edit the parameter reference to be FIC-101/PID1/PV.F_CV.

3. Set the Formatting Type field to Numeric, and then click OK.

4. Place the new datalink below the loop setpoint.

5. Use the Text button to add this label: FIC-101/PV.

 To create a datalink for the loop output

1. Click the Datalink Stamper button. (This datalink will be placed below the loop
process value.)

2. Edit the parameter reference to be FIC-101/PID1/OUT.F_CV.

5-20 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1750 of 2474

3. Select In-Place in the Data Entry Type field, set the Formatting Type field to
Numeric, and then click OK to let the application configure the fields in the
dialog.

4. Select the datalink and click the DeltaV Data Entry Expert button on the
Toolbox.

5. Be sure that Numeric Entry is selected and click Fetch Limits from the Data
Source.

6. Click OK.
7. Place the datalink below the loop process value.

8. Use the Text button to add this label: FIC-101/OUT.

 To create a datalink for the block valve

1. Click the Datalink Stamper button. (This datalink will be placed in the bottom
center of the picture.)
2. Fill in the parameter reference as XV-101/DC1/PV_D.A_CV. If you browse for
the parameter reference, the system will automatically supply .F_CV (for floating
point) after PV_D. Edit the parameter reference to have .A_CV (for ASCII) after
PV_D.

3. In the Datalink dialog box, select None in the Type section and click OK to let
the application configure the remaining fields in the dialog.
4. Click the mouse to place the new datalink in the bottom center.

5. Use the Text tool to add this label: XV-101/PV.

 To create a datalink for the motor setpoint

1. Click the Datalink Stamper button. (This datalink will be placed in the bottom left
quadrant.)
2. Fill in the parameter reference as MTR-101/DC1/SP_D.A_CV.
If you browse for the parameter reference, the system will automatically supply .F
(for floating point) after SP_D. Edit the parameter reference to have .A_CV (for
ASCII) after SP_D.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-21

 1751 of 2474

Tip Select the check box Read/Write text data in the Browse dialog box to make the default
datalink A_CV.

3. In the Datalink dialog box, select None in the Type section and click OK to let
the application configure the remaining fields in the dialog.
4. Click the mouse to place the new datalink in the bottom left quadrant.

5. Select the datalink and click the Data Entry Expert button on the Toolbox.

6. Click Pushbutton in the Entry Method section.

7. Type STOP in the Open Button Title(0) field.

8. Type START in the Close Button Title(1) field.

5-22 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1752 of 2474

This data entry method lets you create a Stop and Start pushbutton for the
operators. By clicking on the datalink on the picture, the operator can start and
stop the pump motor.

9. Click OK.

10. Reposition the new datalink, if necessary, in the bottom left quadrant.

11. Use the Text tool to add this label: MTR-101/SP.

12. Select File | Close and save and close the picture.

Note It is a good idea to save your picture file any time you do a significant amount of work
on it.

Switching to DeltaV Operate in Run Mode

Let’s take a quick look at the picture in DeltaV Operate run mode.

 To switch to run mode

1. Click Workspace | Switch to Run or press Ctrl+W.

2. Click the Open Main Display button and select TANK101.

If you have a controller, the datalinks will show as numbers. The numbers will not
be realistic because we do not have any real I/O devices configured. If you have a
placeholder for a controller, the numeric datalinks will appear as symbols (such as
@ or &), as specified in the User Preferences dialog box.
3. Return to configure mode by clicking the right mouse button and selecting
Quick Edit.
Either close the DeltaV Operate application (by clicking the Close button in the upper
right corner) or continue with the next exercise.

Dynamos
As you develop a system of operator pictures, you may need to use an object (such as
a pipe, pump, or valve) in more than one picture. You can save such custom built

Creating Operator Pictures 5-23

 1753 of 2474

objects as reusable graphics called dynamos. If you assign dynamic properties to an

object, those properties are retained when you save it as a dynamo.
In configure mode, DeltaV Operate provides prebuilt dynamo sets containing
common process control objects, such as pumps, that you can paste into your pictures
rather than drawing them yourself. You can modify an existing dynamo and save it in
the original set or in a new set. You will likely want to save your most used dynamos in
your own dynamo sets.
To complete the TANK101 process picture, you will use several different dynamos
and modify their dynamic properties. Following is a brief summary of what you will
do in the next few exercises.
 Add a pump dynamo and animate the color. It will change from red to green to
signal the pump going from off to on.
 Add a tank dynamo with dynamic properties. The tank level will change to show
the gradual discharge of its contents.
 Add a block valve and regulatory valve. The valves will change color to show their
state (closed or open).
 Add pipes to connect the other objects. These could also be made to change
color, but you will not assign dynamic properties in the example.
The picture will look something like the following figure. Use this as a guideline for
placing objects on your picture.

5-24 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1754 of 2474

Creating a Pump Using a Dynamo

If DeltaV Operate is not open, open it in configure mode, expand the Pictures folder
in the system tree, and double-click the tank picture file, TANK101.

 To open the pump dynamo set and paste a dynamo on your picture

1. From the system tree in configure mode, expand the Dynamo Sets folder, and
double click PumpsAnim.
The dynamo set opens at the bottom of your screen.

2. Back in the system tree, expand the PumpsAnim folder, and select
PumpsAnimVertA1.
The dynamo PumpsAnimVertA1 is highlighted in the Dynamo Set at the bottom
the screen.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-25

 1755 of 2474

3. Select PumpsAnimVertA1 and drag it onto the picture. (Alternatively, you can
drag the dynamo name from the system tree onto the picture.)
Because this dynamo has animation properties, you are asked if you want to
animate the pump color.

We will animate the pump color so it changes from red to green when the pump goes
from Stop to Start.

4. Select the check box Animate Pump Color.

The Color By dialog opens.

5. Browse for MTR-101/DC1/SP_D/CV as the digital tag for the pump.

6. Select Exact Match.

7. Click the Delete Row button and delete all but two rows.

8. Set the value in the first row to 0.00, click the color bar, and select red.

9. Set the value in the second row to 1.00, click the color bar, and select green.

5-26 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1756 of 2474

10. Click OK on both dialog boxes.

The pump is placed on the picture.

Creating a Tank Using a Dynamo

Now you will add a tank that, in run mode, is supposed to show the level of the
product in the tank by changing color. (This will not actually happen, since we do not
have a working system with I/O.)

 To create the tank using a dynamo

1. First, close the PumpsAnim dynamo set by selecting PumpsAnim in the system
tree, clicking the right mouse button, and selecting Close.

2. Double-click the TanksAnim1 dynamo set in the system tree to open the
dynamo set.

3. Drag the tank labeled TankWDoorD1 to your picture, placing it a little above the
motor, as in the figure shown earlier.

4. On the Tank Dynamo dialog box, browse for the following tag for the tank level.
LI-101/AI1/PV/CV

Creating Operator Pictures 5-27

 1757 of 2474

The system automatically adds .F_CV as the field.

5. Select Fetch Limits from Data Source.

6. Click OK.
The tank is placed on the picture.
7. Close the TanksAnim1 dynamo set.

Finishing the Process Picture

For other parts of the picture, use the dynamos in the following table and arrange
them as shown in the earlier illustration of the process graphic. Be sure to read the
table footnotes for the block valve and regulatory valve. If you have forgotten how to
animate the color for the regulatory valve, refer to the procedure for animating the
pump on page 5-25.

5-28 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1758 of 2474

Item Parameter Reference for Dynamo Set Dynamo

Dynamic Properties

Pipes No dynamic properties Pipes As needed

Block valve XV-101/DC1/PV_D/CV ValvesAnim ValveHorizontalOnOff1a

Regulatory valve FIC-101/PID1/PV/CV ValvesAnim ValveHorizontalControl1b

a.In the Valve Dynamo dialog box, choose Animate Valve Color, and set two colors, as you
did earlier for the Pump Dynamo earlier.
b.In the Valve Dynamo dialog box, choose Animate Valve Color. In the Color By dialog box,
choose Color by Current Value. Under the Color Threshold, select Range and set the colors
as follows: 0-50 is red; 50-100 is green.

A pipe can be lengthened or widened by selecting the pipe, dragging one of its resizing
handles, and releasing the mouse button. In fact, any of the graphic objects, including
text, can be resized and reshaped by dragging the side or corner handles.
The following procedure shows a suggested order for creating the objects. You can
create them in any order you want.

 To add the remaining dynamos

1. Add the vertical pipe to connect the tank and motor. Add an elbow pipe section
to connect the motor to the horizontal pipe. Move and resize objects as
necessary.

2. Add the block valve (for XV-101) according to the information in the table.

3. Add a pipe to connect the pump and block valve.

4. Add the regulatory valve for the control loop (FIC-101).

5. Add two sections of pipe between the block valve and regulatory valve by
copying and pasting (or duplicating) the existing section of horizontal pipe. Click
the right mouse button and use the context menu to select your editing choices.
6. Using the Line tool, draw short vertical lines to indicate the orifice plate
measuring the flow.

7. Rearrange your datalinks so that your picture now looks like the illustration
shown earlier. Add text labels as shown.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-29

 1759 of 2474

Trend Links
Trend links are used to provide real-time trend charts in run mode. The links can use
trend data from any floating point database field (.F_). You add charts by selecting the
chart tool from the Toolbox. The chart tool gives you control over the layout, pen
color definition, and so on.

 To add a 3-pen chart

1. Click the Chart button on the Toolbox and move the cursor onto the picture.
The cursor turns into a cross-hair.

2. Click the mouse and drag it to form a rectangle. (Refer to the illustration of the
process graphic to size the rectangle.)
3. Release the mouse button to place the chart on the picture.

4. Select the chart and move it to the upper right corner of your working area.

5. Select the chart, click the right mouse button, select Chart Configuration, and
then click the Chart tab.

6. To configure each of the pens with the following parameter paths, click the
Add Pen button, and then select them from the pull-down list:
DVSYS.FIC-101/PID1/PV.F_CV
DVSYS.FIC-101/PID1/SP.F_CV
DVSYS.FIC-101/PID1/OUT.F_CV

7. Select and delete the default pen (FIX32.NODE.TAG.F_CV) from the Pen List
area when you originally opened the Chart Configuration dialog box.

8. Click the Y-Axis tab and change the title to Flow.

9. Enable the Apply to All Pens field.

5-30 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1760 of 2474

10. Click the X-Axis tab and change the title to Time.

11. Take all other defaults or experiment with the settings and click OK.
The chart is placed on the picture.

12. Save the picture.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-31

 1761 of 2474

Setting Previous and Next Pictures

At the beginning of this chapter, we talked about picture hierarchies and linking
pictures to make it easy for the operator to go through a series of related pictures in a
defined order. You set the order by setting the Next and Previous Pictures in the
Picture dialog box. The operator can go forward and back through the defined
sequence by clicking the arrow buttons that are standard in the main template.
By default, the Overview button on the DeltaV opening picture is connected to a
standard Overview picture. In our example, the hierarchy for the tank process will
consist of a simple loop connecting the TANK101 picture to a copy of the standard
Overview picture. If we also connected the main DeltaV opening picture to our copy
of the standard Overview picture, the organization of pictures would look as follows:

In a more complex system, this horizontal loop might contain a series of tank pictures
or perhaps a progression from a tank picture to a boiler picture to a reactor picture.
You can have a number of these horizontal loops to define sequences of related
pictures. It is just a matter of determining the sequence you want and then setting the
Next and Previous pictures.
In addition, you can have jump-style links, such as pushbuttons, to replace the current
picture with one that is not in the defined sequence. Such links can be placed on your
Overview picture or any other picture.

 To set TANK101 as the next picture for the Overview picture

1. Open the Overview picture (Ovw_ref.grf) in the Pictures folder in the system
tree. (Do not make any changes on this picture.)

2. Save the file as My_Ovw_ref.

5-32 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1762 of 2474

3. Double-click the Next and Previous picture button.

4. For the Next Picture, enter TANK101, and click OK.

5. Save and close the My_Ovw_ref picture.

 To link the TANK101 picture with the Overview

1. Open the TANK101 picture in configure mode if it is not already open.

2. Double-click the Previous and Next Picture buttons in the top left corner of the
TANK101 picture.

3. For the Previous Picture, click the ellipsis mark button next to the Picture Name
field.

4. Select My_Ovw_ref.grf and click Open.

5. For the Next Picture, click the question mark button next to the Picture Name
field, select My_Ovw_ref.grf, and click Open.

6. Click OK on the Previous/Next Picture dialog box.

7. Save the picture by selecting File | Save.

Creating a Pushbutton to Start the SFC

After creating the control modules to monitor and control the equipment and flow
loop, you created a Sequential Function Chart to automate the discharge process.
Now you need a way to enable the operator to start the SFC.
There are a number of ways to do this. For instance, you could add another datalink
that allows data entry, with the choices of START and STOP.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-33

 1763 of 2474

Another simple method is to put a pushbutton on the TANK101 operator picture.

 To create a pushbutton to start the SFC

1. On the Menu bar, click Insert | Push Button.

2. Move the pushbutton to a blank area near the link named FIC-101/MODE.

3. Click the Text tool on the Toolbox and type the text to appear on the
button: Start Discharge.
4. Resize the pushbutton to accommodate the text label. To do this, click the box
and drag its handles.

5. Select the pushbutton and click the Task Wizard button on the Toolbar.
The Task Wizard dialog box opens.

6. Select Command as the Task Category and scroll down to Write Value to Tag
Expert in the Tasks list.

7. Click the Perform Task button.

The Write a Value Expert dialog box opens.

8. In the Fix Database Tag field, type or search for:

DVSYS.SFC-START/SP.F_CV

9. Click Numeric and type 1 in the Value field.

5-34 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1764 of 2474

This command sets the value for the SFC to 1, which was defined to be the
START value in the SFCCTRL named set.

10. Click Close on the Task Wizard.

11. Save TANK101.

12. Quit DeltaV Operate.

Note Another way to assign the Start command to the pushbutton is to select the pushbutton,
click the right mouse button, select Edit Script, and edit the Visual Basic script for the
Pushbutton object.

Creating Operator Pictures 5-35

 1765 of 2474

5-36 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1766 of 2474

Chapter 6 Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode

DeltaV Operate, in run mode, provides a consistent, intuitive environment for
process operation. A standard operator desktop and operating features make it easy to
learn how to use this application.
If you have installed the control modules to a controller, you will see numbers (rather
than symbols) when you go to the TANK101 picture. These numbers will not be
realistic, unless you have I/O with actual signals. So, unfortunately, you will not be
able to see the tank discharging its contents or get the full effect of working in an
operator environment.

 To open DeltaV Operate

1. Click Start | DeltaV | Operator | DeltaV Operate Run.

DeltaV Operate opens in run mode, displaying the DeltaV startup screen.

Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode 6-1

 1767 of 2474

Tip If your picture does not line up correctly with the Toolbar and Alarm Banner, click
the Reset Layout button to fix the layout.

 To learn about the picture layout

1. Click the small black question mark in the upper right corner.
This displays a help system description of the buttons on the Toolbar.

2. Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the help window to close
the help window.

3. Click the small question mark in the lower right corner to see a description of the
fields in the Alarm Banner at the bottom of the screen.

4. Click the Close button in the upper right corner to close the help window.

5. Click the DeltaV Utilities button on the Toolbar.

This button opens a toolbar that contains links to other DeltaV applications
(FlexLock, DeltaV Explorer, Control Studio, Recipe Studio, DeltaV Books
Online, and DeltaV Operate Pictures Help).

6. Click the Books Online button to open it. The DeltaV Operate section is
titled “Operator Basics and Graphics Configuration.”

7. Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the Books Online window to
close that application.

8. In the DeltaV Operate opening window, click Overview in the upper right
corner to go to the Overview picture.

6-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1768 of 2474

9. To switch to the copy you created of the standard Overview picture, click
the Open button on the Toolbar, and then select My_Ovw_ref from the Replace
Main Picture list. Click the Enter button.

10. To open the TANK101 picture, click the Next picture button in the upper right
corner of the Overview screen.

Note If opening the TANK101 picture results in a Warning message about a data retrieval
error, click the Skip All button.

Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode 6-3

 1769 of 2474

Main History
The Main field in the Toolbar lists the name of the current picture. Operators can go
quickly to another picture by clicking on its name in the Main History list.

 To open the Main History List

1. Click the arrow next to the Main field.

2. This opens a list of the pictures recently visited.

3. Click the pushpin button in the top left corner.

Tip The pushpin button at the top of the Main History is a toggle switch for keeping the Main
History open after a selection is made. The lock button locks the list, and the close button
closes the Main History. You can predefine a Display History list and lock it using the
UserSettings file mentioned at the beginning of Chapter 5, under “The Overview Picture and
the UserSettings File”.

4. Click DeltaV.

5. Click TANK101 to return to the process graphic.

6-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1770 of 2474

The Standard Buttons in the Main Window

The five buttons in the upper left corner are standard for all pictures created with the
main template.
Lets the operator navigate from the current picture to the those defined
as Previous and Next.

Displays the Faceplate picture associated with the selected link.

Displays the Detail picture associated with the selected link.

Replaces the current main picture with the Primary Control picture for
the selected link.

Faceplate and Detail Pictures

To open a Faceplate or Detail picture for a module using the standard button in the
upper left corner of the main window, the module must first be selected by clicking on
one of its data links.
The Faceplate allows access to the most important operating parameters. The Detail
picture provides access to almost all tuning parameters and diagnostic information.
DeltaV Library module templates have prebuilt Faceplate, Detail, and Trend pictures.
If the module does not have a selectable link, you can choose the module by clicking
on the large Faceplate (or Detail) picture button in the main Toolbar. A dialog box
opens in which you can enter the module name. The appropriate Faceplate or Detail
picture pops up and the module name is added to the Module History list, which is
similar to the Display History list. This list lets you select, for any module listed, the
Faceplate, Detail, or Primary Control picture. As with the Display History list, the
Module History list can be prepopulated and locked using the UserSettings file.

Note If you used a placeholder for a controller to do the tutorial, you will not be able to view
Faceplate or Detail pictures, as described in this section.

Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode 6-5

 1771 of 2474

 To open a Faceplate and Detail Picture

1. Click the data link for FIC-101/SP.

Note that the data link in the upper right corner changes to display the currently
selected link.

2. Click the Faceplate button to call up the Faceplate for that module.

At the bottom of the Faceplate, notice that the Detail picture button has a
blinking line under it. This indicates there is a problem with the module (in this
case, there is no I/O).

3. Change the mode to Auto by clicking on the AUTO button on the Faceplate.
4. Change the setpoint by moving the slider bar (large white triangle) to a new
value.

5. Close the Faceplate.

6-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1772 of 2474

Tip The Trend button at the bottom of the Faceplate opens the prebuilt module-specific
trend picture for any module created from a DeltaV Library template.

6. Open the Detail picture by clicking the Detail button on the Faceplate
picture or the main picture.

On the Detail picture, the operator can change tuning parameters (such as Gain
and Reset), change high and low limits, and enable or disable alarms, if these have
been configured as changeable.

7. Close the Detail picture.

Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode 6-7

 1773 of 2474

Entering Data in User-Changeable Fields

Some of the data links on the TANK101 picture were set up to allow changes by the
operator. When you move your pointer over these fields, they are highlighted in a box.
To make a change, click in the field, type in a new value, and press Enter.

 To change the loop setpoint

1. Click the value for the data link for the loop setpoint.
The value is highlighted.

2. Type a new value, such as 50, and press Return.

Note If you used a placeholder for a controller to do the tutorial, you will not be able to change
this value.

Acknowledging Alarms
If there are any alarms associated with a control module and an alarm occurs during
operation of the process, the module name will be displayed in the Alarm Banner at
the bottom of the operator’s screen. Alarms have a descending priority of Critical,
Warning, or Advisory and a status of acknowledged or unacknowledged.
Unacknowledged alarms are more important than acknowledged alarms. For alarms
with equal priority and status, alarms with a more recent timestamp are more
important than older alarms. Depending on the screen resolution, the five or six most
important alarms are displayed on the Alarm Banner. Selecting the small button to the
right of an alarm button displays additional information about the alarm in the line
below the alarm buttons.

You can click an alarm button to go immediately to the screen identified as the
Primary Control picture for that module.

6-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1774 of 2474

To acknowledge alarms, you can

 Click the large Alarm button in the lower right corner of the Alarm Banner to
acknowledge alarms in the main picture.
 Click the Alarm button at the bottom of the module’s Faceplate picture to
acknowledge all alarms in that module.

If there is an audible alarm, click the Silence Horn button to silence the
alarm. This does not, however, acknowledge the alarm.

In addition to the alarms displayed on the process graphics, a standard alarm

list picture shows all active alarms and their priorities. To see the Alarm List, you can
click the Alarm List button on the Toolbar or select the AlarmList picture from the
Open | Replace dialog.

On Your Own
This chapter briefly introduced a few of the features in DeltaV Operate run mode.
Take a few minutes to get more acquainted with the application. Change some data
values, click buttons on the Faceplate pictures, call up the Help system and online
books, and skim through the Books Online table of contents. When you are done,
close DeltaV Operate.

Using DeltaV Operate in Run Mode 6-9

 1775 of 2474

6-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1776 of 2474

Chapter 7 Collecting and Displaying Data

The DeltaV system supports the collection of user-specified parameter field values
and alarms and events for long-term storage, retrieval, and presentation. There are
three main aspects of historical data collection and presentation:
 Detection by defining history collection in the modules and nodes
 Storage by the Continuous Historian subsystem
 Presentation through the Process History View application
The DeltaV system also lets you export data to the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet
software so that you can use that application’s extensive analysis and reporting
features.

Continuous Process Data Collection

The following subsections contain information on data collection in the DeltaV
system.

History Collection
The history collection function defines the module or node parameters that are
monitored and stored in the DeltaV Continuous Historian.
History collection is an integral part of a module. If you copy a module that has
history collection, the new module includes the history collection. This enables you to
set up history collection for key parameters and copy the module for similar
applications. Library modules include history collection so that you do not have to set
up history collection when you copy a library module to an area. You can add
additional history collection to a library module.
In Chapter 4, we set up history collection in Control Studio for the module that we
created from scratch (LI-101) and acquired history collection for the other modules
that we copied from the Library.

Continuous Historian and Alarms and Events Subsystems

Each workstation includes a Continuous Historian subsystem that detects and stores
historical data and an Alarms and Events subsystem that detects and stores system
events and alarms. The Continuous Historian subsystem monitors modules for
history collection on an area basis and the Alarms and Events subsystem monitors for
events and alarms on an area basis. If you move a module from one area to another,

Collecting and Displaying Data 7-1

 1777 of 2474

history collection moves with the module. For example, if a Continuous Historian
subsystem is collecting historical data from a module in AREA1, and you move
another module to AREA1, all the history collection for that module is automatically
added to that Continuous Historian subsystem.
You can establish duplicate data acquisition and storage by assigning an area to two or
more Continuous Historian subsystems.
You must assign the areas from which you want to collect history to the subsystems,
enable history collection on the workstation, and download the workstation through
the DeltaV Explorer to activate the subsystems and view the data. You set up history
collection for modules through the DeltaV Explorer or through Control Studio.
In the following exercises we will assign area TANK-101 to the Continuous Historian
and Alarms and Events subsystems, enable history and events collection on the
workstation, download the workstation, and view the data with the Process History
View application.

Assign TANK-101 to the Continuous Historian Subsystem

Assigning an area to a Continuous Historian subsystem allows the subsystem to
collect historical data from the modules in that area. Assigning an area to the Alarms
and Events subsystem allows the subsystem to collect alarms and events.

 To assign TANK-101 to the subsystems

1. Open or restore DeltaV Explorer.

2. Navigate to the workstation where the events and process data for the area will
be stored.

3. Double-click the workstation to expand its contents.

A number of icons, including an Operator icon, an Alarms and Events icon, a
Continuous Historian icon, and a Batch Historian icon, are listed under the
workstation.
4. Select Continuous Historian.

5. Click the right mouse button, select Assign Area, and browse for TANK-101.

7-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1778 of 2474

6. Click OK in the Browse dialog box.

7. Select Alarms and Events.

8. Click the right mouse button, select Assign Area, and browse for TANK-101.

9. Click OK in the Browse dialog box.

A confirmation dialog instructs you to download the workstation’s setup data and
then log off and back on to add the area to the Alarm Banner. Click Yes on this dialog.
TANK-101 appears in the Contents View for the Continuous Historian and Alarms
and Events subsystems. The Continuous Historian subsystem will collect historical
data from the modules in plant area TANK-101, and the Alarms and Events
subsystem will collect alarms and events in plant area TANK-101.
The next step is to enable history collection on the workstation.

Enable History Collection

 To enable collection from the Continuous Historian

1. Under the Workstation, click the Continuous Historian subsystem.

2. Click the right mouse button and then click Properties.

Collecting and Displaying Data 7-3

 1779 of 2474

3. Click the Enabled check box.

4. Click the Advanced tab.

7-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1780 of 2474

This tab lets you set the maximum size and time span for the historical database
as well as the size of historical data sets. You can also set up automatic export of
historical data sets by enabling that feature and then setting a valid directory path
on the workstation, outside the DeltaV system. We will not make any changes on
this tab.

5. Click OK.

 To enable collection from Alarms and Events

1. Under the Workstation, click the Alarms and Events subsystem.

2. Click the right mouse button and select Properties.

The Alarms and Events Properties dialog box opens.

Collecting and Displaying Data 7-5

 1781 of 2474

3. Click Enabled if it is not already selected.

4. Click the Advanced tab.

5. Set the Current Event History Data Set Total Storage Target to 250 megabytes.

6. Click OK.

Download the Workstation

 To download the workstation

1. Select the workstation you want to download.

7-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1782 of 2474

2. Click the right mouse button and click Download | ProfessionalPlus Station.

3. Read the message and, if you are sure that you are not controlling a process, click
Yes to acknowledge the message. (Accept the default option to verify the
configuration.)

4. A window opens showing the progress of the download and providing details on
any problems encountered.

5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

We assigned area TANK-101 to the Continuous Historian and Alarms and Events
subsystems, enabled history and events collection on the workstation, and
downloaded the workstation. Now we will use the Process History View application
to view the data.

Collecting and Displaying Data 7-7

 1783 of 2474

View the Data

Now that you have defined the data you want collected and told the system to start
collecting it, you can create a chart to plot the module trends and show events. There
are three types of Process History documents:
 E +Chart — shows module trends plotted on a graph and historical events
displayed in a grid
 Chart — shows only module trends plotted on a graph
 Event — shows only historical events displayed in a grid

 To start Process History View

1. Click Start | DeltaV | Operator | Process History View.

2. Select File | New.

3. Click the E +Chart button in the New dialog box.

The Configure Chart dialog box opens.

4. Click the Add button and then click the Browse button on the Parameter
Reference Entry dialog box.

5. Select Module Parameters in the Object Type field and browse in the TANK-101
area for FIC-101/PID1/PV.CV to plot the value of the outlet flow.

7-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1784 of 2474

6. Click OK in the Parameter Reference Entry dialog.

7. In the Configure Chart dialog, click Add and browse for LI-101/AI1/PV.CV to
plot the value of the tank level in the tank process.
8. Click OK.

9. Click the New Axis check box for LI-101/AI1/PV.CV.

10. Click the Multiple Y-Axes tab.

11. Click the down arrow and select 50/50 in Axes Styles box to create two Y scales
to plot the data values.

Collecting and Displaying Data 7-9

 1785 of 2474

12. Click the Configure Chart tab, and enter MYGRAPH as the Graph Title.

13. Click OK to close the Configure Chart dialog.

The graph appears, showing module trends for the two parameter references, as
well as the events in area TANK-101.

7-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1786 of 2474

The Process History View application has numerous graph configuration options
and event filtering options that are described in the Online Help.

Tip Click Trend | Plot Method to change the line style.

14. Quit the Process History View application.

Collecting and Displaying Data 7-11

 1787 of 2474

7-12 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1788 of 2474

Chapter 8 Configuring the Network, Loading and

Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User
Accounts
After physically connecting the hardware, you need to configure the hardware so that
the DeltaV system can get the controllers, workstations, and I/O working together
and working with the DeltaV software. As soon as you have configured your first
workstation, you need to set up a user account using the DeltaV User Manager,
described later in this section.

Important The first user must log into Windows using the Administrator account. The procedure
for the first user’s logon differs between workgroups and domains. Refer to the important
information in “Setting Up Your First User Account” on page 8-27 for instructions.
In this section you will learn how to configure the controller and workstation nodes as
well as the I/O. Before configuring, your hardware should be connected and running.
Refer to the manual Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System if you need
information on the physical installation of the hardware.
Look at the DeltaV Explorer screen below to see how the controllers, workstations,
and I/O fit into the overall structure of a DeltaV process system. The numbers show
the typical sequence for configuring the hardware.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-1
 1789 of 2474

Configuring DeltaV Workstations

The DeltaV system provides a Workstation Configuration application that steps you
through the procedure for configuring the workstations in your system. This
application must be run the first time a workstation is used as a DeltaV workstation.
You must configure the ProfessionalPLUS workstation first. There can be only one
ProfessionalPLUS workstation in a DeltaV system. If there are other workstations to
be configured, you must create a workstation configuration file from the
ProfessionalPLUS to configure those workstations.
The specific steps that you take to configure the ProfessionalPLUS workstation vary
depending upon the configuration options that you choose. Refer to the Workstation
Configuration online help as you configure your workstations. Click the Help button
or use the context sensitive help to access additional information. Most of the screens
are self-explanatory and easy to fill out.
Basically, configuring a ProfessionalPLUS workstation involves defining the
workstation as the ProfessionalPLUS (with the same name as the workstation), and
making network settings. Configuring other workstations involves a few additional
steps.
After you configure the workstations, you will load and assign licenses and download
the workstations in the DeltaV Explorer.

Accessing DeltaV Workstation Configuration

When you start up a workstation for the first time, the DeltaV Workstation
Configuration application comes up automatically. If you elect not to configure the
workstation right away, then you will need to open the application from the DeltaV
program group when you are ready to perform the configuration.
You cannot do any work with the DeltaV system until the workstation is configured.

 To access the Workstation Configuration application

1. Click Start | DeltaV | Installation | DeltaV Workstation Configuration.

The initial screen appears.

8-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1790 of 2474

2. Click the Help button to familiarize yourself with the application and when you
are ready to begin the configuration, click Next.

3. Select ProfessionalPLUS workstation and click Next.

The Workstation Configuration application guides you through the process of
configuring the ProfessionalPLUS. Remember to refer to the online help for
complete information on configuring the ProfessionalPLUS workstation.

Important If your workstation has already been configured, do not repeat this procedure.
The Workstation Configuration application sets up the workstation’s network
settings and creates the initial database to hold the DeltaV system configuration.
This process may take several minutes to complete. You are instructed to restart
your computer for the configuration changes to take effect.

DeltaV Software Licenses

Before you can download your DeltaV software configuration, you must attach the
System Identifier to the ProfessionalPLUS workstation, load your licenses on the
ProfessionalPLUS workstation from a license disk, and assign licenses to the
workstations and controllers in your DeltaV network. Before loading and assigning

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-3
 1791 of 2474

your licenses, take a few minutes to read the next sections about DeltaV software
licenses.

System Software
Major system software versions require a license. A major version is one in which the
first digit in the version number changes from the previous version. A Major Version
License is required when you upgrade from one major version to another and for
first-time installations.

Controller Software
Controller software for continuous control is licensed through four I/O-based,
system-wide licenses. For batch control, a fifth system-wide license is added; it is the
Advanced Unit Management license. The system-wide licenses are assigned to the
ProfessionalPLUS workstation and determine both the functionality available in every
controller in the system and the potential size of the system. System size is expressed
in Device Signal Tags (DSTs).
When purchasing controller licenses, it is necessary to understand the difference
between the four I/O-based licenses, which are:
• Discrete Monitor Input

• Discrete Control Output

• Analog Monitor Input

• Analog Control Output

For the controllers in your system, select specific DST sizes of the four I/O-based
licenses by counting the number of discrete inputs, discrete outputs, analog inputs,
and analog outputs required for your process.
Purchase each license with a DST size equal to or greater than the total number of
input or output signals it represents. For example, purchase a 100-DST Discrete
Monitor Input license to bring in up to 100 discrete inputs into the controller(s). Or
purchase a 100-DST Analog Control Output license get up to 100 analog outputs
from the controller(s). The licenses allow input and output signals via conventional
I/O, bus I/O, or Serial I/O. Books Online provides a more detailed definition of the
system-wide controller licenses.
If your process is batch, select an Advanced Unit Management license with a DST size
equal to the number of DSTs used for class-based units.

8-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1792 of 2474

You also specify the total number of DSTs (the sum of all DSTs associated with the
four I/O-based licenses) when selecting a ProfessionalPLUS license.

Workstation Software
When installing DeltaV Software on a PC or server, the installation wizard enables
you to define the PC or server as one of three node types: ProfessionalPLUS,
Operator, or Application. After the software installation is complete, you determine
the functionality and size of the workstation with software licenses. Key licenses are
bundled in software suites. Each suite enables the use of specific functions and
applications as defined in the product data sheets. The following table defines which
software suites can be assigned to the three node types:
Table 8-1 License Suite Assignments for Workstations

Workstation Node Type Supported Software Licenses

ProfessionalPLUS workstation ProfessionalPLUS license suite, DeltaV Experience

license

Operator Station Base license suite, Maintenance license suite,

Professional license suite, and Operator license suite

Application Station Application license suite

After you install a license suite, you can install add-on and scale-up licenses. Add-on
licenses add new licensed features and functionality to the initial license and scale-up
licenses increase the capacity of an existing license feature.
To expand the DST capacity of a workstation that has the DeltaV Experience license
assigned, you must first assign a base ProfessionalPLUS license suite. Assigning a base
license suite uninstalls the DeltaV Experience license and enables you to assign I/O
base and scale-up licenses.

Redundant Controllers
Each pair of redundant controllers requires a separate redundant controller license.

Loading and Assigning Licenses

Use the DeltaV Explorer from the ProfessionalPLUS workstation to load the licenses
from the license disk (located in the License Pack), and then assign the licenses to
nodes.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-5
 1793 of 2474

Tip Be sure that the System Identifier (also located in the License Pack) is attached to the
ProfessionalPLUS workstation, and be sure to have the license disk ready. To verify that
the System Identifier is attached, select Help | About... in any DeltaV application.

Loading Licenses
From the ProfessionalPLUS workstation:
1. Click Start | DeltaV | Engineering | DeltaV Explorer to open the DeltaV
Explorer.

2. Insert the license disk into the drive.

3. In the DeltaV Explorer, select File | Licensing | Load License File. The Load
License File dialog opens:

Tip You can also select System Configuration/Setup/Licenses in the left pane of the
Explorer, click the right mouse button, and select Load License File.

4. Select the license file to load, and click Open.

5. Read the information in the Terms and Conditions dialog box and, if you agree,
enter the requested information, and click Next. If you do not agree, return the
license disk and System Identifier to Emerson Process Management.

8-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1794 of 2474

6. Fill in the information on the User Contact Information dialog box and click
Next.
7. Fill in the End User Company Information dialog box and click Next.

8. Read the information in the Registration dialog box, and then click Finish.

9. The licenses are loaded into the License folder. The license folder is found in
System Configuration | Setup in the left pane of the Explorer. Select the
Licenses folder to view the licenses.

10. Now you can assign the licenses to nodes.

Tip Consider creating a backup copy of the license file. Select File | Licensing | Create
License File to create a backup copy of the licenses.

Note Your licenses are exported if you completely export your DeltaV system.

Assigning Licenses to Nodes

After the licenses are loaded, you assign them to nodes (workstations and controllers).
Typically, controllers require one license (unless you purchase scale-up licenses for the
controller) and workstations require one or more licenses.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-7
 1795 of 2474

 To assign licenses

1. Select the node, click the right mouse button, and select Licensing | Assign
License.

A dialog box opens showing only the compatible licenses for that node. Because
the selected node is a controller node, multiple types of licenses are compatible
with it, as shown in the following figure.

2. Select the licenses that you want to assign to the node and click OK.

8-8 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1796 of 2474

 To see license details

1. Select the node for which you want to see license details, and click the right mouse
button.

2. Select Properties from the context menu and click the Licensing tab.

The Licensing Properties page shows the assigned license features and the
number of features (DSTs, items, and devices) configured on the node.

3. Click the Licensing Details button to see details on the license features included
on each license.
There are two other ways to assign licenses:

1. Open the Licenses folder (under System Configuration|Setup), drag a license

from the list, and drop it onto a node.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-9
 1797 of 2474

2. Open the Licenses folder (under System Configuration|Setup) and use the
license’s context menu to assign the license to a node. The context menu is
accessed through the right mouse button.

Note When you drag a license from the licenses folder onto a node, you must choose the license
from the entire license pool. When you assign a license using the license’s context menu,
you are given a list of compatible nodes for the license.
Now that you have assigned your licenses, you can download the configuration for
your workstations and controllers.

Downloading the ProfessionalPLUS Workstation

When you have finished configuring the workstation and assigning licenses, you need
to download the configuration. Before you download, make sure the System Identifier
has been connected to the ProfessionalPLUS workstation.

 To download the workstation configuration

1. Start the DeltaV Explorer by clicking Start | DeltaV | Engineering | DeltaV

Explorer.

2. Under Control Network, select the workstation, click the right mouse button,
and select Download | ProfessionalPlus Station from the menu.

8-10 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1798 of 2474

3. Read the message and, if you are sure that you are not controlling a process, click
Yes to acknowledge the message and accept the defaults in the Confirm
Download dialog box.
A window opens to show the progress of the download and give you details about
any problems encountered.

4. Click Download Anyway if the Configuration Check Results message box

appears to continue the download.
Since we have not assigned I/O you will probably get some configuration
messages.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-11
 1799 of 2474

5. Click Close to close the Download dialog box.

Configuring Other Workstations

Prior to configuring other workstations, you need to add their names to your Control
Network in the DeltaV Explorer. Then create a workstation configuration file from
the ProfessionalPLUS workstation to configure the other workstations.
The ProfessionalPLUS and other workstations must be connected to the network
before the Workstation Configuration is run. Workstations must be able to
communicate with the ProfessionalPLUS workstation for a successful download.
The following steps are performed on the ProfessionalPLUS workstation.

 To add other workstations to the DeltaV Explorer

1. On the ProfessionalPLUS workstation, open the DeltaV Explorer.

2. Select Control Network and click the right mouse button.

3. From the context menu, select New | Operator Station.

8-12 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1800 of 2474

The Node Properties dialog box opens.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-13
 1801 of 2474

4. On the General tab, enter the name for the Operator Station.

5. Accept the default settings and click OK.

6. The new workstation node appears under the Control Network.

Important For remote nodes, the new workstation node names must be the same as the Windows
names for those machines.

Note By default, the new workstation is created with DeltaV network redundancy enabled. If
your DeltaV system uses a simplex network, deselect Enable network redundancy
for this node.

8-14 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1802 of 2474

 To create a workstation configuration file

If you decide not to immediately create a configuration diskette after adding

workstations to the DeltaV Explorer, you need to later access the procedure manually.
The following steps are performed on the ProfessionalPLUS workstation. You can
save the workstation configuration file to removable media or to an accessible
network location.

1. Open the DeltaV Explorer if it is not already open.

2. Select Physical Network and click the right mouse button.

A context menu appears.

3. Select Create Station Configuration File from the context menu.

A dialog appears for you to specify the file name and destination. The default
name for the workstation configuration file is DevData.cfg.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-15
 1803 of 2474

4. Select a location to save the workstation configuration file, and then click Save.

 To configure other workstations

These steps are performed on the other workstation.

1. Open the Workstation Configuration application by clicking Start | DeltaV |

Installation | DeltaV Workstation Configuration.

2. Click Next on the opening screen.

3. Select Other Workstation and click Next to continue.

The Workstation Configuration application guides you through the process of
configuring the workstation. Remember to refer to the online help. This process may
take several minutes to complete. You are instructed to restart your computer for the
configuration changes to take effect.
If you have more workstations to configure, use the same workstation configuration
file, and repeat this procedure.
When you have finished configuring the workstations, you need to download the
workstation configuration. On each machine, perform the Workstation download

8-16 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1804 of 2474

procedure described earlier under “Downloading the ProfessionalPLUS

Workstation”.

Configuring the Controller Node

The DeltaV system allows you to configure your controllers and I/O before the
hardware is connected. By configuring a controller placeholder, you can perform
most of your hardware configuration off-line. After you have physically connected the
controller, you can easily assign it to the placeholder.
For information on connecting your hardware, refer to the manual Installing Your
DeltaV Digital Automation System. When you power up your system, any controllers
that are physically connected will be sensed by the DeltaV system and listed in the
DeltaV Explorer as decommissioned controllers. At that point you can drag-and-drop
a decommissioned controller to your control network or to a specific controller
placeholder that you have configured in advance for that controller.
If you want to do the tutorials in Chapters 3 through 7 of this book, you can set up a
controller placeholder called CTLR1 and then configure I/O channels for it
according to the instructions in the next section.

 To create a controller placeholder

1. On the ProfessionalPLUS workstation, open the DeltaV Explorer.

2. Select Control Network and click the right mouse button.

3. From the context menu, select New | Controller.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-17
 1805 of 2474

A new controller, named NODE1, is added under the Control Network. The
name appears in the right pane in an edit box, ready for renaming.

4. Rename the controller to something meaningful for your system. To do the

tutorials in this guide, name it CTLR1.

Note A red X next to a controller means that it is not communicating.

 To view controller properties

(These are general instructions and are not part of the tank process tutorial. If you
have a controller and I/O connected, they are not likely to match the hardware
specifications for the example.)

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select System Configuration | Physical Network |

Control Network | controller placeholder.

2. From the context menu, select Properties.

The controller Properties dialog appears, as shown in the next figure.

8-18 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1806 of 2474

3. Select an Area to associate alarms and events with and select the checkboxes
required for your installation. You do not need to set any values in the
Model/Software Revision area. Accept the defaults. When you download, the
DeltaV system updates the values in this area to reflect the controller model and
software revision in your system.

 To locate and configure a connected controller

(These are general instructions and are not part of the tank process tutorial. If you
have a controller and I/O connected, they are not likely to match the hardware
specifications for the example.)

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select System Configuration | Physical Network |

Decommissioned Nodes.

2. Select the decommissioned controller in the right pane.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-19
 1807 of 2474

3. Drag-and-drop the decommissioned controller to Control Network or to a

specific controller placeholder.
• If you drag the decommissioned controller to Control Network, a Properties
dialog box opens for you to enter a name for the controller. Then you will be
asked if you want to auto-sense the I/O cards. For a new controller, for
which you have done no configuration, you would normally answer yes.
• If you drag the decommissioned controller to a placeholder, such as CTLR1,
you will be asked if you want to auto-sense the I/O cards. If you have already
configured I/O cards for the placeholder controller (which you will learn
how to do in the next section), answer no. If you answer yes, the autosensed
cards will be compared to the ones configured, and any mismatches will be
displayed. You can replace any empty slot with an autosensed card. To
replace mismatched cards, you must delete the configured cards.

Note You can also commission a controller by selecting the context menu item, Commission.
Access this menu item by pointing to either Control Network or a controller and clicking
the right mouse button.

Tip You can identify a decommissioned controller and confirm that it is communicating by
selecting the controller, clicking the right mouse button, and selecting Properties. Select
the Controller tab and select Flash lights to make the controller’s lights all flash at the
same time. Then select Stop flashing and click OK to close the dialog box.

8-20 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1808 of 2474

Important You can decommission a controller by selecting the controller, clicking the right mouse
button, and selecting Decommission. The left pane still shows the controller name. This
placeholder still contains configuration information, such as I/O Device Tags and
assigned modules. Do not delete the controller placeholder. Deleting a controller
placeholder will also delete the I/O configuration, including any Device Tags assigned to
the controller’s I/O.

Configuring I/O Channels

The next task is to configure your I/O channels. There are several steps. First you
either autosense physically connected cards or add I/O card placeholders using the
DeltaV Explorer. Then you enable the channels on the cards and define the Device
Tag for each channel. The Device Tags are the names the DeltaV software uses in the
control modules to identify the input and output instruments and hardware devices
like transmitters, valves, and so on.
In the tank example used in the tutorial, there are four I/O cards installed in the
following order: Analog In, Analog Out, Discrete In, and Discrete Out. If you have a
real system set up, your I/O cards may not have been installed in this order—you may
not even have some of these card types. Therefore, to be able to do the tutorial I/O
configuration exercises, you will need to configure a controller placeholder, as
described in the previous section. You can learn the general I/O card configuration
steps by reading this section.
Each I/O card has eight channels, not all of which will necessarily be used. The
Device Tags for the tank process examples are listed in the following table.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-21
 1809 of 2474

Table 8-2 Device Tags for the Tank Process Example

I/O Card I/O Card Type Channel Channel Type Device Tag Description

C01 Analog In, 8 Ch, 4-20 mA, CH01 Analog In LT-1 Level transmitter
HART

CH02 Analog In FT-1 Flow transmitter

C02 Analog Out, 8 Ch, 4-20 mA CH02 Analog Out FY-1 Regulatory valve

C03 Discrete In, 8 Ch, 24 VDC, CH01 Discrete In XI-1 Confirm motor contact
Isolated

CH02 Discrete In LSC-1 Limit switch-closed

C04 Discrete Out, 8 Ch, 24 CH01 Discrete Out XV-1 Block valve
VDC, High Side

CH02 Discrete Out ZX-1 Motor start contact

Usually, the I/O cards are already downloaded and autosensed when you define the
controller node and you can go to the procedure for configuring the first channel on
the first I/O card.
However, if you need to add a card or a placeholder, use the following procedure.

 To add an I/O card (or placeholder)

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select System Configuration | Physical Network |

Control Network | CTLR1 | I/O.

2. Click the right mouse button and select New Card from the menu.
The Add Card dialog appears.

3. Type a description for the card (such as Analog Input) and confirm or change
the slot position.
4. Select a Card class from the top pull down list. (The first card is an Analog Input
card.)

5. Select a Card type from the second pull down list. (The first card is 8 Channel,
4-20mA, HART).

8-22 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1810 of 2474

6. Click OK.
7. Repeat the procedure to add the remaining three cards, using the information
from the table.

 To configure the first channel on the first I/O card

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select System Configuration | Physical Network |

Control Network | CTLR1 | I/O.
The right pane lists the I/O cards.

2. Click the I/O configuration button on the toolbar (or click the right mouse
button and select Configure I/O from the menu).

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-23
 1811 of 2474

The I/O Configuration window opens, displaying a list of the eight channels
available on all the I/O cards. The default channel names are CH01 through
CH08.

8-24 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1812 of 2474

3. For the first card (C01), select CH01, the first channel.

4. Double-click CH01 (or click the right mouse button and select Properties from
the menu).
The Channel Properties dialog box appears.

5. Select Enabled.

6. Enter a description of the channel, for example, Level Transmitter.

7. Enter a Device Tag in the Device Tag field, for example, LT-1.
The Channel Properties box now looks like this:

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-25
 1813 of 2474

8. Click OK.

 To configure the remaining cards and channels

1. Repeat the procedure (steps 3 through 8), substituting the appropriate

information from the table.

Tips To enable a contiguous group of channels, hold down the Shift key, select the channels,
select Properties from the context menu, and click Enable. To enable individual
channels, hold down the Ctrl. key, select the channels, select Properties from the context
menu, and click Enable.

If there is a printer handy, you can print a copy of your I/O configuration by clicking
the Print button on the toolbar.

2. Close the I/O Configuration window by clicking the Close button in the upper
right corner (or selecting File | Exit).

Downloading the Controller Configuration

After configuring the I/O cards and channels and assigning the controller licenses,
you need to download the controller configuration. (You can only do this for a real
controller, not a controller placeholder.) Refer to “Assigning Licenses to Nodes” on
page 8-7 for more information.

8-26 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1814 of 2474

It is recommended that you not perform any tutorial procedures that involve
downloading of configuration information into an operational system without fully
considering the impact of these changes.

 To download the controller configuration

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select the controller, click the right mouse button, and
select Download | Controller from the menu.

2. Read any messages that appear and select the appropriate response.

3. A window will open to show the progress of the download and give you details
about any problems encountered.

4. Click Close.

Setting Up Your First User Account

The first user who logs in to the system starts off with a default user name of
Administrator. This person has administration privileges associated with the
computer domain as well as full access to all DeltaV functions such as configuring
hardware, configuring the process system, making changes to the configuration, and
so on.

Important The first user must log into Windows using the Administrator account. The default
password for this account is deltav (lowercase). In a workgroup environment, the first
user must change the account password and then change the passwords on the
administrator accounts on the other workstations to match this password. In a domain
environment, the first user must change the password on the primary domain controller,
and then, for security purposes, change the password on the local administrator account
to a different password. Then, that user should configure the ProfessionalPLUS
workstation load and assign licenses, and download that workstation’s configuration.
In a domain environment on a Vista or Server2008 workstation, include the domain
name when you log on to Windows (for example, domain_name\Administrator). If you
do not include the domain name and the user name exists on the workstation as well
as on the domain, the software logs you in as the local Administrator on the
workstation rather than the domain Administrator user.
There may also be other default user accounts set up on your system, such as
Operator, Supervisor, Maintainer, and Configure. The default passwords for these
accounts are DeltaVO1, DeltaVS1, DeltaVM1, and DeltaVC1, respectively.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-27
 1815 of 2474

Before any other users log in to the system, some thought should be given to the
overall user access scheme. If more than just one or two users will be accessing the
system, you may want to limit their ability to change the process configuration or
perform downloads. To do this you need to set up user names and access privileges in
the User Manager.

 To access the DeltaV User Manager

1. If you are the very first user after the workstation has been configured, log in as
Administrator.

2. Click Start | DeltaV | Engineering | User Manager.

The initial screen of the User Manager application appears.

There are a number of default user accounts, including Administrator, Configure,

Operator, Supervisor, Maintainer, and Guest. Only Administrator has full privileges.

8-28 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1816 of 2474

To learn more about User Manager, particularly the specifics of how to limit
access to plant areas and grant configuration/download privileges, read the online
help for this system. Context sensitive help (related to specific fields) is also available
by clicking the What’s This button and then clicking on a specific field.

Adding a User
The procedure below steps through the basics for adding a new user account.

 To add a new user

1. Click File | New | User.

The New User dialog box appears.

2. Type the Name, usually only the last name, and tab to the next field or click in
the next field. Do not press Enter or click the OK button until you have made all
your selections for this user account.

Note If you press Enter, the new user account is created with all the default settings of
Windows and DeltaV Account types, but no Download or Configure privileges. To add

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-29
 1817 of 2474

these privileges, you need to edit the user account properties by clicking on the user’s name
and selecting File | Properties.
3. Type the Full Name and tab to the next field.

4. You must enter a password and inform the person of the password.

5. Confirm the password in the next field.

6. Select both Account Types.
DeltaV accounts are global. Windows accounts are specific to each workstation.
A user’s DeltaV account is only usable on a workstation when the Windows
account is also enabled for that user on the workstation. You must enable a
Windows account for each DeltaV user on every workstation on which that user
runs the DeltaV system.

7. Select a role for this user. Roles are used to assign users to groups and to assign
permissions and Group Policy Objects.

8. Click the Advanced tab.

9. Fill in any other information as appropriate for your usage environment.

8-30 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1818 of 2474

10. If the user should have Download or Configure privileges, click the Keys tab and
add these privileges. (These tabs are described briefly below.)
11. Click OK.

12. Close the User Manager application.

The Groups and Keys Tabs

The Groups tab is where you can assign the user to a user group that has predefined
access privileges. The Keys tab is where you can restrict or grant access to control
module parameters and fields. The locks may be for individual plant areas or across all
plant areas. You do not need to be concerned about either of these tabs until you have
more of your system set up. At some point, however, you will have to specify in detail
the locks and groups. Refer to the Online Help for the User Manager for more
information on how to do this.

Downloading the Workstation

After you have made your changes in the DeltaV User Manager, you need to
download the workstation.

Configuring the Network, Loading and Assigning Licenses, and Setting Up User Accounts 8-31
 1819 of 2474

 To download the workstation

1. In the DeltaV Explorer, select the workstation, click the right mouse button, and
select Download | Setup Data from the menu.

2. Answer yes when asked if you want to continue.

3. A window will open to show the progress of the download and give you details
about any problems encountered.
Congratulations. You have finished the Physical Network part of your System
Configuration and set up your user account. Now you are ready to start configuring
the Control Strategy.
At this point you can go to Chapter 3, Learning About the DeltaV Explorer. Then
you can create a plant area, which will be the logical container for your control
strategy, and create the control modules.

8-32 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1820 of 2474

Glossary

Alarm Alarms alert the operator that a particular event has

occurred. You define the types of alarms for your system
configuration and the sound that the alarm makes when the
event occurs. For example, you could define a HIGH alarm
for a specific level on a tank and have the system inform the
operator by playing a.WAV (audio) file.

Algorithm A set of logical steps for solving a problem or accomplishing

a task. The module's algorithm defines how the module
behaves.

Areas A logical division of a process control system. Areas typically

represent plant locations or main processing functions.

Books Online A DeltaV application that includes the content of the paper
documentation plus theory of operation, configuration
planning, and application-specific and system-wide
reference information.

Composite A block in an algorithm that is made up of two or more blocks.

A composite can contain function blocks or sequential
function charts.

Controller The DeltaV system device that runs the algorithms to control
the process equipment and communicates the process data
to the Operator Station.

Database A collection of data organized for rapid search and retrieval.

The DeltaV database allows you to make on-line and off-line
changes to your configuration.

Decommission To take a controller out of service, usually to replace a failed

controller. This resets the IP address to the default address
and resets the controller’s configuration. (You should not
delete a controller placeholder that contains configuration
information when you decommission a controller.)

Debug To find and eliminate problems with an installed module by

stepping through the algorithm and examining values.

DeltaV Explorer A navigation tool that provides a unique view of your system.
It allows you to see the hierarchy of areas, nodes, and
modules and to move to different areas, nodes, and
modules. The Explorer is especially useful for copying and
moving modules to new nodes using its drag-and-drop
capability.

Glossary Glossary-1
 1821 of 2474

Device Signal Tag (DST) A Device Signal Tag consists of a Device Tag and a specific
signal from that device.

DeltaV Workstation A personal computer running the Windows operating

system. One workstation can handle as many as 512 I/O
channels from four different controllers.

Device Tag Device Tags represent the instruments, valves, and other
field devices in your DeltaV system.

Dynamo Graphic objects stored in a library that you use to create

pictures in the DeltaV Operate application. Many dynamos
are available that represent modules, devices, or
characteristics of your system.

Event A noteworthy occurrence in your process or system.

Typically, you want the system to react to and record an
event.

Function Block A logical processing unit of software that defines the

behavior of an algorithm for a particular module.

Function Block Diagram A diagram that contains multiple function blocks.

(FBD)

History A chronological record of events, including the settings and

changes made to a module. This record of events can be
referenced to gain information about a particular run or lot of
the product, or to show that the process complied with quality
guidelines or government regulations.

Hub A device in a network that consolidates control network

connections and routes communications. All
communications devices on a hub-based network connect to
one or more hubs.

Input/Output (I/O) Signal reception and transmission or signal interfacing.

Input, for a process control device, involves accepting and
processing signals from field devices. Output, for a process
control device, involves converting commands into electrical
signals to field devices.

I/O Carrier The assembly that provides power and communication

connections for the DeltaV I/O Interface Modules and
termination blocks.

Library A repository for objects that are intended to be reused. The

library in the DeltaV system contains modules, function
blocks, composites, and items that the user creates for
reuse.

Glossary-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1822 of 2474

Module A reusable configuration structure that focuses on process

equipment. Modules link algorithms, conditions, alarms,
displays, history, and other characteristics together for a
particular piece of equipment so that you can use modules to
develop a control strategy. The library modules have all the
necessary characteristics defined for you, but you can
customize them for your particular application.

Node A device (either a DeltaV controller or workstation) on the

control network.

Open Database An open, vendor-neutral interface for database connectivity

Connectivity (ODBC) that provides access to a variety of personal computer,
minicomputer, and mainframe systems.

Operator A person who supervises and controls the running process

using the DeltaV Operate application in run mode to monitor
and set process values.

Parameter The name of a logical grouping of data such as SP or PV.

Each element of data within the group is referred to as a field.
A user with the appropriate privileges can modify parameters
off-line or on-line to affect the current process.

Process A collection of physical devices and methods used in the

production or manufacturing of a product.

Record A collection of data (such as date/time, parameter, node,

area, level, and so on) for a single event. Records, which can
be copied, printed, and exported, are presented as rows in
the Process History View program.

Sequential Function A diagram that defines the sequence of events with steps,
Chart (SFC) transitions, and actions.

Step An element of a sequential function chart that contains a set

of actions. A step is either active or inactive.

Universal Naming Used when naming a location on your DeltaV system (for
Convention (UNC) Name example with database locations or host machines) the UNC
name is the universal naming convention name. It is a full
Windows name of a resource on a network. The UNC
conforms to \\machine name\sharename syntax, where
machine name is the name of the physical computer and the
sharename is the name of the shared resource on the
machine to which you are pointing or looking. UNC names of
directories or files can also include the directory path under
the sharename, with the following syntax:
\\machine name\sharename\directory\filename.

Glossary Glossary-3
 1823 of 2474

Glossary-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1824 of 2474

Index
C
Command driven algorithm
A definition 1-3
Action in SFC Common configuration parameter filter 4-10
qualifier 4-45
Condition blocks 4-31
type 4-45
deleting excess 4-33
Adding history collection 4-23
Configuration Assistant 1-6
Adding user accounts 8-27
Configure mode
Administrator account ii-ix, 8-1, 8-27 using DeltaV Operate in 5-1
Alarm Configuring
definition 1-4 additional workstations 8-12
Alarm Banner window 5-2 DeltaV workstations 8-2
I/O channels 8-21
Alarm View the Controller Node 8-17
in Control Studio 4-5
Connecting function blocks 4-24
Alarms
acknowledging 6-8 Context menus 3-7
modifying 4-29 Context-sensitive help 1-20
Algorithm Continuous Historian Administration 1-7
definition 1-2
Control modules
Area assigning displays to 4-13
definition 1-3 assigning to a controller 4-14
Assigning modules to a controller 4-14 copying from the library 4-3
creating 4-1
Auto-Update Service 1-6 creating from scratch 4-18
definition 1-2
B finishing steps 4-13
installing 4-50
Background color of pictures 5-13
saving 4-15
Batch History View 1-15 verifying 4-16
Batch Operator Interface 1-15 Control Studio 1-7, 4-4
Books Online 1-20 views 4-4

Boolean Fan In block 4-31 controller

revision 8-18
Browse parameters 5-14
Controller placeholder
Browsing for a module template 4-9 creating 8-17

Index Index-1
 1825 of 2474

Controller Software navigating 5-5

licensing 8-4 opening in run mode 5-6
Controllers Run mode 1-15
downloading 8-26 DeltaV Predict 1-13
DeltaV Reporter 1-19
D
DeltaV Simulate Suite 1-14
Data links 5-14
DeltaV web site 1-22
creating 5-15
for block valve 5-21 Detail display 4-13
for loop output 5-20 DevData.cfg file 8-15
for loop process value 5-20
for loop setpoint 5-19 Device Control function block 4-31
for motor setpoint 5-21 Device Signal Tag
for tank level 5-16 definition 1-3
Data Source Browser 5-14 Device Tags 4-9
Database browsing 4-12
definition 1-4 definition 1-3
for tank process 8-21
Database Administration 1-8
Diagnostics 1-16
Decommissioned controller Glossary-1
configuring 8-19 Diagram View
dragging to the control network 8-20 Control Studio 4-5

Default Arrangement Display hierarchy 5-3

of Control Studio views 4-4 Display History
Default password ii-ix, 8-1, 8-27 defining in user.glb file 5-4

Default user accounts 8-28 Documentation conventions

DeltaV Explorer 3-4
DeltaV Controller and I/O Upgrade Utility 1-18
Downloading
DeltaV Excel Add-In 1-18 controllers 8-26
DeltaV Explorer 1-8, 3-1 workstations 8-10, 8-31
navigating 3-3 Dynamic properties 5-14
opening 3-1
view options 3-3 Dynamo set
pasting from 5-25
DeltaV licenses
assigning to nodes 8-7 Dynamos 5-23
loading 8-5
using 8-3 E
DeltaV Neural 1-12 Engineering Units
DeltaV Operate 6-1 setting for LI-101 module 4-21
Configure mode 1-9

Index-2 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1826 of 2474

Equipment modules History collection

definition 1-3 adding 4-23
Explorer
see DeltaV Explorer I
Expression Editor I/O card
specifying conditions with 4-34 adding 8-22
specifying SFC actions 4-45 I/O card placeholder
creating 8-22
F I/O channels
faceplate picture 4-13 configuring 8-21
FIC-101 Inspect with InSight 1-14
creating 4-25
Installing
modifying 4-26
setup data 8-32
Fill styles 5-13
Filtering parameters 4-6, 4-10 L
Finishing steps for control modules 4-13 LI-101
creating 4-18
FlexLock 1-10
saving 4-25
Function block templates 3-4
Library
Function blocks definition 1-3
adding to diagram 4-19
Library templates
connecting 4-24
exploring 3-4
definition 1-3
License folder
G location of 8-7

Graphics wizards License Pack 1-2

See Dynamos Licenses
controller software 8-4
Guardian application 1-18
redundant controllers 8-5
system software 8-4
H workstation software 8-5
Hardware 1-1 Line styles 5-13
Help Links 5-14
context-sensitive 1-20
Loading DeltaV licenses 8-5
Help system
online 1-19 Logical function blocks 4-31

Hierarchy View Login

Control Studio 4-5 as System Administrator 8-27

History Collection 7-1

Index Index-3
 1827 of 2474

M Operator displays
creating 5-1
Main History 6-4
Operator System Configuration Utility 1-18
Main template 5-3
Overview picture 5-3
main template
selecting 5-8
standard buttons 6-5 P
main window 5-2 Palette in Control Studio Diagram View 4-5

Maximizing Control Studio windows 4-32 Parameter

browser 5-14
Minimizing applications 4-25 filtering 4-6
Modes 6-8 promoted 4-18
for loops 6-8 Parameter filtering 4-10
Modifying alarms 4-29 Parameter References
Module templates in DeltaV Operate (run mode) 5-14
browsing 4-9 Parameter tagnames 4-36
Modules Parameter View
definition 1-2 Control Studio 4-5
MTR-101 Parameters
creating 4-3 module-level 4-22
modifying 4-30
Password
default ii-ix, 8-1, 8-27
N
Picture files
Named sets 4-38, 4-40
saving 5-9
creating 4-41
Pictures 5-1
Navigating
changing the background color 5-13
in DeltaV Explorer 3-3
in DeltaV Operate 5-5 pictures
setting previous and next 5-32
Network time 3-8
PID control loop module
network time 3-8
creating 4-25
Node
Placeholder for controller
definition 1-3
creating 8-17
Placeholder for I/O card
O
creating 8-22
OPC Mirror 1-19
Plant areas
OPC server 1-18 creating 4-2
Operating environment definition 1-3
description 5-1 Primary Control picture 4-13

Index-4 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1828 of 2474

Process History View 1-16 System time 3-8

Promoted parameter 4-18
T
Q Tagnames
Quick Edit 5-6 in Control Studio 4-36
Terminology 1-2
R Text (A) button 5-19
Recipe Studio 1-11 Toolbar window 5-2
Redundant Controllers Toolbox 5-9
licensing 8-5 moving and resizing 5-11
Registration Utility 1-18 Transitions in SFC 4-46
Rest Layout Trend links 5-14, 5-30
in DeltaV Operate 6-2
Tune with Insight 1-14
Restoring applications 4-25
Run mode U
using DeltaV Operate in 6-1 Unit modules
definition 1-3
S
Up One Level button 5-18
Saving modules 4-15
User accounts
Scenario adding 8-27
tank process 2-2 default 8-28
Sequential Function Chart 2-3 User Manager 1-11, 8-28
creating 4-40
UserSettings file 5-3
definition 1-3
Set/synchronize network time 3-8 V
Setup data Verifying modules 4-16
installing 8-32
View
Start menu Control Studio 4-4
using the 1-4
View options
State driven algorithm
in DeltaV Explorer 3-3
definition 1-3
System Alarm Management 1-11 W
System Identifier 1-2, 8-10 What’s this?
System Preferences 1-11 button 1-20
example 4-19
System software
licensing 8-4 Windows taskbar 4-4, 4-25

Index Index-5
 1829 of 2474

Workstation Configuration 1-18

starting 8-2
Workstation configuration file
creating 8-15
Workstation Software
licensing 8-5
Workstations
configuring 8-2, 8-12
downloading 8-10, 8-31

X
XV-101
creating 4-7
modifying 4-9

Index-6 Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System

 1830 of 2474

D800040X022

DeltaV™ S-series and CHARMs Hardware

Reference
 1831 of 2474

Printed in the Republic of Singapore.

© Emerson Process Management 1996 - 2011. All rights reserved. For Emerson Process Management
trademarks and service marks, go to http://www.emersonprocess.com/home/news/resources/marks.pdf. All
other marks are property of their respective owners. The contents of this publication are presented for
informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are not
to be construed as warranties or guarantees, expressed or implied, regarding the products or services
described herein or their use or applicability. All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which
are available on request. We reserve the right to modify or improve the design or specification of such
products at any time without notice.

See the CE statement in the Preface to this manual.

Emerson Process Management Distribution Ltd. Process Systems and Solutions

Meridian East
Meridian Business Park
Leicester, LE19 1uX, UK

Emerson a.s.
European System and Assembly
Pieštanská 1202/44
Nové Mesto nad Váhom 91528
Slovakia

Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. – an Emerson Process Management company

12301 Research Blvd.
Research Park Plaza – Bldg. III
Austin, TX 78759
 1832 of 2474

Contents

Contents
About this manual ...........................................................................................................vii
Chapter 1 S-series I/O interface specifications ...................................................................................1
What is DeltaV S-series hardware? ..............................................................................................................1
Important information about hazardous live voltages .................................................................................2
DeltaV S-series I/O interface overview .........................................................................................................2
S-series classic I/O cards specifications ........................................................................................................4
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card .....................................................................................................4
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card ...................................................................................................8
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card ...................................................................................................9
DI 8-channel NAMUR card .............................................................................................................12
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card ................................................................................................15
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card .........................................................................................17
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card ...............................................................................................18
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card .........................................................................................20
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card .............................................................................................21
DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card ...............................................................................................25
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card ...................................................................................27
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card .....................................................................................29
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card ...........................................................................................31
Isolated input card ........................................................................................................................33
Pulse count input card ...................................................................................................................36
RTD / Resistance input card ...........................................................................................................39
Sequence of Events card ...............................................................................................................40
Thermocouple / mV input card .....................................................................................................43
S-series bussed I/O cards specifications ....................................................................................................45
AS-Interface card ..........................................................................................................................45
DeviceNet card .............................................................................................................................47
Fieldbus H1 card ...........................................................................................................................49
H1 card with Integrated Power ......................................................................................................51
Profibus DP card ............................................................................................................................55
Serial card .....................................................................................................................................56
VIM card ........................................................................................................................................60
S-series simplex terminal block specifications ...........................................................................................61
8-Channel Terminal Block .............................................................................................................61
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block ...................................................................................................63
AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) ......................................................................................64
AI 16-Channel Terminal Block .......................................................................................................65
Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block ..............................................................................................67
DeviceNet Terminal Block .............................................................................................................68
H1 Terminal Block .........................................................................................................................69
H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block .....................................................................................70
Interface Terminal Block ................................................................................................................71
Isolated Input Terminal Block ........................................................................................................72
Profibus DP Terminal Block ...........................................................................................................73
RTD / Resistance Terminal Block ....................................................................................................74
Thermocouple Terminal Block ......................................................................................................75

i
 1833 of 2474

Contents

S-series redundant terminal block specifications .......................................................................................77

Redundant AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) ....................................................................77
Redundant AO 8-Channel Terminal Block ......................................................................................78
Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block ..............................................................................79
Redundant H1 Terminal Block .......................................................................................................80
Redundant Interface Terminal Block ............................................................................................. 81
Redundant H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block ................................................................... 82
Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block ......................................................................................... 83
S-series mass terminal block specifications ...............................................................................................85
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block ...........................................................................................................85
24-pin mass termination block ......................................................................................................85
40-Pin Mass Terminal Block ...........................................................................................................86
Chapter 2 S-series carrier specifications ..........................................................................................89
Power / Controller Carrier ......................................................................................................................... 89
Left and Right Extenders ...........................................................................................................................92
8-Wide I/O Carrier .....................................................................................................................................94
DeltaV SIS adapter ....................................................................................................................................96
Chapter 3 WirelessHART I/O ............................................................................................................99
WirelessHART I/O overview .......................................................................................................................99
WirelessHART I/O Card ............................................................................................................................. 99
WirelessHART I/O Carrier ........................................................................................................................101
WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block (redundant) ........................................................................................103
Smart Wireless Field Link specifications ..................................................................................................104
Chapter 4 CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications ...........................................................................107
CHARMs I/O overview .............................................................................................................................107
CHARM I/O Card .....................................................................................................................................110
CHARM I/O Carrier ..................................................................................................................................112
CHARM Baseplate ...................................................................................................................................114
Address Plug ...........................................................................................................................................118
CHARM Column Terminator ...................................................................................................................119
CHARM Column Extenders and cable ......................................................................................................119
CHARM Terminal Block ...........................................................................................................................121
CHARM Fused Injected Power terminal block ..........................................................................................122
CHARM Injected Power terminal block ....................................................................................................124
CHARM Relay Output terminal block ......................................................................................................125
CHARM Address Terminal .......................................................................................................................126
Analog Input CHARMs specifications ......................................................................................................127
AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM ............................................................................................................127
Analog Output CHARMs specifications ...................................................................................................129
AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM ..........................................................................................................129
Discrete Input CHARMs specifications ....................................................................................................131
DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM .........................................................................................................131
DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM ........................................................................................................133
DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM ........................................................................................................135
DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM ..........................................................................136
DI NAMUR CHARM ......................................................................................................................138
Discrete Output CHARMs specifications .................................................................................................140
DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM ......................................................................................................140
DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM ........................................................................................................142

ii
 1834 of 2474

Contents

DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM .............................................................................................144

DO VAC isolated CHARM .............................................................................................................146
RTD Input CHARMs .................................................................................................................................148
RTD / Resistance input CHARM ...................................................................................................148
Thermocouple Input CHARMS ................................................................................................................150
Thermocouple / mV input CHARM ..............................................................................................150
Voltage CHARMs ....................................................................................................................................153
AI 0-10 V CHARM specifications ..................................................................................................153
Chapter 5 Power guidelines and specifications ..............................................................................155
Power in a DeltaV system ........................................................................................................................155
System power supply (24 VDC) specifications .........................................................................................156
DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply specifications ...........................................................157
Extending the LocalBus ...........................................................................................................................159
Sizing the System Power Supply (24 VDC) ...............................................................................................160
Sizing the AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply ............................................................................................160
DC current requirements for S-series I/O .................................................................................................161
Using multiple system power supplies for redundancy ............................................................................162
Using multiple bulk power supplies for redundancy and load sharing ......................................................165
Heat dissipation specifications for S-series I/O and DeltaV Smart Switches .............................................167
Injecting additional power to S-series I/O ................................................................................................170
Inject power to I/O on the same DIN rail ......................................................................................171
Inject power to I/O on another DIN rail ........................................................................................172
Inject power to I/O when the power source is remotely installed .................................................173
Power requirements for CHARMs I/O ......................................................................................................174
Inject field power to CHARMs I/O ...............................................................................................174
Chapter 6 S-series controller specifications ...................................................................................177
SD Plus and SX Controller ........................................................................................................................177
Chapter 7 LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O ................................................179
S-series classic I/O cards - LEDs ................................................................................................................179
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card ................................................................................................179
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card ..............................................................................................180
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card ...............................................................................................181
8-channel DI cards ......................................................................................................................182
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card .......................................................................................183
8-channel DO cards .....................................................................................................................183
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card ........................................................................................184
Isolated input card ......................................................................................................................185
Pulse count input card .................................................................................................................185
RTD / Resistance and Thermocouple / mV input cards .................................................................186
Sequence of Events card .............................................................................................................187
S-series bussed I/O cards - LEDs ..............................................................................................................187
AS-Interface card ........................................................................................................................187
DeviceNet card ...........................................................................................................................188
H1 card with Integrated Power ....................................................................................................189
Fieldbus H1 card .........................................................................................................................190
Profibus DP card ..........................................................................................................................191
Serial card ...................................................................................................................................192
VIM card ......................................................................................................................................193
CHARMs I/O - LEDs ..................................................................................................................................193
CHARM I/O Card .........................................................................................................................193

iii
 1835 of 2474

Contents

Analog CHARMs ..........................................................................................................................194

Discrete CHARMs ........................................................................................................................196
I/O Port ...................................................................................................................................................198
Controllers, power supplies - LEDs ..........................................................................................................200
Controllers ..................................................................................................................................200
System Power Supply ..................................................................................................................201
DeltaV Smart Switches - LEDs .................................................................................................................202
DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches .....................................................................................202
DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches .....................................................................................204
Wireless components - LEDs ...................................................................................................................205
WirelessHART I/O card ................................................................................................................205
Chapter 8 The DeltaV Control Network .........................................................................................207
DeltaV Control Network overview ...........................................................................................................207
Category 5(e) Screened 4 Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable guidelines ...............................................................207
Fiber-optic cable guidelines ....................................................................................................................208
Cable accessories specifications ..............................................................................................................209
Building twisted pair cable assemblies ....................................................................................................209
Build an unshielded plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector ..................................................................210
Build a shielded metal-enclosed RJ45 connector .........................................................................211
Build straight-through cable .......................................................................................................211
Build crossover cable ...................................................................................................................212
DeltaV Smart Switches overview .............................................................................................................212
Important information about using uplinks between DeltaV Smart Switches and third party
switches .....................................................................................................................................213
Pin outs on the serial interface cable used with DeltaV Smart Switches .......................................214
DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches .............................................................................214
Media modules used with the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches ..............................216
Power specifications for the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches .................................219
DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches ............................................................................................220
Connection capacities for the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches .............................................222
Media modules used with the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches .............................................223
Power specifications for the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches ................................................223
DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches .......................................................................................................224
Power specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches ............................................................226
The management station .......................................................................................................................227
Connecting a management station to the DeltaV Control Network ........................................................228
DeltaV Controller Firewall .......................................................................................................................228
Reserved DeltaV IP addresses .................................................................................................................231
Example networks with DeltaV Smart Switches ......................................................................................233
Twisted pair network with S-series I/O:example 1 .......................................................................233
Twisted pair network with S-series I/O: example 2 .......................................................................235
Other twisted pair network examples .........................................................................................237
Fiber-optic and twisted pair uplinks network example .................................................................241
Twisted pair network with CHARMs and S-series I/O ....................................................................244
Twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O .......................................................................................247
Twisted pair network with CHARMs and S-series I/O and DeltaV Controller Firewall ....................250
Twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O and DeltaV Controller Firewall ........................................253
Twisted pair network with WirelessHART I/O cards .....................................................................256
Chapter 9 Environmental specifications for S-series and CHARMs hardware ..................................259
Temperature and humidity specifications for DeltaV hardware ...............................................................259
Contaminants, vibration, and shock specifications for DeltaV hardware .................................................260

iv
 1836 of 2474

Contents

Chapter 10 Hazardous area, NAMUR, and ATEX documents .............................................................263

DeltaV Hazardous area and NAMUR installation manuals and ATEX instruction sheets ...........................263
Chapter 11 Product type numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware ............................................265
Product type numbers for DeltaV S-series and CHARMs hardware ..........................................................265

Index ................................................................................................................................................269

v
 1837 of 2474

Contents

vi
 1838 of 2474

About this manual

Preface

About this manual

This manual contains installation notes, specifications, wiring diagrams, dimensions, and
other reference information for S-series and CHARMs hardware components.

Related documentation

• The DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Installation manual explains how to install
S-series and CHARMs hardware components and provides torque limits for
mounting screws.
• The Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual
contains instructions for properly preparing your site for electrical power and
grounding.
• The Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital Automation System manual provides
information on using fieldbus in a DeltaV system.
• The Installing Your DeltaV SIS™ Process Safety System Hardware manual contains
information about installing SIS hardware.

Note
All electrical installations must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
All installation and maintenance procedures described in this document must be performed by
qualified personnel and all equipment must be used only for the purposes described. If the
equipment is used in a manner not specified, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

Assumptions

It is assumed that you have read the Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems
and have followed the instructions for properly preparing your site for electrical power and
grounding before installing your DeltaV system. The Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV
Automation Systems is available from your Emerson Process Management representative or
sales office. It is also assumed that all installation procedures described in this document
are performed by qualified personnel and that the equipment is used only for the purposes
described.

CE statement

This manual describes installation and maintenance procedures for products that have
been tested to be in compliance with appropriate CE directives. To maintain compliance,
these products must be installed and maintained according to the procedures described in
this document. Failure to follow the procedures may compromise compliance.

vii
 1839 of 2474

About this manual

Conventions used in this manual

Notes are used to help you to understand important information.

Warnings are used to describe a critical procedure that must be followed to prevent a
safety risk or equipment damage.

Cautions are used to describe a procedure that must be followed to prevent equipment
malfunction.

The publication date for this manual is May 2011.

viii
 1840 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

1 S-series I/O interface specifications

Topics covered in this chapter:
• What is DeltaV S-series hardware?
• Important information about hazardous live voltages
• DeltaV S-series I/O interface overview
• S-series classic I/O cards specifications
• S-series bussed I/O cards specifications
• S-series simplex terminal block specifications
• S-series redundant terminal block specifications
• S-series mass terminal block specifications

What is DeltaV S-series hardware?

DeltaV S-series hardware is the next generation of DeltaV hardware.

DeltaV S-series hardware includes:

• S-series controllers
• S-series I/O cards and terminal blocks
• S-series carriers
• S-series power supplies

S-series hardware provides the same functionality, performance, and capacity as M-series
hardware and includes the following additional features:
• The S-series 8-wide carrier enhancements provide integrated field power
distribution for individual I/O cards and separate primary and secondary field power
distribution to redundant cards.
• The LocalBus supports up to 15 A of system power.
• The S-series carriers are designed to snap onto T-type DIN rails without the use of
tools. Carriers can be adjusted on the rail without removing cards or terminal blocks.
• S-series I/O cards and terminal blocks are designed to snap onto the slots on the S-
series 8-wide carrier without the use of tools.
• The S-series Power / Controller carrier can hold an S-series system power supply and
controller or two power supplies if additional system power is needed. When the
carrier holds two power supplies for power injection, it can be installed inline
between two S-series 8-wide carriers with no wired connection for power
distribution or separately on the DIN rail, wired to a left one-wide extender.

S-series I/O cards and terminal blocks require S-series controllers and S-series carriers. S-
series controllers cannot be used with M-series I/O cards and terminal blocks and M-series
controllers cannot be used with S-series I/O cards and terminal blocks.

1
 1841 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

The DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Installation manual explains how to install S-
series hardware. The Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System manual contains
reference information for DeltaV M-series hardware.

Important information about hazardous live

voltages
WARNING!
The AC input and output CHARMs and I/O cards, as well as carriers and baseplates may have
hazardous live voltages present on the input or output terminals. These devices switch or
sense the presence of 120 VAC or 250 VAC field power. Ensure that proper safety precautions,
such as de-energizing field power, are observed during installation, maintenance, or any time
wiring changes are made to any of the following devices:
• KL4201X1-BA1: Charm Baseplate
• KL4502X1-BA1: Charm Terminal Block
• KL4502X1-CA1: Charm Injected Power Terminal Block
• KL4502X1-DA1: CHARM Address Terminal
• KL4502X1-LA1: CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block
• KL4502X1-MA1: Charm Relay Output Terminal Block
• KL3011X1-BA1: DI 120 VAC Isolated CHARM
• KL3012X1-BA1: DI 230 VAC Isolated CHARM
• KL3013X1-BA1: DO VAC Isolated CHARM
• KJ4005X1-BE1: S-series 8-Wide I/O Carrier
• KJ4005X1-BF1: Power Terminals
• KJ4006X1-BB1: S-series 8-Channel Terminal Block
• KJ3207X1-BK1 and BL1: S-series DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated and DI 8-channel 120 VAC
dry contact cards respectively
• KJ3209X1-BK1: S-series DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card
• KJ3210X1- BK1: S-series DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card
• KJ4006X1-BC1: S-series Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block

DeltaV S-series I/O interface overview

DeltaV S-series I/O hardware is designed for quick installation.

The I/O interface, sometimes called the I/O subsystem, consists of terminal blocks that clip
onto the carrier to provide terminations for field wiring and the I/O cards that snap onto
the terminal blocks. The I/O cards convert field signals to the appropriate format for
control and communications.

2
 1842 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-1: S-series I/O card

The DeltaV S-series I/O interface consists of multiple types of I/O cards including analog
and discrete input and output cards, HART input and output cards, Thermocouple / mV
input, RTD / Resistance input, isolated, and pulse count input cards, serial cards, and
Sequence of Events cards. Bus cards such as the Fieldbus H1, Profibus DP, AS-Interface,
and DeviceNet are also supported. A single I/O subsystem supports up to 64 I/O cards.

The following S-series cards support simplex or redundant applications:

• AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART

• AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART
• DI 8-channel NAMUR
• DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side
• Fieldbus H1
• Profibus DP
• Serial card

The following S-series cards support simplex applications:

• AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART

• AS-Interface
• DeviceNet
• DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated

3
 1843 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact

• DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated
• DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact
• DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated
• DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side
• DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated
• DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side
• Isolated input
• Pulse count input
• RTD / Resistance input
• Sequence of Events
• Thermocouple / m V input

S-series classic I/O cards specifications

AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications
Installation notes

• The AI 8-channel terminal block (2 or 4-wire) is recommended to provide

terminations for field wiring for the AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card. Optional
terminal blocks are the Fused 8-channel terminal Block (2-wire), the 8-channel
terminal block, the 16-pin mass termination block, and the 24-pin mass termination
block.
• The Redundant Analog Input terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for redundant AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART cards for
either 2-wire or 4-wire applications.
• To function correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC be supplied through the field
power connection which is also used for the card's A/D converter. Power for the
4-wire transmitters must be provided from an appropriate external power source.
See the transmitter specifications for power source information.
• The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-1: AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA

4
 1844 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-1: AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Full signal range 1 to 22.5 mA, with overrange checking
Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half sampling
frequency
Calibration None required
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card For each redundant card: (1)
• 175 mA typical
• 250 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)
Field circuit power per channel 30 mA maximum
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Valid range for LED indication 0.75 to 23 mA
Communications support (only for version with • HART pass-through request/response
HART) • HART variable report
• Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

(1) Double for a redundant pair.

5
 1845 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-2: Simplex 2-AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card wiring diagram
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

Optional fuse + -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels

Current
+ limiter

2-wire analog
A/D
and/or HART
Converter
field transmitter
T
System

- Low
pass
+ filter
4 wire T
250 Ω
-
AI 8-channel Channels
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(2 or 4 wire)

1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
+

2-Wire
2 5 5 11 14 17 20 23
+ –
4-Wire
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
–

6
 1846 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-3: Redundant AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination
Common
Current connections
limiter for 8 channels
A/D
System
Converter
Low pass
filter

+ 250 Ω
2-Wire analog
and/or HART
field transmitter T
Secondary I/O card

- Current
limiter
+ Relay
A/D
Converter
System
Low pass
4 wire filter
T
Mode
250 Ω

-
Redundant Channels
AI 8-channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
terminal block + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – 2-Wire

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 -Wire
–

Related Links
AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) specifications on page 64
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85
24-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85
Redundant AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) specifications on page 77

7
 1847 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications

Installation notes

• The AI 16-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card.
• To function correctly, the card requires that 24 VDC be supplied through the field
power connection.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-2: AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels 16
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 2 to 22 mA
Accuracy over temperature range 0.2% of span
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the sam-
pling frequency
Calibration None required
2-wire transmitter power 13.5 V minimum at 20 mA (current limited to 29
mA maximum)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal) 85 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power (per card) 600 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)
Field circuit per channel 30 mA maximum
Isolation Field to system isolation is factory tested to
1500 VDC. No channel to channel isolation.
Communications support • HART pass-through request/response
• HART variable report
• Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

8
 1848 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-4: AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card
(Odd no.) Common
connection
+ Current
limiter
for 16 channels

2-Wire analog and/or

HART field transmitter A/D
T Converter System
Low
pass
(Even no.)
- filter

250 Ω

AI 16-channel Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
AI 16-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 65

AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the simplex AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card. Optional terminal blocks
are the Fused 8-channel terminal block (2-wire) and the 16-pin mass termination
block.
• The Redundant Analog Output terminal block is recommended to provide
terminations for field wiring for the redundant AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card.
• The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.

9
 1849 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-3: AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 mA to 23 mA
Accuracy over temperature range • 0.25% (0 to 60°C)
• 0.4% (-40 to 70°C)
Resolution 14 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART
Calibration Information stored on card
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card For each redundant card: (2)
• 175 mA typical
• 250 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Output compliance 20 mA at 21.6 VDC supply into 700 Ω load
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Communications Support (only for version with • HART pass-through request/response
HART) • HART variable report
• Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

(2) Double for a redundant pair.

10
 1850 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-5: Simplex AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
4-20 mA current source
- +
I/O Card Common Termination
connection
for 8 channels

Optional fuse

D/A
System Converter
(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device and/or HART
Load

-
(Even no.) I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

11
 1851 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-6: Redundant AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

- + - +
Primary I/O card Redundant
Common termination
connections
for 8 channels
Mode Relay
System A/D
Converter

(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device
Load and/or HART
Secondary I/O card

-
(Even no.)
System A/D
Converter

Redundant analog
output terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related Links
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85
Redundant AO 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 78

DI 8-channel NAMUR card specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the DI 8-channel NAMUR card. Optional terminal blocks are the Fused
8-channel terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
• The Redundant discrete 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide
terminations for field wiring for the redundant DI 8-channel NAMUR card.
• NAMUR sensors that are designed to operate within an excitation voltage range of 5
to 18 V are compatible with DI 8-channel NAMUR cards. With 24 VDC power
connected to this card there is enough wetting current and excitation voltage (15.6

12
 1852 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

VDC ) provided to operate NAMUR sensors designed for an excitation voltage range
of 5 to 18 V. NAMUR sensors not designed to operate in the 5 to 18 V range may not
work with DI 8-channel NAMUR cards. Line fault detection is built into NAMUR
sensors. Do not use external resistors with NAMUR sensors; however, you must
enable line fault detection in your configuration when using NAMUR sensors.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.
• The DI 8-channel NAMUR card has line fault detection for detecting open or short
circuits in field wiring. To use this capability you must:
- Enable line fault detection in your configuration. Enable line fault detection on a
channel-by-channel basis when you configure the channels.
- Connect the dry contact to external resistors. Connect the dry contact to a
6.8 KΩ resistor in parallel (allows the open circuit detection) and a 2.4 KΩ resistor
in series (allows short circuit detection).

Figure 1-7: External line fault detection resistors

(Odd no.)
+ 2.4 KΩ

6.8 KΩ

(Even no.)
-

Table 1-4: Line fault detection levels

Line fault detection enabled Value detected

Short Circuit <100 Ω for guaranteed short circuit detection
Open Circuit >100 kΩ for guaranteed open loop detection

Specifications

Table 1-5: DI 8-channel NAMUR card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Channel voltage 15.6 VDC
Detection level for On > 2.2 mA
Detection level for Off < 1 mA
Impedance 5 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 90 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 100 mA at 24 VDC (±10%)

13
 1853 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-5: DI 8-channel NAMUR card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-8: Simplex DI 8-channel NAMUR card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
System
+ 5K Ω

Logic

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

14
 1854 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-9: Redundant DI 8-channel NAMUR card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Relay System
5K Ω

(Odd no.) Logic

+

Secondary I/O card

5K Ω System

Logic
-
(Even no.)

Redundant
discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related Links
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85
Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 79

DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card. Optional terminal blocks are the
Fused 8-channel terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
• If you use a mass termination block with the DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card, refer
to the termination block specifications for the input rating for each block. Those
specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

15
 1855 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-6: DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Detection level for On > 10 VDC
Detection level for Off < 5 VDC
Input impedance 5 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA typical
• 100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-10: DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card wiring diagram

Optional fuse Carrier

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.) System

+ + 5K Ω
24
VDC
Source
- -
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85

16
 1856 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card. An optional terminal block is
the Fused 8-channel terminal block.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-7: DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Detection level for On > 1.4 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.56 mA
Impedance 60 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA
• 100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 15 mA at 120 VAC
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

17
 1857 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-11: DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact wiring diagram

Carrier
120 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card

Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels

System

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63

DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card specifications

Installation notes

• The Fused 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card. An optional terminal block is
the 8-channel terminal block.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-8: DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Detection level for On 84 VAC to 130 VAC (3)

(3) Consider phase when applying AC voltage to multiple input channels.

18
 1858 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-8: DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 34 VAC
Input load (wetting current) 2 mA at 120 VAC
Input impedance 60 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 75 mA typical
• 100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-12: DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card wiring diagram

Carrier
Optional fuse

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
L + 60K Ω System
120
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61

19
 1859 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card specifications

Installation notes

• The Discrete 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card. An optional terminal
block is the 40-pin mass termination block.
• The return connection for all 32 channels is the 24 VDC field power ground. You
must supply an external wire to make this connection. However the connection is
internally made if the 40-pin mass termination block is used and no external wire is
required.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-9: DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5 kΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 50 mA typical
• 75 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card • 150 mA at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

20
 1860 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-13: DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card Common
connection
System for 32
channels
32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
indicate the channel
assignments)
+

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Related Links
Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 67
40-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 86

DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications

Installation notes

• The Fused 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card. Optional terminal blocks
are the 8-channel terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block. If you use a
mass termination block with the DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side I/O card, refer to
the termination block specifications for the output rating for each block. Those
specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.
• The Redundant Discrete 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide
terminations for field wiring for the redundant DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card.
• The DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card has line fault detection that can be enabled
on a channel-by-channel basis as a configuration item. When line fault detection is
enabled, the card detects open and short line fault conditions by performing an
internal readback of the output to verify its value in both on and off states. The card
tests the opposite state of its current value by temporarily changing the output to

21
 1861 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

that value, performing the internal readback, then returning the output to its
configured output value. The pulses to the opposite state are never greater than
200 microseconds. High speed inputs that connect to a DO channel with line fault
enabled must consider these pulses in the input software scheme. When line fault
detection is not enabled, a more limited detection of open and short line fault
conditions is available on the active redundant card only. This is accomplished by the
internal readback mechanism without pulsing the output to the opposite state.
Therefore, shorts can be detected only when the DO channel is on, and opens can be
detected only when the DO channel is off. When line fault detection is not enabled,
and the card is simplex, line fault tests do not run and line fault conditions are not
reported.
• When pulse testing is enabled, the LED on the output device may be slightly
illuminated.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Note
Total cable capacitance of less than 30 nF is acceptable. Line fault detection does not work with large
inductive or capacitive loads and must be disabled under these conditions.

Table 1-10: Line fault detection levels

Line fault detection Value detected

Short circuit <5 Ω for >3 seconds
Open circuit • >25 kΩ for guaranteed open loop detection
• < 8 kΩ for guaranteed no open loop detec-
tion

Specifications

Table 1-11: DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Output range 24 VDC +/-10%
Output rating • 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 4.0 A
for <100 ms; 6.0 A for <20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
Configurable channel types
Discrete output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted by
the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value.

22
 1862 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-11: DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Momentary output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
Continuous pulse output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 90 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 24 VDC (±10%)
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cy-
cle)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

23
 1863 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-14: Simplex DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
I/O Card Termination Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8
channels
(Odd no.)
System
+
Load

-
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
- 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

24
 1864 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-15: Redundant DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Primary Redundant
I/O card termination
Common
connections
for 8 channels
System Relay
Mode

(Odd no.)
+
Secondary
I/O card
Load

System
-
(Even no.)

Redundant discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-

Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related Links
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85
Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 79

DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card. Optional terminal blocks are the
Fused 8-channel terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
• If you use a mass termination block with the DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card,
refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each block.
Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.

25
 1865 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-12: DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Output rating 1.0 A (inrush 4.0 A for <100 ms; 6.0 A for <20
ms)
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
Configurable channel types
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted by
the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cy-
cle)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

26
 1866 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-16: Wiring diagram for DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card

Carrier Optional fuse

I/O Card Termination

(Odd no.)
System + +
DC
Power
supply
Load
-
(Even no.)
-

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
- I/O Terminal block

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 85

DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card specifications

Installation notes

• The Fused 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card. An optional terminal
block is the 8-channel terminal block.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-13: DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC
Output rating • 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
< 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card

27
 1867 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-13: DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Off state leakage 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC, 4 mA maximum at
230 VAC
Configurable channel types
Discrete output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted by
the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value.
Momentary output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
Continuous pulse output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is reconfig-
ured as a latched output.
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 120 VAC or 230 VAC per I/O Interface
Field power per channel .375 mA at 1 A maximum per channel
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

28
 1868 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-17: DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card wiring diagram

Carrier
120/230 VAC Bussed AC
field power connection
L N
I/O Card Termination
Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8 channels (Odd no.)
System +
Load

-(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61

DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card. An optional terminal block
is the Fused 8-channel terminal block.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-14: DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Off state leakage • 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC
• 4 mA maximum at 230 VAC
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC

29
 1869 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-14: DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Output rating • 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
<100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
• 3.0 A maximum per card
Configurable channel types
Discrete output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted by
the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value.
Momentary output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured fail-
ure action mode: Output is driven to the config-
ured failsafe value and the channel is re-config-
ured as a latched output.
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

30
 1870 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-18: DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated wiring diagram

Carrier
Optional fuse

I/O Card Termination

120/230 VAC Power

(Odd no.)
System + L N

Load
-
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 63
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61

DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications

Installation notes

• The Discrete 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card. An optional terminal block
is the 40-pin mass termination block.
• The return connection for all 32 channels is the 24 VDC field power ground. You
must supply an external wire to make this connection. However the connection is
internally made if the 40-pin mass termination block is used and no external wire is
required. A resettable 1A fuse protects each group of four channels (1-4,
5-8,...29-32) from a short circuit. Excessive current on any single channel can trip
the fuse and disable all four channels in the group. If the fuse trips, turn off or
disconnect the group of four channels and allow the fuse to cool and reset.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

31
 1871 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-15: DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Output range 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Output rating 100 mA per channel
Off-state leakage 0.1 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 100 mA typical
• 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.2 A at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-19: DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
I/O Card Termination

Common
connection for
32 channels Load
System

32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 indicate the channel
assigments)
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Related Links
Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 67

32
 1872 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

40-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 86

Isolated input card specifications

Installation notes

• The Isolated input terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

wiring for the Isolated Input card.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-16: Isolated input card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Thermocouple Sensor Types B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, Uncharacterized
RTD Sensor Types PT100, PT200, Ni120, Cu10, Resistance, User
defined
mV and V ranges Refer to Table 1-19 and Table 1-22 .
Input type mix Independently configurable
AD Resolution 16-bit
Calibration None required
Isolation CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.1010.1 or CAN/ • Installation Cat II, Pollution degree 2.
CSA-C22.2 No.61010.1 • Channel to system - 600 VAC double insula-
tion. Each channel is optically isolated from
the system and factory tested to 5000 VDC.
• Channel to channel - 600 VAC basic insula-
tion.(4) Each channel is optically isolated
from each other and factory tested to 3100
VDC.
Rolloff frequency -3dB at 2.7 Hz
LocalBus power rating 12 VDC, 350 mA, no field power required
DC/50/60 Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Input impedance 10 M W
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Table 1-17: Thermocouple and mV specifications for the Isolated input card

Item Specification
Linearization error ±0.003% Full Scale
Cold Junction Compensation Accuracy ±1.0°C

(4) Warning: When hazardous live voltages are present on a channel, adjacent channel wiring must be inaccessible.

33
 1873 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-17: Thermocouple and mV specifications for the Isolated input card
(continued)

Item Specification
Cold Junction Compensation types • off
• local
• remote
Cold Junction Compensation range -40 to 85°C
Temperature scale ITS90
Open circuit detection (Thermocouple 0.4 microAmps DC
only)
Detection time 1 second

Note
In the 25°C reference accuracy column in the following table, total error consists of reading accuracy,
CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.

Table 1-18: Thermocouple input range specifications for the Isolated input card

25°C reference Temperature Nominal resolu-

Sensor types accuracy drift tion Full scale Operating range
B ±1.2°C ±0.116°C/°C 0.09°C 250 to 1810°C 500 to 1810°C
E ±0.5°C ±0.004°C/°C 0.05°C -200 to 1000°C -200 to 1000°C
J ±0.6°C ±0.005°C/°C 0.06°C -210 to 1200°C -190 to 1200°C
K ±0.5°C ±.013°C/°C 0.05°C -270 to 1372°C -140 to 1372°C
N ±1.0°C ±.015°C/°C 0.05°C -270 to 1300°C -190 to 1300°C
R ±1.7°C ±.083°C/°C 0.06°C -50 to 1768°C 0 to 1768°C
S ±1.8°C ±.095°C/°C 0.08°C -50 to 1768°C 0 to 1768°C
T ±0.7°C ±.025°C/°C 0.04°C -270 to 400°C -200 to 400°C
Uncharacterized ±0.05 mV .0003 mV/°C .0031 mV -100 to 100 mV -100 to 100 mV
no linearization or
CJC

Table 1-19: mV input range specifications for the Isolated input card

25°C reference accu-

Sensor type Input ranges racy Temperature drift Maximum resolution
20 mV ±20 mV ±0.02 mV 0.001 mV/°C 0.0008 mV
50 mV ±50 mV ±0.03 mV 0.0005 mV/°C 0.0017 mV
100 mV ±100 mV ±0.05 mV 0.0003 mV/°C 0.0031 mV

34
 1874 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-20: RTD, ohms input specifications for the Isolated input card

Item Specification
Measurement configurations 2, 3, and 4 wire
Excitation current 100 mA DC
Temperature scale ITS90
Open sensor detection time 1 second
Short circuit detection time 1 second
Pt 100 and Pt 200 alpha 0.00385

Table 1-21: RTD, ohms input range specifications for the Isolated input card

25°C reference accu-

Sensor type racy Temperature drift Resolution Sensor input range
Pt100 ±0.5 °C ±0.018 °C/°C 0.05 °C -200 to 850 °C
Pt200 ±0.5 °C ±0.012 °C/°C 0.05 °C -200 to 850 °C
Ni120 ±0.2 °C ±0.006 °C/°C 0.02 °C -70 to 300 °C
Cu10 ±2.0 °C ±0.076 °C/°C 0.23 °C -30 to 140 °C
Resistance ±0.5 Ω ±0.018 Ω/°C 0.02 Ω 1 to 1000 Ω
User defined ±0.4 Ω ±0.009 Ω/°C ~0.05 Ω 0 to 1000 Ω

Table 1-22: Voltage input range specifications for the Isolated input card

25°C reference accu-

Sensor type Sensor range racy Temperature drift Maximum resolution
0-5V 0-5V ±0.005 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00009 V
0 - 10 V 0 - 10 V ±0.010 V ±0.0004 V/°C 0.00016 V
1-5V 1-5V ±0.005 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00009 V
1V ±1 V ±0.0025 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00015 V
5V ±5 V ±0.005 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00017 V
10 V ±10 V ±0.010 V ±0.0004 V/°C 0.0003 V

35
 1875 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-20: Isolated input card wiring diagram

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

Excitation
1, 5, 9, 13 current

+
2, 6, 10, 14
4 3 2 TC
wire wire wire
mV
V A/D
To
- Conv.
system
3, 7, 11, 15

4, 8, 12, 16

1 5 9 13 4-wire sensor excitation

Isolated input
terminal block
2 6 10 14
+ Sensor +
3 7 11 15
- Sensor -
4 8 12 16
Wire compensation

Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4

Related Links
Isolated Input Terminal Block specifications on page 72

Pulse count input card specifications

Installation notes

• The Discrete 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the Pulse count input card. The following table lists the pin outs
connections for the Pulse count input card.
• The Pulse count input card's discrete input channel has a switching hysteresis of 80
mV. Noise signals above this amplitude are detected by the input channel.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

36
 1876 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Table 1-23: Discrete 32-channel terminal block used with the Pulse count input card

Channel nomencla- Channel nomencla-

Terminal ture Terminal ture
Terminal 1 Reserved for future use Terminal 17 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch1+
Terminal 2 Reserved for future use Terminal 18 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch1-
Terminal 3 Reserved for future use Terminal 19 Reserved for future use
Terminal 4 Reserved for future use Terminal 20 Reserved for future use
Terminal 5 Reserved for future use Terminal 21 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch2+
Terminal 6 Reserved for future use Terminal 22 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch2-
Terminal 7 Reserved for future use Terminal 23 Reserved for future use
Terminal 8 Reserved for future use Terminal 24 Reserved for future use
Terminal 9 Reserved for future use Terminal 25 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch3+
Terminal 10 Reserved for future use Terminal 26 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch3-
Terminal 11 +24 VDC Terminal 27 Reserved for future use
Terminal 12 - 24 VDC (return) Terminal 28 Reserved for future use
Terminal 13 Reserved for future use Terminal 29 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch4+
Terminal 14 Reserved for future use Terminal 30 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch4-
Terminal 15 +24 VDC Terminal 31 Reserved for future use
Terminal 16 - 24 VDC (return) Terminal 32 Reserved for future use

Specifications

Table 1-24: Pulse count input card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Detection level for ON 4.8 VDC (minimum)
Detection level for OFF 1.0 VDC (maximum)
Input impedance 3 to 25 mA at 5 to 24 VDC

37
 1877 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-24: Pulse count input card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Input accuracy 0.1% reading (over 10 Hz - 50
kHz signals)(5)
Input frequency • Sine wave - 10 Hz to 50 kHz
• Square wave - 0.1 Hz to
50kHz
Resolution 1 pulse
Minimum pulse width 10 microseconds
Maximum input voltage 26.4 VDC
Resolution counter 32 bits
LocalBus current 150 mA maximum
Isolation Each channel is optically isola-
ted from the system and from
each other and factory tested
to 1500 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-21: Pulse count input card wiring diagram

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

System
+ + 750 Ω
24
VDC
Source
- -

Ch Ch Ch Ch
Use 32-channel 1 2 3 4
terminal block (refer
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
to table for pin out
connections and
+
channel nomenclature) 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

(5) Filtering may be required to meet the accuracy specification for a pulse input channel.

38
 1878 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Related Links
Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 67

RTD / Resistance input card specifications

Installation notes

• The RTD / Resistance terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the RTD / Resistance input card.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-25: RTD / Resistance input card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types 2-wire, 3-wire, or 4-wire: Resistance, Pt100,
Pt200, Pt500, Ni120, Cu10, user defined
Excitation current 100 mA DC
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to 16 bits conversion
Table 1-26 ).
Calibration None required
DC/50/60/Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor. Refer to Table 1-26 .
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 160 mA
Ambient Temperature -40 to 70ºC
Accuracy over temperature range Refer to Table 1-26.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Table 1-26: RTD, ohms sensor type specifications

25° reference ac- Temperature

Sensor type Full scale Operating range curacy drift Resolution
Resistance 0 to 2000 Ω 0 to 2000 Ω ±6.2 Ω ±0.112 Ω/°C ~0.02 Ω
Pt100 -200 to 850°C -200 to 850°C ±0.5°C ±0.018°C/°C ~0.05°C
Pt200 -200 to 850°C -200 to 850°C ±0.5°C ±0.012°C/°C ~0.05°C
Pt500 -200 to 850°C -200 to 850°C ±3.5°C ±0.063°C/°C ~0.18°C
Ni120 -70 to 300°C -70 to 300°C ±0.2°C ±0.006°C/°C ~0.02°C
Cu10 -30 to 140°C -30 to 140°C ±2.0°C ±0.157°C/°C ~0.23°C
User defined 0 to 1000 Ω 0 to 1000 Ω ±0.4 Ω ±0.009 Ω/°C ~0.05 Ω

39
 1879 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-22: RTD / Resistance input card wiring diagram

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

Sensor
excitation Excitation
current

Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common Excitation
current
RTD, ohms
Terminal block

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
RTD / Resistance Terminal Block specifications on page 74

Sequence of Events card specifications

Installation notes

• The Discrete 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for

field wiring for the Sequence of Events card. An optional terminal block is the 40-pin
mass termination block. The following table lists the pin outs for the Sequence of
Events card.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

40
 1880 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Table 1-27: Discrete 32-channel terminal block used with the Sequence of Events
card

Terminal Channel nomenclature Terminal Channel nomenclature

Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

Specifications

Table 1-28: Sequence of Events card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels 16. Each channel can be configured for DI or SoE opera-
tion.
Scan rate 0.25 ms for all 16 channels
Time stamp accuracy (for SoE channels 0.25 ms on a card; 1 ms in a controller. Accuracy with
only) reference to system clock time after a 4 ms debounce
filter has been applied.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5 KΩ
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per • 75 mA typical
card • 100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 75 mA at 24 VDC (±20%)

41
 1881 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-28: Sequence of Events card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the system and
factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-23: Sequence of Events card wiring diagram

Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O card Common
(Odd no.) connection
for 16 channels
+

System

-
(Even no.)

32-Channel
terminal block Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
+
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
+
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Related Links
Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 67
40-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications on page 86

42
 1882 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Thermocouple / mV input card specifications

Installation notes

• The Thermocouple terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the Thermocouple / mV input card. An optional terminal block is the
8-channel terminal block.
• When the Thermocouple / mV input card is plugged into a Thermocouple terminal
block, it functions as a Thermocouple card; when it is plugged into an 8-channel
terminal block, it functions as an mV card.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-29: Thermocouple / mV input card specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types: • mV: Low level voltage source
• Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, uncharacterized
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor type. Refer to Table 1-30.
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Re- 16 bits
fer to Table 1-30 ).
Calibration None required
Cold Junction Compensation ±1°C
Isolation • Each channel is optically isolated from the system
and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
• Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are isolated from channels 5,
6, 7, and 8 (verified by 1500 VDC factory test). Ther-
mocouples attached to channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
not electrically isolated and should be within ± 0.7
VDC of each other. Thermocouples attached to
channels 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not electrically isolated
and should be within ± 0.7 VDC of each other.
DC/50/60Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Accuracy over temperature range (line- • Thermocouple: Refer to Table 1-30
arized) • mV: Refer to Table 1-31
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 210 mA
Ambient Temperature -40 to 70ºC
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

43
 1883 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Note
For all thermocouple sensor types, when a function block is assigned to a Thermocouple card, the
XD_SCALE and the OUT_SCALE in the function block display the operating range and not the full
scale range. When attempting to measure a temperature outside of the operating range, the
module's OUT parameter is clamped within the operating range.

Note
In the 25ºC reference accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of reading
accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.

Table 1-30: Thermocouple sensor type specifications

25°C reference Temperature

Sensor type Full scale Operating range accuracy drift Resolution
Uncharacterized -100 to 100 mV -100 to 100 mV 0.1 mV ±0.002 mV/°C ~ 0.003 mV
(No linearization,
no cold junction
compensation.)
B 250 to 1810°C 500 to 1810°C ±2.4°C ±0.056°C/°C ~ 0.18°C
E -200 to 1000°C -200 to 1000°C ±0.6°C ±0.008°C/°C ~ 0.07°C
J -210 to 1200°C -190 to 1200°C ±0.8°C ±0.011°C/°C ~ 0.05°C
K -270 to 1372°C -200 to 1372°C ±0.5°C ±0.016°C/°C ~ 0.18°C
N -270 to 1300°C -190 to 1300°C ±1.0°C ±0.007°C/°C ~ 0.10°C
R -50 to 1768°C -50 to 1768°C ±2.1°C ±0.013°C/°C ~ 0.14°C
S -50 to 1768°C -40 to 1768°C ±2.2°C ±0.067°C/°C ~ 0.24°C
T -270 to 400°C -200 to 400°C ±0.7°C ±0.001°C/°C ~ 0.04°C

Table 1-31: mV sensor type specifications

Operating 25° reference Temperature

Sensor type Full scale range accuracy drift Resolution
Low Level -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV 0.002 mV/°C ~ 0.003 mV
Voltage mV mV
Source

44
 1884 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-24: Thermocouple / mV input card wiring diagram

Carrier

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
+
A/D
System
Converter

-
(Even no.)
Thermocouple,
mV terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related Links
Thermocouple Terminal Block specifications on page 75
8-Channel Terminal Block specifications on page 61

S-series bussed I/O cards specifications

AS-Interface card specifications
AS-Interface cable

The two-conductor AS-Interface cable supplies both power and data for field devices. An
AS-Interface network can include branches. The total cable length, (main line and all
branches), cannot exceed 100 meters. Refer to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for
design and engineering details on AS-Interface cable. For complete information on
installing AS-Interface devices, visit the AS-Interface Web site.

Table 1-32: AS-Interface cable distance limits

Item Specification
Recommended cable Unshielded AS-Interface yellow cable.(6)

(6) Any other cable, shielded or unshielded, can be used if the installation meets all the impedance requirements specified in the AS-Interface
standard (EN 50295).

45
 1885 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-32: AS-Interface cable distance limits (continued)

Item Specification
Distance limits • 100 meters total length (main line and
branches) without repeater or extender.
• 300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with two repeaters.(7)
• 300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with one extender and one re-
peater.

Installation notes

• The Interface terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the AS-Interface card.
• It is recommended that you do not connect the AS-Interface devices directly to the
AS-Interface card terminals. Use one AS-Interface cable to connect the AS-Interface
card to the power supply and use another AS-Interface cable to connect the devices
to the power supply.
• If you are using extenders and repeaters, refer to the device data sheet for additional
cabling recommendations.
• The AS-Interface bus requires a special AS-Interface power supply (purchased
separately) that provides electrical isolation from the data signals. A standard power
supply can be used but it must have a conditioning module added to its output.
Refer to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering details on
the AS-Interface power supply.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-33: AS-Interface card specifications

Item Specifications
Number of ports Two
Port Type Actuator Sensor-Interface - 167 kb/second
LocalBus Current 300 mA maximum
24 VDC Field circuit power, per card None
30 VDC AS-Interface field power per port 70 mA (maximum)
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

(7) Repeaters require an additional AS-Interface power supply on the far side of the repeater.

46
 1886 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-25: AS-Interface card wiring diagram

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

AS-i 1 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 2 AS-i ( ) - Port
1
3, 5, 7 AS-i ( ) +
System
4, 6, 8 AS-i ( ) -

AS-i 9 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 10 AS-i ( ) -
Port
2
11, 13, 15 AS-i ( ) +
12, 14, 16 AS-i ( ) -
Interface terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
AS-i +
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
AS-i -
Port Port
1 2

Related Links
Interface Terminal Block specifications on page 71

DeviceNet card specifications

Installation notes

• The DeviceNet terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the DeviceNet card.
• The shield on the terminal block can be grounded at pin 8 if required.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-34: DeviceNet card specifications

Item Specification
Number of Ports One

47
 1887 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-34: DeviceNet card specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Port Type DeviceNet
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power (24 VDC nominal), per card 40 mA maximum at 24 VDC (±10%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

Figure 1-26: DeviceNet card wiring diagram

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

5 +24 VDC
Regulator

1 24 VDC return

3 Shield
System

8 Shield

4 CAN HI

2 CAN LO

DeviceNet terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 block

-V +
CL S CH V S

Bottom View

Related Links
DeviceNet Terminal Block specifications on page 68

48
 1888 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Fieldbus H1 card specifications

Installation notes

• Refer to the manual Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Automation System for in-depth
information on using fieldbus with a DeltaV system.
• The H1 terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field wiring for
the simplex Fieldbus H1 card.
• The Redundant H1 terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field
wiring for the redundant Fieldbus H1 card.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-35: Fieldbus H1 card specifications

Item Specification
Number of Ports Two
Port Type Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25 kbit/second
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card • 200 mA
• 300 mA
Field circuit power, per card None
Fieldbus power 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA per port
Isolation Each port is isolated from the system and from
each other and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

49
 1889 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-27: Simplex Fieldbus H1 wiring diagram

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1, 7 (no connection)

2, 8 (no connection)
Port 1
H1
encoder/
decoder
+
3 Port 1 ( )

Port 1

System
-
4 Port 1 ( )

Port 2
+
5 Port 2 ( )
H1 Port 2
encoder/
decoder -
6 Port 2 ( )

Series 2 H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ - + -
Port Port
1 2

50
 1890 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-28: Redundant Fieldbus H1 wiring diagram

Carrier 24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

Primary Redundant
I/O card termination

Port 1
+ 1, 7 (no connection)
H1 encoder/decoder - 2,8 (no connection)

9, 15 (no connection)
System
10, 16 (no connection)

Port 2 + +
H1 encoder/decoder - 3, 11 +
Port 1
Secondary 4, 12 -
I/O card -

Port 1
+
H1 encoder/decoder -
+
System
5, 13 +
Port 2
6, 14 -
Port 2 + -
H1 encoder/decoder -
Redundant H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2

Related Links
H1 Terminal Block specifications on page 69
Redundant H1 Terminal Block specifications on page 80

H1 card with Integrated Power specifications

Installation notes

• The Simplex H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block is recommended to provide

terminations for field wiring for the simplex H1 card with Integrated Power.
• The Redundant H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block is recommended to
provide terminations for field wiring for the redundant H1 card with Integrated
Power.
• Fieldbus segments must be terminated at each end. The H1 with integrated power
terminal blocks contain an integrated terminator for each segment.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

51
 1891 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-36: H1 card with Integrated Power specifications

Item Specification
Number of Ports Two
Port type Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25 kbit/second
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card • 200 mA typical
• 300 mA maximum
Bulk power requirement 1.6 A at 24 VDC
Current provided per segment 400 mA at 28 to 30 VDC
Isolation Each port is isolated from the system and from
each other and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

52
 1892 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 1-29: Simplex H1 card with Integrated Power wiring diagram

Bulk
Power
Supply

Carrier

I/O Card Terminal Block

+
1
DC / DC Port 1 T
Power H1 –
Conditioner encoder 2
+
3
–
4
+
5
DC / DC Port 2 T
Power H1 –
Conditioner encoder 6
+
7
–
8
System

Simplex H1 with
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Integrated Power
Terminal Block

+ – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2

53
 1893 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-30: Redundant H1 card with Integrated Power wiring diagram

Bulk Bulk
Power Power
Supply Supply

Carrier

Primary Redundant
I/O Card Terminal Block
DC / DC Port 1
Power H1
Conditioner encoder
+
3
T –
4
+
DC / DC Port 2 11
Power H1
Conditioner encoder –
12

System

Secondary +
I/O Card
5
DC / DC Port 1 T
Power H1 –
Conditioner encoder 6
+
13
–
14

DC / DC Port 2
Power H1
Conditioner encoder

System

Redundant H1 with
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Integrated Power
Terminal Block

+ – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2

54
 1894 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Profibus DP card specifications

Installation notes

• The Profibus DP terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field

wiring for the Profibus DP card.
• The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block is recommended to provide terminations
for field wiring for the redundant Profibus DP card. For simplex or redundant
applications, when the termination is in the OUT position, pins 1 and 3 and 4 and 6
can be used. When the termination is in the IN position, only pins 1 and 3 can be
used.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-37: Profibus DP card specifications

Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type Profibus DP
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring diagram

In the following wiring diagram, the wiring in the area labeled I/O card is duplicated for a
redundant card.

55
 1895 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-31: Simplex or redundant Profibus DP card wiring diagram

Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1 A1

T in Terminator
System

3 B1

4 A2
T out
6 B2

7 CTS

2, 5, 8 S

Wiring in the area labeled

I/O Card is duplicated Profibus DP or redundant Profibus DP
for redundancy terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (refer to terminal
block specifications for
terminator positions)
A1 S B1 A2 S B2 CTS S

Related Links
Profibus DP Terminal Block specifications on page 73
Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block specifications on page 83

Serial card specifications

Installation notes

• The DeltaV Serial Card provides an interface to a variety of serial devices, such as
PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) that use the Modbus RTU or ASCII protocol.
With the DeltaV Explorer, you can configure each of the two ports provided on the
serial card to support RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, or RS422/485 full duplex
signals and configure the baud rate of each port.
• For CE compliance, use shielded cables to connect the serial card to external
devices. Ground the cable shield at one end only. If the external device does not
provide a mechanism to ground the cable shield, connect the shield to the DeltaV
carrier's shield bar. If you use the RS422/485 ports, the shield must also provide the
ground reference for the port. Connect the cable shield to the corresponding
ground (GND) terminal on the interface terminal block.
• The Interface terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field
wiring for the Serial card.

56
 1896 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• The Redundant Interface terminal block is recommended to provide terminations

for field wiring for the redundant Serial card.
• Refer to ANSI TIA/EIA-485-A for RS485 full duplex termination requirements.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-38: RS232 terminal assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 3 Port 1 TXD
Terminal 5 Port 1 RXD
Terminal 7 Port 1 DTR
Terminal 8 Port 1 DSR
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 11 Port 2 TXD
Terminal 13 Port 2 RXD
Terminal 15 Port 2 DTR
Terminal 16 Port 2 DSR

Table 1-39: RS232 half duplex terminal assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 2 Port 1 DATA+
Terminal 4 Port 1 DATA-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 DATA+
Terminal 12 Port 2 DATA

Note
RS-485 full duplex is not supported when the card is configured as a Modbus slave in a multidrop
environment.

Table 1-40: RS232 full duplex terminal assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 2 Port 1 TXD+
Terminal 4 Port 1 TXD-

57
 1897 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-40: RS232 full duplex terminal assignments (continued)

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 6 Port 1 RXD+
Terminal 8 Port 1 RXD-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 TXD+
Terminal 12 Port 2 TXD-
Terminal 14 Port 2 RXD+
Terminal 16 Port 2 RXD-

Table 1-41: Serial card specifications

Item Specification
Number of serial ports Two
Port types RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, RS422/485 full
duplex (configurable with the DeltaV Explorer)
Baud rate Configurable with the DeltaV Explorer
Maximum cable lengths • RS232: 15 m (50 ft)
• RS422/485: 610 m (2000 ft)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card • 200 mA typical
• 300 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC. The ports must be grounded via the exter-
nal device.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring examples

The following figure shows example wiring from port 1 on the Interface terminal block, for
a simplex Serial card, to a Modicon Model 984 controller.

58
 1898 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Figure 1-32: Interface terminal block and simplex Serial card wiring example

The following figure shows example wiring for connecting a primary and secondary
computer to a Redundant Interface terminal block for a redundant Serial card . For each
computer, use the same wiring scheme as shown in the previous figure.

Figure 1-33: Redundant Interface terminal block and redundant Serial card wiring
example

Related Links
Interface Terminal Block specifications on page 71
Redundant Interface Terminal Block specifications on page 81

59
 1899 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

VIM card specifications

Installation notes

• The VIM card mounts in the right slot of an S-series Power / Controller Carrier.
• The VIM card requires an SD Plus or SX controller and a dedicated S-series System
Power Supply (24 VDC).
• The Power / Controller Carrier holding an VIM card and power supply must be
installed to the left of the first 8-Wide I/O Carrier on the DIN rail. It can be installed
either to the left or right of the Power / Controller Carrier holding the controller and
its power supply.
• This card supports redundancy.
• This card requires an SD Plus or SX controller.

Specifications

Table 1-42: VIM card specifications

Item Specifications
Input power requirement (supplied through the +5 VDC @ 750 mA maximum
System Power Supply (24 VDC
Fuse protection 3.0 A , nonreplaceable internal fuses
External connectors • Plant Ethernet network: One, 10BASE-TX
with 8-pin RJ45 connector
• Redundancy link: One RJ11 serial connector
Mounting Right slot of Power / Controller Carrier

60
 1900 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Image

Figure 1-34: VIM card and power supply on the Power / Controller Carrier
Power /Controller Carrier
System Power VIM
Supply (24 VDC) Card

Plant Ethernet
10Base-TX/RJ45
(rear port)

Redundancy link
Serial RJ11
(front port)

S-series simplex terminal block specifications

8-Channel Terminal Block specifications
Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the following S-series cards. Set the key
on the terminal block before installing a card onto the terminal block.

61
 1901 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART - set the key to A1.

• AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART - set the key to A4.
• DI 8-channel NAMUR - set the key to B1.
• DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated - set the key to B2.
• DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact - set the key to E1.
• DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side - set the key to B6
• DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated - set the key to B5.
• DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side - set the key to F1.
• Thermocouple / mV input - set the key to C1.

Specifications

Table 1-43: 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC and 60 VDC between signals that are
not connected
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-35: 8-Channel Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Front view Bottom view

62
 1902 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Related Links
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 4
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 9
DI 8-channel NAMUR card specifications on page 12
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications on page 15
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card specifications on page 17
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications on page 21
DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications on page 25
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card specifications on page 29
Thermocouple / mV input card specifications on page 43

Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the following S-series cards. Set the key
on the terminal block before installing a card onto the terminal block.

• AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART (2-wire only) - set the key to A1.

• AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART - set the key to A4.
• DI 8-channel NAMUR - set the key to B1.
• DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated - set the key to B2.
• DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact - set the key to E1.
• DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated - set the key to E4.
• DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side - set the key to F1.
• DO 8-channel120/230 VAC isolated - set the key to F4 .

Specifications

Table 1-44: Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC and 60 VDC between signals that are not connected
Maximum current 1 A per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

63
 1903 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-36: Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 4
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 9
DI 8-channel NAMUR card specifications on page 12
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications on page 15
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card specifications on page 17
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card specifications on page 15
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card specifications on page 27
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card specifications on page 29

AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART
card. Set the terminal block key to A1 before installing the card.

Specifications

Table 1-45: AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC

64
 1904 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-45: AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Maximum current 1A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-37: AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire)

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
+

2-Wire
2 5 5 11 14 17 20 23
+ –
4-Wire
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
–

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 4

AI 16-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series AI 16-channel 4-20 mA
HART card. Set the terminal block key to A2 before installing the card.

Specifications

Table 1-46: AI 16-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA

65
 1905 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-46: AI 16-Channel Terminal Block specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-38: AI 16-Channel Terminal Block

Channels
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

–
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Channels

Front view Bottom view

Table 1-47: Channel assignments

Terminal on terminal Terminal on terminal

block Channel nomenclature block Channel nomenclature
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+

66
 1906 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-47: Channel assignments (continued)

Terminal on terminal Terminal on terminal

block Channel nomenclature block Channel nomenclature
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

Related Links
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 8

Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the following S-series cards. Set the key
on the terminal block before installing a card onto the terminal block.

• DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact - set the key to B3.

• DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side - set the key to B4.
• Pulse count input - set the key to C6.
• Sequence of events - set the key to C5.

Specifications

Table 1-48: Discrete 32-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

67
 1907 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-39: Discrete 32-channel terminal block

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card specifications on page 20
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications on page 31
Pulse count input card specifications on page 36
Sequence of Events card specifications on page 40

DeviceNet Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series DeviceNet card. Set the
terminal block key to D5 before installing the card.

Specifications

Table 1-49: DeviceNet Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 32 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

68
 1908 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-40: DeviceNet Terminal Block

– +
V CL S CH V S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
DeviceNet card specifications on page 47

H1 Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series H1 card. Set the terminal
block key to D6 before installing the card.

Specifications

Table 1-50: H1 Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

69
 1909 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-41: H1 Terminal Block

Ports
1 2
+ – + –

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Fieldbus H1 card specifications on page 49

H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the simplex S-series H1 card with
Integrated Power.
• Fieldbus segments must be terminated at each end. The H1 with Integrated Power
Terminal Blocks contains an integrated terminator for each segment.

Specifications

Table 1-51: H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

70
 1910 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-42: Simplex H1 with Integrated Power terminal Block

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Interface Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series AS-Interface and
Serial cards.
• Set the terminal block key to D1 before installing the AS-Interface card and to D4
before installing the Serial card.

Specifications

Table 1-52: Interface Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 1.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

71
 1911 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-43: Interface Terminal Block

Ports
1 2

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
AS-Interface card specifications on page 45
Serial card specifications on page 56

Isolated Input Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Isolated Input card. Set the
terminal block key to C2 before installing the card.

Specifications

Table 1-53: Isolated Input Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 10 VAC/DC
Maximum current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

72
 1912 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-44: Isolated Input Terminal block

Channels
1 2 2 4

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

–
4 8 12 16

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Isolated input card specifications on page 33

Profibus DP Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Profibus DP card. Set
the terminal block key to D3 before installing the card.
• There are two terminator positions on the front of this terminal block. Terminator
OUT is the bottom position; terminator IN is the top position. The terminal block is
shipped in the IN position.
• To set a terminator position, gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push
the jumper onto a terminator position. The terminal block's location on the segment
determines if the terminator is in the IN or OUT position:
- If the terminal block is at the end of the segment, the terminator should be in the
IN position.
- If the terminal block is at the middle of the segment, the terminator should be in
the OUT position.

Note
When the terminal block is in the OUT position, the connection through the terminal
block continues to the next device on the segment.

73
 1913 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-54: Profibus DP Terminal Block specifications

Item
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-45: Profibus DP Terminal Block

Terminator in
the IN position

IN

OUT

A1 S B1 A2 S B2 CTS S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Profibus DP card specifications on page 55

RTD / Resistance Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series RTD / Resistance Input card.
Set the terminal block key to C3 before installing the card.

74
 1914 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-55: RTD / Resistance Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-46: RTD / Resistance Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

Sensor excitation

18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

Sensor +
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

Sensor –
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Circuit common

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
RTD / Resistance input card specifications on page 39

Thermocouple Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Thermocouple, mV card. Set
the terminal block key to C1 before installing the card.

75
 1915 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-56: Thermocouple Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-47: Thermocouple Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Thermocouple / mV input card specifications on page 43

76
 1916 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

S-series redundant terminal block

specifications
Redundant AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire)
specifications
Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Redundant AI 8-
channel 4-20 mA HART card. Set the terminal block key to A1 before installing the
card.
• This terminal block can be used with 2 or 4-wire transmitters or with a combination
of 2 and 4-wire transmitters.

Specifications

Table 1-57: Redundant AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4-wire) specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 200 mA
Operating temperature -40°C to 60ºC (-40ºF to 140°F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd
and the upper slot number must be the next higher even number.
For example, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid
pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid pair.

77
 1917 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-48: Redundant AI 8-Channel Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – 2-Wire

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4-
–

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 4

Redundant AO 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Redundant AO 8-channel
4-20 mA HART card. Set the terminal block key to A4 before installing the card.

Specifications

Table 1-58: Redundant AO 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 200 mA
Operating temperature -40ºC to 60ºC (-40ºF to 140ºF)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd and
the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid pairs.
Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid pair.

78
 1918 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-49: Redundant AO 8-Channel Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card specifications on page 9

Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block

specifications
Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Redundant DI 8-
channel NAMUR card and the S-series Redundant DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side
card.
• Set the terminal block key to B1 before installing the Redundant DI 8-channel
NAMUR card and to B6 before installing the Redundant DO 8-channel 24 VDC
high-side card.

Specifications

Table 1-59: Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current • 1 A per I/O channel
• 3 A per card

79
 1919 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Table 1-59: Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd and
the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid pairs.
Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid pair.

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-50: Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

Channels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
DI 8-channel NAMUR card specifications on page 12
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card specifications on page 21

Redundant H1 Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Redundant H1 card. Set the
terminal block key to D6 before installing the card.

80
 1920 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-60: Redundant H1 Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd and
the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid pairs.
Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid pair.

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-51: Redundant H1 Terminal Block

Ports
1 2 1 2
+ – + – + – + –

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Fieldbus H1 card specifications on page 49

Redundant Interface Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Redundant Serial
card. Set the terminal block key to D4 before installing the card.
• The Serial card topic includes information on the terminal assignments for this
terminal block.

81
 1921 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Specifications

Table 1-61: Redundant Interface Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 1A
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd and the
upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For example,
slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3
are not a valid pair.

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-52: Redundant Interface Terminal Block

Ports
1 2 3 4

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Serial card specifications on page 56

Redundant H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block

specifications
Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the redundant S-series H1 card
with Integrated Power.

82
 1922 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• Fieldbus segments must be terminated at each end. The redundant H1 with

Integrated Power Terminal Blocks contain an integrated terminator for each
segment.

Specifications

Table 1-62: Redundant H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd and
the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid pairs.
Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid pair.

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-53: Redundant H1 with Integrated PowerTerminal Block

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+ – + – + – + –
Port 1 Port 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Front view Bottom view

Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the S-series Redundant Profibus
DP card. Set the terminal block key to D3 before installing the card.

83
 1923 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• For simplex or redundant applications, when the terminator is in the OUT position,
pins 1 and 3 and 4 and 6 can be used. When the terminator is in the IN position, only
pins 1 and 3 can be used.

Specifications

Table 1-63: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot number must be odd and the
upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For example,
slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3
are not a valid pair.

Terminal block connections

Figure 1-54: Redundant Profibus Terminal Block

Terminator in
the IN position

IN

OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Related Links
Profibus DP card specifications on page 55

84
 1924 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

S-series mass terminal block specifications

16-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications
Installation notes

The 16-Pin Mass Terminal block provides 1:1 signal transmission of eight signals to the
external passive input/output modules. The two-row header accepts a 16-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm 2- ribbon cable (28 AWG) with 2x8 header connectors (AMP part
#746288-3, Strain Relief #499252-8). The assembly interfaces to an IDC-to-discrete-wire
module, such as the Phoenix Contact 2281034 FLKM16 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module, or other similar modules.

Terminal block connections

Table 1-64: 16-Pin Mass Terminal Block cable pin-outs

Pin on mass termination block Channel nomenclature

Pin 1 Channel 1-
Pin 2 Channel 1+
Pin 3 Channel 2-
Pin 4 Channel 2+
Pin 5 Channel 3-
Pin 6 Channel 3+
Pin 7 Channel 4-
Pin 8 Channel 4+
Pin 9 Channel 5-
Pin 10 Channel 5+
Pin 11 Channel 6-
Pin 12 Channel 6+
Pin 13 Channel 7-
Pin 14 Channel 7+
Pin 15 Channel 8-
Pin 16 Channel 8+

24-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• The 24-Pin Mass Terminal Block can be used with 4-wire Analog Input 4-20 mA and
1-5 VDC applications that are conducted over 0.093 mm 2-ribbon cable (28 AWG)
with 2x12 header connectors (AMP part # 746288-5, Strain Relief # 1-499252-0) or
round instrument cable.

85
 1925 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

• The Phoenix Contact 2301134 FLK16/24DV-AI/EZ-DR/100 24-pin to 16-pin

conversion cable can be used with 4-wire applications. The conversion cable uses
the Phoenix Contact 2281034 FLKM16 VARIOFACE ribbon connector module and
comes in one meter (three foot) and other lengths.
• The 24 VDC return for 7 V power to analog devices must be connected to the DeltaV
24 VDC return.

CAUTION!
When using a 26-pin ribbon cable, ensure that there is a slight fold in the cable at the cover
opening. The cable can be damaged if it is pinched by the cover.

Terminal block connections

Table 1-65: 24-Pin Mass Terminal Block cable pin-outs

Pin on mass termination block Channel nomenclature

Pin 1 Channel 1+
Pin 3 Common channel for Channels 1 and 2
Pin 5 Channel 2+
Pin 7 Channel 3+
Pin 9 Common channel for Channels 3 and 4
Pin 11 Channel 4+
Pin 13 Channel 5+
Pin 15 Common channel for Channels 5 and 6
Pin 17 Channel 6+
Pin 19 Channel 7+
Pin 21 Common channel for Channels 7 and 8
Pin 23 Channel 8+

40-Pin Mass Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

The 40-Pin Mass Terminal block can provide terminations for the 32-channel input and
output cards and the Sequence of Events card.

86
 1926 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

Terminal block connections

Table 1-66: 40-pin Mass Terminal Block cable pin-outs

Left hand pins Channel nomenclature Right hand pins Channel nomenclature
(1-16) J3 (17-32) J4
32-channel DI 32-channel DI
and DO SOE and DO SOE
Pin 1 Channel 1+ 1+ Pin 1 Channel 17+ 9+
Pin 2 Channel 2+ 1- Pin 2 Channel 18+ 9-
Pin 3 Channel 3+ 2+ Pin 3 Channel 19+ 10+
Pin 4 Channel 4+ 2- Pin 4 Channel 20+ 10-
Pin 5 Channel 5+ 3+ Pin 5 Channel 21+ 11+
Pin 6 Channel 6+ 3- Pin 6 Channel 22+ 11-
Pin 7 Channel 7+ 4+ Pin 7 Channel 23+ 12+
Pin 8 Channel 8+ 4- Pin 8 Channel 24+ 12-
Pin 9 Channel 9+ 5+ Pin 9 Channel 25+ 13+
Pin 10 Channel 10+ 5- Pin 10 Channel 26+ 13-
Pin 11 Channel 11+ 6+ Pin 11 Channel 27+ 14+
Pin 12 Channel 12+ 6- Pin 12 Channel 28+ 14-
Pin 13 Channel 13+ 7+ Pin 13 Channel 29+ 15+
Pin 14 Channel 14+ 7- Pin 14 Channel 30+ 15-
Pin 15 Channel 15+ 8+ Pin 15 Channel 31+ 16+
Pin 16 Channel 16+ 8- Pin 16 Channel 32+ 16-
Pin 17 no connection no connection Pin 17 no connection no connection
Pin 18 return N/A Pin 18 return N/A
Pin 19 no connection no connection Pin 19 no connection no connection
Pin 20 return N/A Pin 20 return N/A

Related Links
Guidelines for using the 40-pin mass termination block with 32-channel DO and DI cards on
page 87
Guidelines for using the 40-pin mass termination block with the Sequence of Events card on
page 88

Guidelines for using the 40-pin mass termination block with

32-channel DO and DI cards
The 40-pin mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels
into two 16-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm 2-ribbon cable (28 AWG) with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part

87
 1927 of 2474

S-series I/O interface specifications

#746288-3, Strain Relief #499252-10). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-

discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module. To connect to the 20-pin connection:

• Connect a 20-pin to 2x14-pin configuration cable to all 8-channel digital input and
output modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse, feed-
through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).
• Connect a 20-pin 1-for-1 cable to 16-channel modules. These modules include feed-
through, fuse, relay, (SSR and EMR) and relay modules with fuses on the relay
contact commons.

Guidelines for using the 40-pin mass termination block with

the Sequence of Events card
The 40-pin mass termination block has two 20-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels
into two 8-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm 2-ribbon cable ((28 AWG) with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part
#746288-3, Strain Relief #499252-10). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-
discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module. To connect to the 20-pin connection:

• Connect a 20-pin to 14-pin configuration cable to all 8-channel digital input

modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse, feed-
through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).

88
 1928 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

2 S-series carrier specifications

Topics covered in this chapter:
• Power/Controller Carrier specifications
• Left and Right Extender specifications
• 8-Wide I/O Carrier specifications
• DeltaV SIS Adapter specifications

Power/Controller Carrier specifications

Installation notes

• The Power / Controller Carrier installs on T-type DIN rails.

• The Power / Controller Carrier can be used as a carrier for an S-series controller and
S-series System Power Supply (24 VDC) or as a carrier for S-series System Power
Supplies only. It also holds the VIM card.
• When the Power / Controller Carrier holds a controller and System Power Supply (24
VDC), install the controller in the right slot of the carrier and the power supply in the
left slot of the carrier.
• When the Power / Controller Carrier holds 24 VDC system power supplies to extend
power, it can be installed:
- between two 8-Wide I/O Carriers by sliding together the connectors on the sides
of the carriers. Remove the jumper as shown in the image that follows the table.
This configuration is used when the cards that require additional power are on
the same DIN rail.
- between a Left Carrier Extender and an 8-Wide I/O Carrier by sliding together the
pins on the sides of the carriers. Remove the jumper as shown in the image that
follows the table. This configuration is used when the cards that require
additional power are on another DIN rail.
- anywhere on the DIN rail with a wired connection to the input terminal block on
a Left Carrier Extender. Connect B and the adjacent minus connector to the Left
Extender plus and minus. Remove the jumper on the terminal block on the Left
Carrier Extender. This configuration is used when the cards that require
additional power are remotely installed from the power source.
• When the Power / Controller Carrier holds a controller and power supply, it must be
installed to the left of an 8-Wide I/O Carrier. A controller cannot be installed on the
Power / Controller Carrier when the carrier is installed between two 8-Wide I/O
Carriers.
• For DC power input, connect the plus and minus terminals only, as shown in the
image that follows the table.
• Always remove input power to the Power/Controller Carrier before installing or
removing a power supply from the carrier.

89
 1929 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

• The Power / Controller Carrier connects to adjacent carriers to form the LocalBus.

Specifications

Table 2-1: Power / Controller Carrier specifications

Item Specification
Capacity One System Power Supply (24 VDC) and S-series controller or
two system power supplies.
Maximum current 15 A

90
 1930 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 2-1: Front and side views of the Power / Controller Carrier
Front view

Primary DC power
DC power input for optional
input See note second power supply

Side view A B
– + G– –G – +

Removal
screw

22.9 cm
(9.01 in.)

Carrier
connector
Carrier
connector

6.5 cm 9.0 cm
(2.56 in.) (3.54 in.)
10.3 cm
(4.05 in.)

Note: Connect to DC common ground, to DeltaV reference ground, and then to protective earth. Refer to
the Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual for more information on
grounding control systems.

91
 1931 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

Power connectors

Figure 2-2: Power connections on the Power / Controller Carrier

Remove jumper when
Power/Controller Carrier is used
for power injection and installed
between other carriers

To Left Extender when Power/

See note Controller Carrier is installed
separately on the DIN rail

Connect for DC DC power input for optional

power input second power supply

A B
– + G – – G – +

– + A B – +

Note: Connect to DC common ground, to DeltaV reference ground, and then to protective earth. Refer to
the Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual for more information on
grounding control systems.

Related Links
System Power Supply (24 VDC) specifications on page 156
SD Plus and SX Controller specifications on page 177
Left and Right Extender specifications on page 92

Left and Right Extender specifications

Installation notes

• The Left and Right Extenders install on T-type DIN rails and are used to extend
LocalBus power between I/O carriers on different DIN rails.
• The Left Extender connects to the left side of an 8-Wide I/O Carrier and the Right
Extender connects to the right side of an 8-Wide I/O Carrier.
• Connect an extender to an 8-Wide I/O Carrier by sliding together the 96-pin
connector on the side of the extender and the 96-pin connector on the side of the 8-
Wide I/O Carrier.

92
 1932 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

• Typically, one D-shell cable is used to make the connection between the extenders;
however, two cables can also be used. Connect A to A for single cables and A to A
and B to B for dual cables.
• The Left Extender has a three position terminal block for system power input when
system power is extended from a power supply installed on another DIN rail.
• The 8-Wide I/O Carriers must be left-aligned on the DIN rails when extenders are
used.
• The LocalBus, including all cabling, cannot exceed 6.5 meters (21.3 feet). Three
cable lengths are available for use with the extenders:
- 0.78 meters (2.58 feet)
- 1.44 meters (4.75 feet)
- 1.95 meters (6.41 feet)

Dimensions and connectors

Figure 2-3: Left and Right Extenders

Left Extender Right Extender

Side view Front view Side view Front view

–++

For power
injection

A A
B B

Removal Removal
screw screw
22.9 cm
(9.01 in.)

Carrier
Carrier connector
connector

5.1 cm 5.1 cm 5.1 cm 4.0 cm

(2.00 in.) (2.00 in.) (2.00 in.) (1.58 in.)
4.9 cm 4.4 cm
(1.93 in.) (1.73 in.)

Related Links
8-Wide I/O Carrier specifications on page 94

93
 1933 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

Power/Controller Carrier specifications on page 89

8-Wide I/O Carrier specifications

Installation notes

• The 8-Wide I/O Carrier installs on T-type DIN rails.

• Terminals on each end of the carrier provide separate field power for the odd and
even numbered cards. When redundant cards are installed, the primary cards are
powered from the left side connection and the secondary cards from the right side
connection.
• Each card can be connected to the internal 24 VDC power bus through the fused
plug installed in the socket above the card. To provide individually wired field power
to each card, remove the fused plug and insert a terminal plug in its place. This is
required for 120/230 VAC discrete cards.
• A shield ground bar to isolate and drain field noise away from the DeltaV system is
integrated into the bottom of the carrier. The shield ground bar connection extends
through the 8-Wide Carriers connected together on a single DIN rail. Connect only
one ground wire for each group of 8-Wide Carriers on a DIN rail.
• For large systems in which 8-Wide I/O Carriers are installed on separate DIN rails, use
the Left and Right Extenders to extend LocalBus and system power to carriers on
those DIN rails.
• The 8-Wide I/O Carrier connects to adjacent carriers to form the LocalBus. Up to
eight, 8-Wide Carriers can be connected together, along with the Power / Controller
Carrier to form the LocalBus.

Specifications

Table 2-2: 8-Wide I/O Carrier specifications

Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks
Maximum current • LocalBus (12 VDC power to cards): 15 A.
• Field power per card: 3 A
• Internally bussed field power: 12 A (3 A per
card maximum)
LocalBus cable lengths • 0.78 meters (2.58 feet)
• 1.44 meters (4.75 feet)
• 1.95 meters (6.41 feet)
Maximum LocalBus cable length 6.5 meters
(21.3 feet)

94
 1934 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 2-4: 8-Wide I/O Carrier

Side view Front view

– + – +
– + – +

11.4 cm Removal
(4.48 in.) screws

22.9 cm
(9.01 in.) Carrier
connector
Carrier
connector

Shield
ground bar

6.5 cm 34.8 cm
(2.56 in.) (13.70 in.)
36.1 cm
(14.20 in.)

95
 1935 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

Power connectors

Figure 2-5: Power connectors on the 8-Wide I/O Carrier

24 VDC 24 VDC
power source power source
– + – +

Fuse Fuse

Fused plugs for internally Terminal plugs for

bussed 24 VDC power AC and 24 VDC power
to individual cards. to individual cards

Field power for – + – +

Field power for
cards in slots 1, 3, 5, 7 – + – + cards in slots 2, 4, 6, 8

Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Shield ground bar

Related Links
Left and Right Extender specifications on page 92
Power/Controller Carrier specifications on page 89

DeltaV SIS Adapter specifications

Installation notes

The DeltaV SIS Adapter allows S-series controllers to recognize Logic Solvers installed on
M-series I/O carriers. S-series controllers do not recognize M-series I/O.

• The DeltaV SIS adapter installs on T-type DIN rails.

96
 1936 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

• The DeltaV SIS adapter can connect between an S-series Power / Controller carrier or
an S-series 8-Wide I/O Carrier and an M-series 8-wide I/O interface carrier
(KJ4001X1-BB1) on the same DIN rail to support Logic Solvers installed on the 8-
wide I/O interface carrier (KJ4001X1-BB1). Connect the SIS adapter to the carrier by
sliding together the pins on the sides of the extenders and carriers.
• If left and right extenders are used to extend power from an 8-Wide I/O carrier on
one DIN rail to an 8-wide I/O interface carrier (KJ4001X1-BB1) holding Logic Solvers
on another DIN rail, the DeltaV SIS Adapter connects between the left extender and
the 8-wide I/O interface carrier (KJ4001X1-BB1). Connect the adapter to the carrier
by sliding together the pins on the sides of the extenders and carriers.

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 2-6: SIS Adapter

Left View Front View Right View

22.89 cm
9.01 in
Connect to Connect to
S-series M-series
carrier carrier with
SLS

5.07 cm 4.52 cm
1.99 in 1.78 in

4.95 cm
1.99 in

97
 1937 of 2474

S-series carrier specifications

98
 1938 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

3 WirelessHART I/O
Topics covered in this chapter:
• WirelessHART I/O overview
• WirelessHART I/O Card specifications
• WirelessHART I/O Carrier specifications
• WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block (redundant) specifications
• Smart Wireless Field Link specifications

WirelessHART I/O overview

WirelessHART I/O provides redundant hardware, redundant power, and redundant
communications for wireless networks. WirelessHART I/O consists of:

WirelessHART I/O Cards I/O cards that can support up to 100 wireless field devices.
(WIOC)
WirelessHART I/O Carrier A DIN rail mounted carrier that holds WirelessHART I/O
Cards and terminal blocks and provides redundant 24 VDC
power to the WirelessHART I/O Cards.
Redundant WirelessHART Terminal blocks that provide wiring terminations for
I/O Terminal Blocks redundant WirelessHART I/O cards.

WirelessHART I/O Card specifications

Installation notes

• The WirelessHART I/O Card (WIOC) installs on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier. The
WIOC support redundancy.
• WIOCs require the WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block for terminations for wiring to
Smart Wireless Field Links.
• WIOCs receive redundant 24 VDC power and condition it to power the Smart
Wireless Field Link through the terminal block on the Wireless I/O Carrier.
• Redundant WIOCs connect to the control network through primary and secondary
ethernet connections on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier.
• Ethernet cascade ports on the WIOC Carrier allow up to 16 WIOCs to be connected
together without wiring back to a central switch.
• The WIOC communicates with the DeltaV controller through the Wireless I/O
Carrier.

99
 1939 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

Specifications

Table 3-1: WirelessHART I/O Card specifications

Item Specification
Input power per WirelessHART I/O card +24 VDC ± 10% at 400 mA maximum
Output power to the Smart Wireless Field Link +24 VDC at 100 mA maximum
through the Wireless I/O carrier
Ethernet connection through the Wireless I/O Redundant (primary and secondary) 10/
carrier 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX ports capable of
full-duplex operation.
HART scan time 8 seconds for 100 devices
Isolation None. The WIOC is referenced to the incoming
24 VDC return.
Mounting One or two slots on the Wireless I/O Carrier.

Front and side view and dimensions

Figure 3-1: WirelessHART I/O card

Side view Front view

16.0 cm
(6.30 in.)

13.7 cm 4.2 cm
(5.39 in.) (1.64 in.)

Related Links
WirelessHART I/O Carrier specifications on page 101
WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block (redundant) specifications on page 103
Smart Wireless Field Link specifications on page 104

100
 1940 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

WirelessHART I/O Carrier specifications

Installation notes

• The WirelessHART I/O Carrier installs on horizontal T-type DIN rails.

• WirelessHART I/O Cards (WIOC) plug into the slots on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier.
• WirelessHART I/O Terminal Blocks install on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier for
terminations for wiring to Smart Wireless Field Links.
• The WirelessHART I/O Carrier provides redundant 24 VDC power for the WIOC.
• Redundant WIOCs connect to the control network through primary and secondary
ethernet connections on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier.
• Ethernet cascade ports (primary and secondary) on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier
allow up to 16 WIOCs to be connected together without wiring back to a central
switch. Refer to the second image in this topic for the location of the connectors on
the carrier.

Specifications

Table 3-2: WirelessHART I/O carrier specifications

Item Specification
Capacity One or two redundant WirelessHART I/O cards
Input power (redundant) +24 VDC ±10% at 4 A maximum
Redundant Ethernet connections Copper twisted pair: 10/100BASE-TX with RJ45 connectors;
(primary and secondary) full duplex operation

101
 1941 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 3-2: WirelessHART I/O Carrier

Side view Front view

19.3 cm
(7.59 in.)

7.1 cm 12.5 cm
(2.81 in.) (4.91 in.)

102
 1942 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

Connectors

Figure 3-3: Connectors on the WirelessHART I/O Carrier

Primary See note
24 VDC

See note Secondary

24 VDC

Push to remove Push to remove

pri I/O port sec I/O port
– + – +

Port 1 Port 1
Pri control Sec control
Pri network network Sec
I/O I/O
port Port 2 Port 2 port
cascade cascade
port port

Shield ground bar

Note: Connect to DC common ground, to DeltaV reference ground, and then to protective earth. Refer to
the Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual for more information on
grounding control systems.

WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block (redundant)

specifications
Installation notes

This terminal block is used to terminate wiring for the redundant WirelessHART I/O card.
The redundant WirelessHART I/O card connects to a redundant Smart Wireless Field Link.

103
 1943 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

Specifications

Table 3-3: WirelessHART I/O terminal block (redundant) specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating +30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of WirelessHART I/O Carrier

Terminal block connections

Figure 3-4: Redundant WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block

Primary WIOC Secondary WIOC

Return Data +
+24 VDC Data –
Data – +24 VDC
Data + Return

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Front view Bottom view

Smart Wireless Field Link specifications

Installation notes

• Install the Smart Wireless Field Link in or near the process unit and connect it to a
WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block.
• The Smart Wireless Field Link:
- receives power from the WirelessHART I/O Card through the WirelessHART I/O
Terminal Block and communicates with the WirelessHART I/O Card through an
RS485 shielded twisted pair connection.
- communicates with wireless field devices through the WirelessHART protocol.
- supports redundancy.

104
 1944 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

• The Smart Wireless Field Link's antenna can rotate 90º as shown in the image.

Table 3-4: Smart Wireless Field Link specifications

Item Specification
Input power 10.5 to 30 VDC
Wiring to WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block Dual, shielded twisted pair
Wiring distance between Smart Wireless Field 200 meters ( 656 feet)
Link and WirelessHART I/O Card
Wireless protocol WirelessHART, 2.4 to 2.5 GHz DSSS
Wireless output power (EIRP) 10 dBm (10 mW)
Mounting 2 inch pipe and panel mount bracket (SST)

Views and dimensions

Figure 3-5: Smart Wireless Field Link

2.4 GHz Antenna

9.0 cm
(3.55 in.)
90°

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

10.6 cm 13.2 cm
(4.20 in.) (5.21 in.)

Front view Side view

105
 1945 of 2474

WirelessHART I/O

Figure 3-6: Terminal block view

Data A (+) Return

+24 VDC

Data B (–)

Related Links
WirelessHART I/O Card specifications on page 99
WirelessHART I/O Carrier specifications on page 101
WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block (redundant) specifications on page 103

106
 1946 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

4 CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Topics covered in this chapter:
• CHARMs I/O overview
• CHARM I/O Card specifications
• CHARM I/O Carrier specifications
• CHARM Baseplate specifications
• Address Plug
• CHARM Column Terminator specifications
• CHARM Column Extenders and cable
• CHARM Terminal Block specifications
• CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications
• CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block specifications
• CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block specifications
• CHARM Address Terminal specifications
• Analog Input CHARMs specifications
• Analog Output CHARMs specifications
• Discrete Input CHARMs specifications
• Discrete Output CHARMs specifications
• RTD Input CHARMs
• Thermocouple Input CHARMS
• Voltage CHARMs

CHARMs I/O overview

CHARMs I/O consists of:

CHARM I/O Simplex or redundant cards that process CHARMs I/O signals to and
Cards (CIOC) from the controller. A CIOC can support up to 96 CHARMs. The
maximum number of CHARMs (96) are organized in eight banks of 12
CHARMs. Each bank of 12 CHARMs is held by a CHARM Baseplate.
CHARM I/O The DIN rail-mounted carrier that holds simplex or redundant CIOCs.
Carriers The CHARM I/O Carriers provide redundant 24 VDC power to the CIOC
and bussed power to the field circuits. Ethernet cascade ports (primary
and secondary) on the CIOC allow up to 16 CIOCs to be connected
together without wiring back to a central switch.
CHARMs Single channel I/O cards that plug into CHARM Terminal Blocks on a
CHARM Baseplate. The DeltaV system supports analog input and
output CHARMs, discrete input and output CHARMs, and RTD and
Thermocouple input CHARMs.

107
 1947 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

CHARM Provide the keying and field wiring for the CHARMs. There are several
terminal blocks types of CHARM terminal blocks: CHARM Terminal Block, CHARM
Fused Injected Power Terminal Block, CHARM Injected Power Terminal
Block, and CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block.
CHARM The DIN rail-mounted vertical carrier that holds a bank of 12 CHARMs
Baseplates and CHARM Terminals and an Address Plug and Address Plug Terminal.
Address terminals installed on the baseplates have connectors for
injecting field power.
Address Plugs Determine the address of the CHARM Baseplates and the CHARMs
installed on the baseplate. An Address Plug plugs into a CHARM
Address Terminal on the CHARM baseplate.
Column Attaches to the DIN rail and the last CHARM baseplate to terminate the
Terminator redundant busses.
DIN Rail Stop Vibration may cause the baseplates to slip down on the DIN rail. The
DIN Rail Stop installs after the last baseplate to keep the hardware in
place on the DIN Rail.
CHARM When CHARM Baseplates in a 96 CHARM system are installed on
Column multiple DIN rails, CHARM Column Extenders and cables are used to
Extenders and extend redundant power and communication busses to the
cables baseplates. The bottom column extender can be connected to CIOC
carriers or to baseplates depending upon the physical location of the
carrier and the baseplate. The top column extender can be connected
to baseplates only. CHARM Column Extenders are not shown in the
following image.

The DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Installation manual explains how to install
CHARMs hardware.

108
 1948 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Figure 4-1: CHARMs I/O

CHARMs I/O
Carrier

CHARM
I/O Cards
CHARM
Baseplate 1

Address CHARMs
Plug 1 1

CHARM
Terminal
Block

CHARM
Baseplate 8

Address CHARMs
Plug 8 8

CHARM
Terminal
Block
Column
Terminator

DIN rail stop

109
 1949 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

CHARM I/O Card specifications

Installation notes

• The CHARM I/O Card (CIOC) installs on the CHARM I/O Carrier.
• The CHARM I/O Card receives redundant 24 VDC power and generates 6.3 VDC
system power for the CHARMs through the CHARM I/O Carrier.
• Ethernet cascade ports (primary and secondary) on the CHARM I/O Carrier allow up
to 16 CIOCs to be connected together without wiring back to a central switch.
• The CHARM I/O Card communicates with the DeltaV controller through the CHARM
I/O Carrier.
• The CHARM I/O Card supports redundancy.

Specifications

Table 4-1: CHARM I/O card specifications

Item Specification
Input power requirement through the CHARM I/ 0.28 A maximum per redundant CIOC node
O Carrier (CHARM power requirements are additional)
Output power to CHARMs through the CHARM 3.25 A maximum at 6.3 VDC
I/O Carrier
Ethernet connection through the carrier Redundant (primary and secondary) 10/
100BASE-TX ports capable of full-duplex opera-
tion.
CIOC heat dissipation 6.68 W per redundant CIOC node (2 W per
CIOC; 1.34 per each communication module)
Isolation None. The CIOC is referenced to the incoming
24 VDC return.
Mounting One or two slots on the CHARM I/O Carrier.

110
 1950 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Images

Figure 4-2: Front and side views and dimensions

Side view Front view

13.3 cm
(5.22 in.)

13.3 cm 3.5 cm
(5.24 in.) (1.38 in.)

Figure 4-3: CHARM I/O Cards on the CHARMs I/O Carrier

CHARMS I/O
Carrier

CHARM
I/O Cards

Related Links
CHARM I/O Carrier specifications on page 112

111
 1951 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

CHARM I/O Carrier specifications

Installation notes

• The CHARM I/O Carrier installs on vertical T-type DIN rails.

• Simplex or redundant CHARM I/O Cards (CIOCs) plug into the slots on the
CHARM I/O Carrier.
• The CHARM I/O Carrier provides redundant 24 VDC power for the CIOC and bussed
power for the field circuits. Refer to the second image in this topic.
• Ethernet cascade ports (primary and secondary) on the CHARM I/O Carrier allow up
to 16 CIOCs to be connected together without wiring back to a central switch. Refer
to the second image in this topic.
• The I/O ports on the CHARM I/O Carrier are removeable. To remove an I/O port,
depress the button next to the I/O port and pull the I/O port out of the carrier. Refer
to the second image in this topic.

Specifications

Table 4-2: CHARM I/O Carrier specifications

Item Specification
Capacity One or two redundant CHARM I/O cards
Input power (redundant) +24 VDC ±10% at 12 A maximum
Output power to CHARMS +6.3 VDC at 3.25 A
Redundant Ethernet connections (primary and • Fiber-optic: 100BASE-FX with MTRJ connec-
secondary) tors; full duplex operation; 2 km nominal
distance.
• Copper twisted pair: 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connectors; full duplex operation.
Fiber-optic link budget • Multimode 62.5/125 µm: max attenuation
11 dB
• Multimode 50/125 µm: max attenuation 8
dB wavelength 1300 nm

112
 1952 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-4: CHARM I/O Carrier

Side view Front view

19.3 cm
(7.59 in.)

Connector

7.1 cm 12.5 cm
(2.81 in.) (4.91 in.)

113
 1953 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Connectors

Figure 4-5: Connectors on the CHARM I/O Carrier

Primary See note
24 VDC

See note Secondary

24 VDC

Push to remove Push to remove

pri I/O port sec I/O port
– + – +

Port 1 Port 1
Pri control Sec control
Pri network network Sec
I/O I/O
port Port 2 Port 2 port
cascade cascade
port port

Note: Connect to DC common ground, to DeltaV reference ground, and then to protective earth. Refer to
the Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual for more information on
grounding control systems.

Related Links
CHARM I/O Card specifications on page 110

CHARM Baseplate specifications

Installation notes

• The CHARM Baseplates install directly onto a vertical T-type DIN rail. CHARM
Baseplates connect to the CHARMs I/O carrier and to other CHARM Baseplates
through connectors on the baseplates.
• Each CHARM Baseplate holds one Address plug and up to 12 CHARM terminal blocks
holding CHARMs.
• Connect the CHARM Baseplate with Address Plug 1 to the CHARMs I/O carrier as
shown in Figure 4-7.

114
 1954 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

• Install CHARM Baseplates in sequential order under the CHARM I/O carrier based on
the Address Plug installed on the baseplate. Connect the baseplates together to
form the power and communications bus for CHARMs.
• Up to eight CHARM Baseplates can be installed under one CHARM I/O carrier.
• Any mix of CHARM terminals can be installed on a CHARM Baseplate; however, if
CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Blocks or CHARM Injected Power Terminal
Blocks are installed on a CHARM Baseplate they must all be of the same voltage.

Specifications

Table 4-3: CHARM Baseplate specifications

Item Specification
Total CHARM Bus power +6.3 VDC at ±3% at 4 A maximum
Total +24 VDC power +24 VDC ± 10% at 10 A maximum
Total bussed power 250 VAC maximum at 10 A maximum
Bussed power per CHARM slot 250 VAC maximum at 2 A maximum
Capacity • 12 CHARMs (maximum) installed in CHARM
terminal blocks.
• One address plug (1-8) installed in a CHARM
address terminal.

115
 1955 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Images

Figure 4-6: CHARM Baseplate

Side view Front view

Connector

Address
plug

19.5 cm
(7.68 in.) CHARM
terminal
blocks

Connector

4.7 cm Baseplate only 12.5 cm

(1.86 in.) (4.91 in.)

8.3 cm Baseplate and

(3.29 in.) terminal blocks

116
 1956 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Figure 4-7: Connected CHARM Baseplates

CIOC Carrier

CHARM
Baseplate 1

Address
Plug 1 1

CHARM
Baseplate 2

Address
Plug 2 2

NOTE: Up to 8
baseplates can
be installed under
each CIOC pair.

Related Links
CHARM I/O Carrier specifications on page 112
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block specifications on page 124
Address Plug on page 118

117
 1957 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Address Plug
Installation notes

• The Address Plug (1-8) installs in the CHARM Address Terminal in the dedicated slot
on the CHARM Baseplate.
• Install Address Plug 1 on the first CHARM Baseplate, Address Plug 2 on the second
CHARM Baseplate, Address Plug 3 on the third CHARM Baseplate, and so on.

Specifications

Item Specification
Input power +6.3 VDC ±3% at 2 mA maximum

Views and dimensions

Figure 4-8: Address Plug

Front view

1.2 cm
(0.48 in.)

Side view Bottom view

4.8 cm
(1.89 in.)

4.79cm
(1.88 in.)

Related Links
CHARM Address Terminal specifications on page 126
CHARM Baseplate specifications on page 114

118
 1958 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

CHARM Column Terminator specifications

Installation notes

The column terminator terminates the redundant bus and provides terminals for
connecting the baseplates to shield ground. Install it after the last CHARM Baseplate on
the DIN rail.

Specifications

Table 4-4: Column terminator specifications

Item Specifications
Number of connections 2 (shield drain wire)

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-9: CHARM Column Terminator

Side view Front view

3.5 cm
(1.39 in.)
Connector

4.7 cm 12.5 cm
(1.86 in.) (4.91 in.)

CHARM Column Extenders and cable

Installation notes

• The CHARM Column Extenders are used to extend the power and communications
busses when CHARM Baseplates in a 96 CHARM system are installed on multiple DIN
rails.
• The bottom column extender can be connected to a CIOC carrier or to a baseplate
depending upon the physical location of the carrier and the baseplate. For example,
if the CIOC carrier only is installed on a DIN rail and the baseplates are installed on
another DIN rail, the bottom column extender would be connected to the CIOC
carrier and either another bottom extender or top extender could be connected to a
baseplate on the other DIN rail. Refer to the second image in this topic.
• The top column extender can be connected to baseplates only.
• To connect the cables between the extenders, connect primary to primary and
secondary to secondary.
• Three cable lengths are available for use with the extenders:
- 0.5 meters (1.64 feet)

119
 1959 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

- 1.0 meters (3.28 feet)

- 2.0 meters (6.56 feet)

Dimensions and connectors

Figure 4-10: CHARM Column Extenders

Bottom CHARM Extender Top CHARM Extender

4.72 cm 4.72 cm Top view

1.85 (in.) 1.85 (in.)

Removal Carrier Removal Carrier

screw connector screw connector

2.87 cm Front view

3.51 cm 1.12 (in.)
1.38 (in.)

A B A B
12.48 cm 12.48 cm
4.91 (in.) 4.91 (in.)

120
 1960 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Example

Figure 4-11: Example installations using CHARM Column Extenders

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Address Top
Plug 1 CHARM
Column
Extender

CHARM Address
Plug 1 CIOC
Baseplate 1
Carrier

CIOC CIOC
Carrier Carrier CHARM
Address Baseplate 1
Plug 2 Address Address
Plug 1 Plug 3
Bottom
CHARM
Column Address CHARM CHARM
CHARM
Extender Plug 2 Baseplate 1 Baseplate 3
Baseplate 2

Bottom CHARM
CHARM Baseplate 2 Address Address
1
Column Plug 2 Plug 4
Extenders

CHARM CHARM
Baseplate 2 Baseplate 4

Bottom
CHARM
Column
Extenders

CHARM Terminal Block specifications

Installation notes

• The CHARM Terminal Blocks are preinstalled on the CHARM Baseplate. Each
terminal block holds a single CHARM and provides the keying and field wiring for the
CHARM.
• The CHARM Terminal Block's keying mechanism sets itself to match the inserted
CHARM.
• To reset the keying mechanism, remove the CHARM Terminal Block from the
CHARM Baseplate, turn the terminal block over, and push the two keying posts to
return the posts to the neutral position. When the posts are in the neutral position,
the terminal block can receive a different CHARM type.
• All CHARM types can use the CHARM Terminal Block.

Specifications

Table 4-5: CHARM terminal block specifications

Item Specification
Number of connections 4

121
 1961 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-5: CHARM terminal block specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Power rating 250 VAC maximum at 2 A maximum

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-12: CHARM Terminal Block

Front view

1.2 cm
(0.48 in.)

Side view Bottom view

Terminal 2 Terminal 1

5.3 cm
(2.09 in.)
Terminal 4 Terminal 3

10.2 cm
(4.03 in.)

Related Links
CHARM Baseplate specifications on page 114

CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block

specifications
Installation notes

• The CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block installs on the CHARM Baseplate
and holds a single CHARM. It provides the keying and field wiring for the CHARM and
bussed power connections to implement high-side outputs and dry contact inputs
for isolated Discrete CHARMs.
• The terminal block's fuse protects the field wiring from short circuits.
• The fuse cannot be replaced when the terminal block is under power.
• The CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block's keying mechanism sets itself to
match the inserted CHARM.

122
 1962 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

• To reset the keying mechanism, remove the CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal
Block from the CHARM Baseplate, turn the terminal block over, and push the two
keying posts to return the posts to the neutral position. When the posts are in the
neutral position, the terminal block can receive a different CHARM type.
• The following CHARMs can use the CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block:
- DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM
- DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM
- DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM
- DO 24 VDC Isolated CHARM
- DO VAC isolated CHARM

Specifications

Table 4-6: CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Number of connections 2
Power rating 250 VAC maximum at 1 A maximum

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-13: CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block

Front view

1.2 cm
(0.48 in.)

Fuse

Side view Bottom view

Terminal 2

5.3 cm
(2.09 in.)
Terminal 4

10.2 cm
(4.03 in.)

123
 1963 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block

specifications
Installation notes

• The CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block installs on the CHARM Baseplate and
holds a single CHARM. It provides the keying and field wiring for the CHARMs and
bussed power connections to implement high-side outputs and dry contact inputs
for isolated Discrete CHARMs.
• The CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block's keying mechanism sets itself to match
the inserted CHARM.
• To reset the keying mechanism, remove the CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block
from the CHARM Baseplate, turn the terminal block over, and push the two keying
posts to return the posts to the neutral position. When the posts are in the neutral
position, the terminal block can receive a different CHARM type.
• The following CHARMs can use the CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block:
- DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM
- DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM
- DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM
- DO 24 VDC Isolated CHARM
- DO VAC isolated CHARM

Specifications

Table 4-7: CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Number of connections 2
Power rating 250 VAC maximum at 2 A maximum

124
 1964 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-14: CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block

Front view

1.2 cm
(0.48 in.)

Side view Bottom view

Terminal 2

5.3 cm
(2.09 in.)
Terminal 4

10.2 cm
(4.03 in.)

Related Links
CHARM Baseplate specifications on page 114

CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block

specifications
Installation notes

• The CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block is used in high output current applications.
It uses a 1 Form C relay.
• The terminal block requires the DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM to drive the relay coil.
• The terminal block's keying mechanism sets itself to match the inserted CHARM.

Specifications

Table 4-8: CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Number of connections 3 (normally open contact, normally closed con-
tact, common contact)

125
 1965 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-8: CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Relay contact ratings • 28.8 VDC at 5 A switching current
• 48 VDC at 0.4 A switching current
• 250 VAC at 5 A switching current

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-15: CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block

Front view

1.2 cm
(0.48 in.)

Side view Bottom view

Terminal 2 Terminal 1
(common (normally open
contact) contact)
5.3 cm
(2.09 in.)
Terminal 4
(normally closed
1 2 4 contact)

10.2 cm
(4.03 in.)

CHARM Address Terminal specifications

Installation notes

• The CHARM Address Terminal is preinstalled in the dedicated slot on the CHARM
Baseplate and holds one Address Plug (1-8).
• The CHARM Address Terminal's keying mechanism sets itself to match the inserted
Address Plug (1-8).
• To reset the keying mechanism, remove the Address Plug (1-8) from the CHARM
Baseplate, remove the Address Terminal, and reset the keying mechanism.
• Four screw terminals on the CHARM Address Terminal provide field power to
isolated CHARMs.

126
 1966 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Specifications

Table 4-9: CHARM Address Terminal specifications

Item Specification
Number of connections 2 sets of 2 connections
Power rating 250 VAC maximum at 10 A maximum

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 4-16: CHARM Address Terminal

Front view

1.2 cm
(0.48 in.)

Side view Bottom view

5.3 cm
(2.09 in.) Terminal 2 Terminal 1

10.2 cm
(4.03 in.)

Related Links
Address Plug on page 118
CHARM Baseplate specifications on page 114

Analog Input CHARMs specifications

AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• This CHARM supports 2 and 4-wire devices.

127
 1967 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Specifications

Table 4-10: AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type and functionality Analog input:
• 4-20 mA
• 0-20 mA
• 4-20 mA with HART
Nominal signal range (span) • 4-20 mA
• 0-20 mA optional
Full signal range 0-24 mA
Input impedance 250 Ω ±1%
2-wire transmitter power 15.0 V minimum at 20 mA with 24 VDC input
power.
Accuracy over temperature range • 0.1% of span (0 to 60° C)
• 0.25% of span (-40-70° C)
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution 16-bit
Calibration None required
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 36
mA maximum for 2-wire configurations and 12
mA maximum for 4-wire configurations:
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 25
mA maximum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.33 W
HART scan time 500 ms
HART Communications • HART pass-through request/response
• HART variable report
• Field device status report

128
 1968 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-17: AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM wiring diagram for 2-wire applications

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block
+24V
1 3
Current
Limiting
Circuitry
+
T
2 4 –
A/D Conversion 2-wire analog
and HART and/or HART
250 Ω transmitter
Interface

Shield

Figure 4-18: AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM wiring diagram for 4-wire applications

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block
+24V
1 3
Current
Limiting
Circuitry
+
T
2 4 –
A/D Conversion
and HART
Interface
250 Ω 4-wire analog
and/or HART
self-powered
transmitter
Shield

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

Analog Output CHARMs specifications

AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

129
 1969 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Specifications

Table 4-11: AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type and functionality Analog output:
• 4-20 mA
• 0-20 mA
• 4-20 mA with HART
Nominal signal range (span) • 4-20 mA
• 0-20 mA optional
Full signal range 0-24 mA
Accuracy over temperature range • 0.25% of span (0 to 60° C)
• 0.5% of span (-40-70° C)
Resolution 16-bit
Calibration None required
Compliance voltage • Voltage to load: 15 V minimum at 20 mA
• Load resistance: 750 Ω maximum
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 42
mA maximum:
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 30
mA maximum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.48 W
HART scan time 500 ms
HART Communications • HART pass-through request/response
• HART variable report
• Field device status report

130
 1970 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-19: AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3
Current
Sourcing
Output
+
Valve

HART
2 4 –
with or
Interface without
HART

Shield

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

Discrete Input CHARMs specifications

DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• When a CHARM Terminal Block is used, the input channel can be used as a
conventional isolated input channel.
• When a CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block or CHARM Injected Power
Terminal Block is used, the input channel can be used as a dry contact input channel.

Specifications

Table 4-12: DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete input: isolated VDC
Detection level for ON >10 VDC
Detection level for OFF < 5 VDC
Wetting current 6 mA at +24 VDC
Output impedance 4 kΩ (approximate)
Channel isolation Input is optically isolated and factory tested to
1000 VDC.

131
 1971 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-12: DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 12
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: none
CHARM heat dissipation 0.32 W

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-20: DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3

2 KΩ
Isolation
and Control +
Circuitry 2 KΩ 2 4
–

132
 1972 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Figure 4-21: DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for dry contact configuration
with CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block

CHARM CHARM Charm Fused

Baseplate Injected Power
+ – Terminal Block

2 KΩ
2A
Isolation
and Control +
Circuitry 2 KΩ 2 4
–

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications on page 122

DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM specifications

Installation notes

• When a CHARM Terminal Block is used, the input channel can be used as a
conventional isolated input channel.
• When a CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block or CHARM Injected Power
Terminal Block is used, the input channel can be used as a dry contact input channel.
• Although CHARMs can be installed in any location, it is good engineering practice to
separate low voltage DC signals from high voltage AC signals. To ensure a safe
working environment, it is recommended that you wire AC signals to a different
enclosure from DC signals.

Specifications

Table 4-13: DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete input: isolated 120 VAC
Detection level for On >84 VAC
Detection level for Off <34 VAC
Wetting current 2 mA at 120 VAC
Output impedance 60 kΩ (approximate)
Channel isolation Input channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC

133
 1973 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-13: DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage 130 VAC
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 12
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: none
CHARM heat dissipation 0.41 W

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-22: DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3
30 KΩ

Isolation
L
and Control
Circuitry N
2 4

30 KΩ

Figure 4-23: DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for dry contact
configuration with CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block

CHARM CHARM Charm Fused

Baseplate Injected Power
L N Terminal Block
+ –

30 KΩ

2A
Isolation
and Control L
Circuitry N
2 4

30 KΩ

134
 1974 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications on page 122

DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM specifications

Installation notes

• When a CHARM Terminal Block is used, the input channel can be used as a
conventional isolated input channel.
• When a CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block or CHARM Injected Power
Terminal Block is used, the input channel can be used as a dry contact input channel.
• Although CHARMs can be installed in any location, it is good engineering practice to
separate low voltage DC signals from high voltage AC signals. To ensure a safe
working environment, it is recommended that you wire AC signals to a different
enclosure from DC signals.

Specifications

Table 4-14: DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete input: isolated 230 VAC
Detection level for On >168 VAC
Detection level for Off <68 VAC
Wetting current 1 mA at 230 VAC
Input impedance 240 kΩ (approximate)
Channel isolation Input channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Maximum input voltage 250 VAC
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 12
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: none
CHARM heat dissipation 0.40 W

135
 1975 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-24: DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3
120 KΩ

Isolation
L
and Control
Circuitry N
2 4

120 KΩ

Figure 4-25: DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for dry contact
configuration with CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block

CHARM CHARM Charm Fused

Baseplate Injected Power
L N Terminal Block
+ –

120 KΩ

2A
Isolation
and Control L
Circuitry N
2 4

120 KΩ

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications on page 122

DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM

specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• This CHARM can be configured as a pulse count input channel.

136
 1976 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

• Debounce filters can be configured for this CHARM in DeltaV Explorer.

• This CHARM can sense relay/switch contact closure and supports line fault detection
for detecting open or short circuits in field wiring when external line fault resistors
are used. To use line fault detection you must:
- Enable line fault detection in the configuration.
- Connect the dry contact to a 12 kΩ resistor in parallel for open circuit detection
and a 2.4 kΩ resistor in series for short circuit detection.

Figure 4-26: External line fault resistors

+ 2.4 KΩ

12 KΩ

Specifications

Table 4-15: DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete input: +24 VDC dry contact
On/Off detection on the - (minus) signal
Detection level for On <5.3 kΩ (>2.25 mA at 24 VDC)
Detection level for Off >8.2 kΩ (<1.75 mA at 24 VDC)
Channel impedance 4.8 kΩ
Wetting voltage 22.5 VDC (±5%); current limited to 12.5 mA
nominal
Open line fault detection levels • Guaranteed short circuit: < 100 Ω
• Guaranteed good status: 400 Ω to 40 kΩ
• Guaranteed open circuit: 75 kΩ
Optional pulse count input frequency range 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz with 50 µsec minimum pulse
width
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 22
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 10
mA maximum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.33 W

137
 1977 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-27: DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block
+24 VDC
1 3
Current
Limiting
Circuitry +

Field
2 4 device
Channel
Sensing
–
Circuitry 4.8 Ω
+ 2.4 KΩ

1
12 KΩ
2 Field
device
– Option 1

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

DI NAMUR CHARM specifications

Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• This CHARM can sense relay/switch contact closure and supports NAMUR sensors
with NAMUR-specified line fault detection levels.
• This CHARM can be configured as a pulse input channel.
• Debounce filters can be configured for this CHARM in DeltaV Explorer.
• This CHARM supports line fault detection for detecting open or short circuits in field
wiring when external line fault resistors are used. To use line fault detection you
must:
- Enable line fault detection in the configuration.
- Connect the dry contact to a 12 kΩ resistor in parallel for open circuit detection
and a 2.4 kΩ resistor in series for short circuit detection.

138
 1978 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Figure 4-28: External line fault detection resistors

+ 2.4 KΩ

12 KΩ

Specifications

Table 4-16: DI NAMUR CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete input: 12 VDC, dry contact; supports
NAMUR sensors
On/Off detection on the + signal
Detection level for On >2.1 mA <4 kΩ
Detection level for Off <1.2 mA >9 kΩ
Channel impedance 1.5 kΩ
Wetting voltage 12 VDC (±5%)
Optional line fault detection levels • Guaranteed short circuit: <100 Ω
• Guaranteed good status: 400 Ω to 40 kΩ
• Guaranteed open circuit: > 75 kΩ
NAMUR sensor compatible
Optional pulse count input frequency range 0.1 Hz to 10 KHz with 50 µsec minimum pulse
width
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 28
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 16
mA maximum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.51 W

139
 1979 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-29: DI NAMUR CHARM wiring diagram

+
CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal 1
Baseplate Block
2 Field
12 V device
1 3
Channel 1.5 KΩ – Option 1
Sensing
Circuitry +
Namur
Sensor
2 4
–
+ 2.4 KΩ
1
12 KΩ
2 Field
device
– Option 2

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

Discrete Output CHARMs specifications

DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM can use the CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block and the CHARM
Terminal Block.
• This CHARM has short circuit protection and supports line monitoring for sensing
field wiring faults such as open and short circuits. Line monitoring is enabled in the
configuration.
• This CHARM can be configured for momentary output or continuous pulse output.

Specifications

Table 4-17: DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete output: 24 VDC high-side
Configuration options • Momentary output
• Continuous pulse output
• Line fault testing

140
 1980 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-17: DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM specifications (continued)

Item Specification
On-state output rating 24 VDC nominal at 100 mA
Channel power is derived from +24 VDC (± 10%)
power supplied to CHARM I/O card.
On-state current limiting, channel protection Output continuous current: short circuit protec-
ted to 200 mA typical
Off-state leakage current 1 mA maximum
Line fault detection levels • Guaranteed short circuit: <50 Ω load
• Guaranteed good status: 240 Ω to 10 kΩ
load
• Guaranteed open circuit: >20 kΩ load
Line fault test timing 200 µsec
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 116
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 5
mA maximum plus output channel current
CHARM heat dissipation 0.44 W

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-30: DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block
+24 VDC
1 3
Current
Limiting
Circuitry
+
S
2 4 –
Solenoid
Channel
Readback
Circuitry

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block specifications on page 125

141
 1981 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM specifications

Installation notes

• When a CHARM Terminal Block is used, the output channel can be used as a
conventional isolated output channel.
• When a CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block or CHARM Injected Power
Terminal Block is used, the output channel can be used as a high-side output
channel.
• This CHARM has short circuit protection.
• This CHARM can be configured for momentary output or continuous pulse output.

Specifications

Table 4-18: DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete output: either isolated output or high-
side output depending upon the terminal block
used.
Configuration options • Momentary
• Continuous pulse output
Output voltage range 4 VDC to 32 VDC
On-state output rating 1 A continuous (2 A for <100 msec)
On-state current limiting channel protection Current limited at 4 A nominal
Off-state leakage current 1 mA maximum
Channel isolation The output channel is galvanically isolated and
factory tested to 1000 VDC.
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 22
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 10
mA maximum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.46 W

142
 1982 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-31: DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM wiring diagram - CHARM terminal block

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3

Isolation
and Control +
Circuitry
2 4
–

Figure 4-32: DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for high-side configuration
with CHARM terminal block

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Block
+ +24 VDC
Baseplate Power
_ Supply
1 3

Isolation
and Controll
Circuitry
2 4

_
S
+ Solenoid

143
 1983 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Figure 4-33: DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for high-side configuration
with CHARM Fused Injected Power terminal block

CHARM CHARM Charm Fused

Baseplate Injected Power
+V –V Terminal Block

2A
Isolation
and Control +
Circuitry
2 4
–

Figure 4-34: DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for high-side configuration
with CHARM Injected Power terminal block

CHARM CHARM Charm Injected

Baseplate Power Terminal
+V -V Block

Isolation
and Control +
Circuitry
2 4
–

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications on page 122

DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM specifications

Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• This CHARM has short circuit protection and supports line monitoring for sensing
field wiring faults such as open and short circuits. Line monitoring is enabled in the
configuration.
• This CHARM can be configured for momentary output or continuous pulse output.

144
 1984 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Specifications

Table 4-19: DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Discrete output: 24 VDC high-side
Configuration options • Momentary output
• Continuous pulse output
• Line fault testing
On-state output rating 24 VDC nominal at 100 mA
Channel power is derived from +24 VDC (± 10%)
power supplied to CHARM I/O card.
On-state current limiting, channel protection Output maximum current: current limited to
107 mA nominal
Off-state leakage current 1 mA maximum
Line fault detection levels • Guaranteed short circuit: <50 Ω load
• Guaranteed good status: 240 Ω to 10 kΩ
load
• Guaranteed open circuit: >20 kΩ load
Line fault test timing 200 µsec
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 116
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ±10% at 5
mA maximum plus output channel current
CHARM heat dissipation 0.56 W

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-35: DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block
+24 VDC
1 3
Current
Limiting
Circuitry
+
S
2 4 –
Solenoid
Channel
Readback
Circuitry

145
 1985 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

DO VAC isolated CHARM specifications

Installation notes

• When a CHARM Terminal Block is used, the output channel can be used as a
conventional isolated output channel.
• When a CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block or CHARM Injected Power
Terminal Block is used, the output channel can be configured as a high-side output
channel.
• Although CHARMs can be installed in any location, it is good engineering practice to
separate low voltage DC signals from high voltage AC signals. To ensure a safe
working environment, it is recommended that you wire AC signals to a different
enclosure from DC signals.

Specifications

Table 4-20: DO VAC isolated CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type AC voltage discrete output:
• Isolated DO with CHARM Terminal Block
• High-side DO with Injected Power Terminal
Block
Output range 20 to 250 VAC
Output rating 0.5 A maximum continuous
Off-state leakage • 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC
• 4 mA maximum at 230 VAC
Channel isolation The output channel is optically isolated at 250
VAC.
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 12
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: none
CHARM heat dissipation 0.7 W

146
 1986 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-36: DO VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram - CHARM terminal block

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3

Isolation
L
and Control
Circuitry N
2 4

Figure 4-37: DO VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for high-side configuration
with CHARM Fused Injected Power terminal block

CHARM CHARM Charm Fused

Baseplate Injected Power
L N Terminal Block
+ –

2A
Isolation
L
and Control
Circuitry N
2 4

147
 1987 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Figure 4-38: DO VAC isolated CHARM wiring diagram for high-side configuration
with CHARM Injected Power terminal block

CHARM CHARM Charm Injected

Baseplate Power Terminal
L N Block
+ -

Isolation
L
and Control
Circuitry N
2 4

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121
CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block specifications on page 122

RTD Input CHARMs

RTD / Resistance input CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• This CHARM can be configured for 2, 3, or 4-wire applications.

Specifications

Table 4-21: RTD Input CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type RTD input
Sensor types Refer to Table 4-22
Sensor configuration 2, 3, or 4-wire
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor. Refer to Table 4-22
Accuracy over full temperature range Depends upon the sensor type. Refer to the
temperature drift specification in Table 4-22

148
 1988 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-21: RTD Input CHARM specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution Depends upon the sensor type. Refer to the res-
olution specification in Table 4-22
Calibration None required
Sensor excitation current • 0.5 mA in 2 and 4-wire configurations
• 0.25 mA in 3-wire configurations
DC50/60 Hz common mode rejection 90 dB typical
Channel isolation RTD sensor input is galvanically isolated and fac-
tory tested to 1000 VDC.
Open sensor detection Yes
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 22
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: ±10% at 10 mA maxi-
mum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.30 W

Table 4-22: RTD sensor type specifications

25° reference accura-

Sensor type Operating range cy Temperature drift Resolution
Pt100 -200 to 850° C ±0.25° C ±0.02° C/°C ~0.02° C
Pt200 -200 to 850° C ±0.25° C ±0.02° C/°C ~0.02° C
Pt500 -200 to 850° C ±0.25° C ±0.02° C/°C ~0.02° C
Pt1000 -200 to 260° C ±0.25° C ±0.02° C/°C ~0.01° C
Ni120 -80 to 260 °C ±0.15° C ±0.01° C/°C ~0.01° C
Ni100 -80 to 260 °C ±0.20° C ±0.01° C/°C ~0.01° C
Ni200 -80 to 260 °C ±0.20° C ±0.01° C/°C ~0.01° C
Ni500 -80 to 260 °C ±0.20° C ±0.01° C/°C ~0.01° C
Ni1000 -80 to 150 °C ±0.20° C ±0.01° C/°C ~0.01° C
Cu10 -200 to 260 °C ±0.25° C ±0.02° C/°C ~0.01° C
Resistance/user de- 0 to 2,000 Ω ±0.25 Ω ±0.03 Ω/°C ~0.031 Ω
fined

149
 1989 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Wiring diagrams

Figure 4-39: RTD / Resistance CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3 4-Wire
+

and A/D Conversion

Excitation Current
Isolation

2 4

–
3-Wire
+
Shield 1
2

4
–
2-Wire
+
1
2

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

Thermocouple Input CHARMS

Thermocouple / mV input CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• A sensor connected to two of the wiring terminals provides Cold Junction
Compensation. The sensor is provided with the CHARM.
• Color coding for thermocouple wires varies from country to country. Refer to your
local standards for the appropriate color code.

150
 1990 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Specifications

Table 4-23: Thermocouple Input CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Channel type Thermocouple input
Sensor types Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, uncharacter-
ized
mV: Low level voltage source (±20 mV, ±50 mV,
and ±100 mV.
Full scale signal range Depends upon Thermocouple sensor type. Refer
to Table 4-24
Accuracy over full scale temperature range Depends upon Thermocouple sensor type. Refer
to Table 4-24
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution Depends upon Thermocouple sensor type. Uses
24-bit A/D converter. Refer to Table 4-24
Calibration None required
Cold Junction Compensation (CJC) accuracy ±1.0° C
Cold Junction Compensation range -40° C to 85° C
Open sensor detection Yes
DC/50/60Hz common mode rejection 90 dB typical
Channel isolation TC sensor input is galvanically isolated and fac-
tory tested to 1000 VDC.
Input power requirements Total power requirement: +24 VDC ±10% at 22
mA maximum :
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• +24 VDC input power: ±10% at 10 mA maxi-
mum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.30 W

Note
For all thermocouple sensor types, when a function block is assigned to a Thermocouple CHARM, the
XD_SCALE and the OUT_SCALE display the full scale range and not the operating range. When
attempting to measure a temperature outside of the operating range, the module's OUT parameter
is clamped within the full scale range and the block displays a Bad status. That is, a module assigned
to a Thermocouple CHARM displays values up to the full scale range but the status of the value is
good only within the operating range.

Note
In the 25ºC reference accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of the 25°C
reference accuracy value, plus the CJC accuracy value, plus the sensor accuracy value.

151
 1991 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-24: Thermocouple sensor type specifications

25°C reference Temperature Nominal resolu-

Sensor types accuracy drift tion Full scale Operating range
B ±0.8° C ±0.06°C/°C 0.024°C 0° to 1820°C 250° to 1820°C
E ±0.4° C ±0.03°C/°C 0.018°C -270° to 1000°C -200° to 1000°C
J ±0.6° C ±0.04°C/°C 0.022°C -210° to 1200°C -210° to 1200°C
K ±0.4° C ±0.03°C/°C 0.025°C -270° to 1372°C -200° to 1372°C
N ±0.6° C ±0.04°C/°C 0.024°C -270° to 1300°C -200° to 1300°C
R ±0.8° C ±0.05°C/°C 0.028°C -50° to 1768°C -50° to 1768°C
S ±0.8° C ±0.05°C/°C 0.028°C -50° to 1768°C -50° to 1768°C
T ±0.5° C ±0.02°C/°C 0.01°C -270° to 400°C -200° to 400°C
±100 mV ±0.025 mV .002 mV/ °C .0031 mV ±100 mV ±100 mV
±50 mV ±0.020 mV .001 mV/ °C .0015 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV
±20 mV ±0.010 mV .0005 mV/ °C .0006 mV/ °C ±20 mV ±20 mV

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-40: Thermocouple / mV input CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block
+
1 3
A/D Conversion and
CJC Measurement

Thermistor
External
Isolation

2 4

Ð
Shield

Related Links
CHARM Terminal Block specifications on page 121

152
 1992 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Voltage CHARMs
AI 0-10 V CHARM specifications
Installation notes

• This CHARM requires a CHARM Terminal Block.

• Installing a 250 Ω resistor across terminals 3 and 4 converts a 4-20 mA field signal to
a 1-5 VDC input signal.

Specifications

Table 4-25: AI 0-10 V CHARM specifications

Item Specification
Sensor types Voltage devices:
• 0 to 5 V
• 0 to 10 V
• 1 to 5 V
• -1 to +1 V
• -5 to +5 V
• -10 to +10 V
Accuracy over full temperature range Refer to the following table.
Input impedance 10 MΩ
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Resolution Refer to the following table (24 bit A/D convert-
er used)
Calibration None required
Common mode rejection 90 dB at 50/60 Hz
Isolation Input channel galvanically isolated and factory
tested to 1000 VDC
Input power requirements Total power requirement: 22 mA maximum
• Input power from CIOC: +6.3 VDC ±3% at 32
mA maximum
• 24 VDC input power: +24 VDC ± 10% at 10
mA maximum
CHARM heat dissipation 0.40 W

Table 4-26: Isolated input voltage sensor type specifications

25° reference accura-

Sensor type cy Temperature drift Nominal resolution
0 to 5 V ±0.005 V ±0.0005 V/°C 0.00008 V
0 to 10 V ±0.010 V ±0.001 V/°C 0.00015 V

153
 1993 of 2474

CHARMs I/O subsystem specifications

Table 4-26: Isolated input voltage sensor type specifications (continued)

25° reference accura-

Sensor type cy Temperature drift Nominal resolution
1 to 5 V ±0.005 V ±0.0005 V/°C 0.00006 V
-1 to +1 V ±0.0025 V ±0.0002 V/°C 0.00003 V
-5 to +5 V ±0.005 V ±0.0005 V/°C 0.00015 V
-10 to + 10 V ±0.010 V ±0.001 V/°C 0.00030 V

Wiring diagram

Figure 4-41: AI 0-10 V CHARM wiring diagram

CHARM CHARM CHARM Terminal

Baseplate Block

1 3

+
A/D Conversion

Voltage
Isolation

Source
2 4 –

Shield

154
 1994 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

5 Power guidelines and specifications

Topics covered in this chapter:
• Power in a DeltaV system
• System Power Supply (24 VDC) specifications
• DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply specifications
• Extending the LocalBus
• Sizing the System Power Supply (24 VDC)
• Sizing the AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply
• DC current requirements for S-series I/O
• Using multiple system power supplies for redundancy
• Using multiple bulk power supplies for redundancy and load sharing
• Heat dissipation specifications for S-series I/O and DeltaV Smart Switches
• Injecting additional power to S-series I/O
• Power requirements for CHARMs I/O

Power in a DeltaV system

The DeltaV system uses system power supplies and bulk power supplies to power the
controllers, CIOCs, and I/O subsystems.

Power in an S-series system

In a DeltaV system with S-series hardware, power is distributed from bulk power supplies
to system power supplies and then to controllers and the I/O subsystems along the
LocalBus. The LocalBus is the internal power and communications bus running through the
connected S-series carriers. The LocalBus supports up to 15 A. System power is shared
along the length of the LocalBus.

Field power for S-series I/O can be individually delivered to each card or separately
delivered to primary and redundant cards through connectors on the S-series 8-Wide I/O
Carrier. Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Installation manual for step-by-
step instructions on how to deliver field power to individual cards and to redundant cards.
Refer also to the specifications for the 8-Wide I/O Carrier in this manual for an image
showing the field power connectors on the carrier.

Power in a CHARMs I/O system

The CHARM I/O Carrier accepts redundant 24 VDC from primary and secondary bulk power
supplies connected to two 24 VDC input terminals on the carrier. This power is used by
redundant CHARM I/O Cards (CIOCs) and is available to each CHARM to power field
devices. In addition, the CIOC powers a redundant 6.3 VDC bus that provides internal
power for each CHARM.

155
 1995 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Types of power supplies used

The DeltaV system uses system power supplies and bulk power supplies. System power
supplies power DeltaV controllers and I/O subsystems. Bulk power supplies power system
power supplies, CIOCs, and field devices.

• The System Power Supply (24 VDC) provides simplex or redundant 12 VDC LocalBus
power to the I/O cards. The system power supply also converts some input power to
the controller if the system power supply is mounted directly to the left of the
controller on the Power/Controller Carrier.
• The AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply provides 24 VDC power to System Power
Supplies (24 VDC), to CHARM I/O Carriers, and to some cards' 24 VDC field circuits.

Related Links
System Power Supply (24 VDC) specifications on page 156
DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply specifications on page 157
8-Wide I/O Carrier specifications on page 94

System Power Supply (24 VDC) specifications

Installation notes

Always remove input power to the Power/Controller carrier before installing or removing a
power supply from the carrier.

Specifications

Table 5-1: System Power Supply (24 VDC) specifications

Item Specification
Input 24 VDC ±20% at 5.4 A
Output power rating -40° to 60° +12 VDC at 8.0 A
Output power rating 60° to 70° +12 VDC at 6.0 A
Inrush (soft start) 20 A peak maximum for 5 ms over the 24 VDC
input range (including 12 VDC output).
Input protection Internally fused; fuses cannot be replaced.
Overvoltage protection Output protected at 110% to 120%.
Holdup time Output remains with 5% of nominal at full load
and minimum input voltage for 5 ms .
Mounting On either slot of the power/controller carrier.
Alarm relay connectors • Alarm contacts: 2-wire normally open relays;
relays are closed when 3.3 and 5 VDC out-
puts are within ± 4% of nominal
• Alarm relay contact rating: 30 VDC at 2.0 A;
250 VAC at 2.0 A

156
 1996 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 5-1: System Power Supply (24 VDC)

Side view Front view

19.9 cm
(7.84 in.)

14.0 cm 4.1 cm
(5.53 in.) (1.61 in.)

DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power

supply specifications
Specifications

Table 5-2: DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply specifications

Item Specification
AC input 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-phase
Current: 4.5 A
Output power rating 60°C 24.6 VDC at 12.0 A
Output power rating 70°C 24.6 VDC at 9.0 A
Inrush current 40/25 A maximum (hot/cold start)
Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 110% - 120%
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load

157
 1997 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Table 5-2: DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply specifications

(continued)

Item Specification
Input protection Internally fused, nonreplaceable fuses.
Note: The internal fuse is for an internal fault
condition only. Shorts and overload will not
cause the fuse to fail.
Alarm relay contact rating 30 VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A
Redundancy output isolation diode Integrated in unit
Isolation diode not required
Dimensions on horizontal DIN rail Height (max): 13.5 cm (5.3 in.)
Width (max): 24.0 cm (9.5 in.)
Depth (max): 10.6 cm (4.2 in.)

Dimensions and connectors on the power supplies

Figure 5-2: Top view of the DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply with
dimensions
24 cm (9.5 in.)

10.6 cm
(4.2 in.)

ENA RTN
SHARE
V OUT
V OUT
RTN
RTN
ENA
AC+

AC

The connectors on the top of the bulk power supplies are:

120/230 VAC input

• AC+: AC line
• AC -: AC neutral
•
: Protective earth

24 VDC output

• ENA: Output enable. The wire from ENA to ENA RTN is connected at the factory.
• V OUT: DC voltage output (+)
• V OUT: DC voltage output (+)
• RTN: DC voltage return (-)

158
 1998 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

• RTN: DC voltage return (-)

• SHARE: This connection is required for redundancy and load-sharing applications.
• ENA RTN: Output enable return. The wire from ENA to ENA RTN is connected at the
factory.
• RELAY+: Alarm relay contacts +
• RELAY-: Alarm relay contacts -

Figure 5-3: Front view of the DIN rail-mounted AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply with
dimensions

24 cm (9.5 in.)

AC OK

DC OK

MAGNETEK

13.5 cm 12V 12A

(5.3 in.)

Extending the LocalBus

The LocalBus, the internal power and communications bus running through the connected
S-series carriers, can be extended between carriers on separate DIN rails.

Left and Right Extenders and cables are used to extend the LocalBus to S-series carriers on
other DIN rails. The Right Extender connects to the right side of the last 8-Wide I/O Carrier
on one DIN rail and the Left Extender connects to the left side of the first 8-Wide I/O Carrier
on another DIN rail. Extender cables connect to the Left and Right Extenders to extend the
LocalBus to the carriers on the second DIN rail. Cables are available in three lengths:

• 0.78 meters (2.58 feet)

• 1.44 meters (4.75 feet)
• 1.95 meters (6.41 feet)

Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Installation manual for a step-by-step
explanation of how to extend LocalBus power to other carriers.

159
 1999 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Related Links
8-Wide I/O Carrier specifications on page 94
Left and Right Extender specifications on page 92

Sizing the System Power Supply (24 VDC)

The system power supplies connect to the LocalBus to provide 12 VDC power to I/O cards.
The number of system power supplies is determined by the total power required by the I/O
cards and the redundancy scheme used by the application. To size the system power
supplies, calculate the 12 VDC load by taking the sum of the LocalBus current for all cards
connected to a set of 8-Wide I/O Carriers. Divide this total by 8 A to determine the number
of supplies needed. The current requirements are listed in the table DC Current
requirements for S-series I/O. If the total LocalBus current exceeds 15 A, you must inject
additional power to the LocalBus.

Related Links
DC current requirements for S-series I/O on page 161
Injecting additional power to S-series I/O on page 170
Using multiple system power supplies for redundancy on page 162

Sizing the AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply

Bulk power supplies are used to provide 24 VDC power to the DeltaV system power
supplies and to power 24 VDC field circuits. To size the bulk power supplies, determine the
DeltaV system components connected to the bulk power supply and total the current
draw at 24 VDC to arrive at the total current demand for the bulk power supplies. Ensure
the bulk power supplies have sufficient capacity to provide overcurrent to guarantee that
fuses and circuit breakers are triggered without a loss in operating voltage. In redundant
applications, ensure that the power supplies have sufficient capacity to power the entire
system.

Determining the number of bulk power supplies needed to power the system power
supplies

When used to power the DeltaV system power supplies, the bulk power supplies must
provide sufficient power to meet the 12 VDC LocalBus power requirement as well as the 5
VDC controller power requirement. The bulk power supply must account for the system
power supply efficiency losses. Use the following calculation to determine the number of
bulk power supplies needed to power system power supplies:

24 VDC bulk power to system power supplies = ((LocalBus current * 0.5) + (# of controllers * 2 A * 0.24))/.
75

The LocalBus current is the total I/O card current at 12 VDC. You can use the actual current
load based on the installed I/O cards or the maximum capacity of the system power
supplies (8 Amps at 12 VDC). Be sure to allow for future expansion of the I/O subsystem.

160
 2000 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Determining the number of bulk power supplies needed to power field circuits

When used to power field circuits, the bulk power supply load is determined by totaling
the field power demand of each I/O card connected to the power supply. For some cards,
part of the 24 VDC field power is used for internal components such as A/D converters in
addition to the field signal. The field power current values that are provided in the DC
current requirements for S-series I/O table are based on all signals operating at their
maximum level. In the case of discrete output channels, it is likely that the actual field
current draw will be less than the maximum listed in the table. You can substitute the
actual current draw if you know it. Also, it is highly unlikely that all signals are active and at
their maximum at any given time. While this can be used to adjust the actual 24 VDC
power required for your system, it is often simpler to assume maximum load and design
the 24 VDC bulk supplies accordingly

Related Links
DC current requirements for S-series I/O on page 161
Using multiple bulk power supplies for redundancy and load sharing on page 165

DC current requirements for S-series I/O

Table 5-3: DC current requirements for S-series I/O

Product Current required for each product (A)

LocalBus current at 12 VDC Field power current at 24 VDC

AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART (simplex) 0.150 0.300
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART (redun- 0.250 (each card) 0.200
dant)(1)
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART 0.150 0.600
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART (simplex) 0.150 0.200
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART (redun- 0.250 (each card) 0.300
dant)(1)
AS-Interface 0.300 0.112
DeviceNet 0.600 0.053
DI 8-channel NAMUR (simplex or re- 0.150 0.100
dundant)
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated 0.100 N/A
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact 0.100 N/A
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated 0.100 N/A
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact 0.075 0.100
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side (sim- 0.150 3.05
plex or redundant)
DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated 0.150 N/A

(1) When installed as a redundant pair, each card draws additional LocalBus current.

161
 2001 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Table 5-3: DC current requirements for S-series I/O (continued)

Product Current required for each product (A)

LocalBus current at 12 VDC Field power current at 24 VDC

DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side 0.150 N/A
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated 0.150 N/A
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side 0.150 3.272
Fieldbus H1 (simplex or redundant) 0.300 0.024
H1 card with integrated power 0.300 1.2
Isolated input 0.350 N/A
Pulse count input 0.250 N/A
Profibus DP (simplex or redundant) 0.600 N/A
RTD / Resistance input 0.160 N/A
Sequence of Events 0.075 0.075
Serial simplex or redundant 0.300 N/A
Thermocouple / mV input 0.210 N/A

Using multiple system power supplies for

redundancy
Multiple system power supplies are used to provide redundant power to redundant
controllers and can be used to provide redundant power to simplex controllers. Multiple
system power supplies can also be used to provide additional power to the I/O only.

Providing redundant power to redundant controllers and the I/O subsystem

A redundant controller consists of a pair of S-series controllers installed on separate

Power / Controller Carriers. Each controller in the redundant pair is powered from a
separate System Power Supply (24 VDC) installed to the left of the controller on the
Power / Controller Carrier. In addition to providing redundant power to the controllers, the
power supplies also power the I/O.

162
 2002 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Figure 5-4: Redundant power to redundant controllers and the I/O

Power Secondary Power Primary
supply 2 controller supply 1 controller

Power/Controller Power/Controller
Carrier 2 Carrier 1

Refer to the preceding image:

• Power supply one on Power / Controller Carrier one is providing power to the
primary controller and to the I/O.
• Power supply two on Power / Controller Carrier two is providing power to the
secondary controller and to the I/O.
• Power supplies one and two provide redundant 12 VDC power to the LocalBus for
the I/O subsystem.

Providing additional power to the I/O only

Ensure that the LocalBus power demand does not exceed the capacity of the system power
supplies if one power supply fails. You can install an additional Power / Controller Carrier
and power supply to the left of existing Power / Controller Carriers to power the I/O only. In
the following example, power supply 3 is providing power to the I/O only; not to the
controllers.

163
 2003 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Figure 5-5: Additional power to the I/O only

Power Power Secondary Power Primary
supply 3 supply 2 controller supply 1 controller

Power/Controller Power/Controller Power/Controller

Carrier 3 Carrier 2 Carrier 1

Providing redundant power to a simplex controller

To provide redundant power to a simplex controller, install a second Power / Controller

Carrier and second System Power Supply (24 VDC) to the left of the Power / Controller
Carrier holding the simplex controller and its power supply. The secondary power supply
installs in the right slot of the second Power / Controller Carrier and powers the controller
and the I/O as shown in the following image.

164
 2004 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Figure 5-6: Redundant power to a simplex controller and additional power to the I/O
Provides redundant power to the
controller and additional power to the I/O

Empty Provides primary power

slot to the controller and I/O

Secondary Primary S-series

24 VDC 24 VDC Controller
Power Supply Power Supply

Power/Controller Power/Controller
Carrier 2 Carrier 1

Using multiple bulk power supplies for

redundancy and load sharing
The AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply can be used in systems that require load sharing and
redundancy. The supply contains integrated circuitry to isolate power supply faults.

If your system uses redundant system power supplies, connect the primary bulk power
supply to the primary system power supply and the secondary bulk power supply to the
secondary system power supply.

The following table shows the current provided to the system based on the number of bulk
power supplies and the power scheme (simplex or redundant).

Number of bulk power System current provided by System current provided by re-
supplies simplex power dundant power
1 12 A N/A
2 24 A 12 A
3 36 A 24 A

165
 2005 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Number of bulk power System current provided by System current provided by re-
supplies simplex power dundant power
4 48 A 36 A
5 N/A 48 A

Connecting bulk power supplies for redundancy or load sharing

If the bulk power supply is used in a system that requires redundancy or load sharing,
connect the SHARE terminals on the top of the power supplies to terminal strips or bus
bars as shown below in the following figures. One or both of the VOUT (+) and RTN (-)
connections must go to the same location

Figure 5-7: Two bulk power supplies connected for redundancy or load sharing

This figure shows the connections for four bulk power supplies. A fifth supply can be
connected in the same manner for redundancy.

166
 2006 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Figure 5-8: Four bulk power supplies connected for redundancy or load sharing

Heat dissipation specifications for S-series I/O

and DeltaV Smart Switches
Heat dissipation is based on the power consumption of each component and includes
some heat generated by the I/O signal, such as the load resistor of an AI channel. System
power supplies and bulk power supplies also dissipate heat proportional to the load they
are servicing as a result of internal efficiency. Use the heat dissipation values in this table to
calculate the heat load of the system or the heat load in a cabinet. When calculating the
heat load in a cabinet, be sure to include only the components in that cabinet.

Note
The System Power Supply (24 VDC) has approximately 75% internal efficiency. The Bulk Power
Supply varies depending upon the type and manufacturer. Refer to the power supply's Product Data
Sheet for its efficiency.

167
 2007 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Table 5-4: Heat dissipation for S-series I/O and DeltaV Smart Switches

Product Heat dissipation (Watts)

Controllers (SD Plus and SX) 7.0
I/O cards
AI 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART Simplex: 5.3
Redundant: 5.9
AI 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART 7.7
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART Simplex: 7.3
Redundant: 6.9
AS-Interface 7.0
DeviceNet 8.2
DI 8-channel NAMUR (simplex or redundant) 3.3
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated 3.1
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact 3.1
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated 3.1
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact 4.2
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side (simplex or re- 3.9
dundant)
DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated 4.2
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side 5.4
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated 5.4
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side 3.5
Fieldbus H1 (simplex or redundant) 4.4
H1 card with integrated power 7.2
Isolated input 4.2
Pulse count input 5.3
Profibus DP (simplex or redundant) 7.2
RTD / Resistance input 1.9
Sequence of Events 2.6
Serial card (simplex or redundant) 3.6
Thermocouple / mV input 2.5
CHARMs I/O
CHARM I/O card 6.68 per redundant CIOC node
AI 0-10 VDC CHARM 0.40
AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM 0.33
AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM 0.48
DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM 0.32
DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM 0.41

168
 2008 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Table 5-4: Heat dissipation for S-series I/O and DeltaV Smart Switches (continued)

Product Heat dissipation (Watts)

DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM 0.40
DI 24 VDC dry contact CHARM 0.33
DI NAMUR CHARM 0.51
DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM 0.44
DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM 0.46
DO 120/230 VAC isolated CHARM 0.7
RTD / Resistance input CHARM 1.9
Thermocouple / mV input CHARM 2.5
Power supplies
System power supply (24 VDC) 5.2
DeltaV Smart Switches and media modules
FP20-6TX2TX 5.3
FP20-6TX2TX-ES
FP20-6TX1MM1TX 6.5
FP20-6TX1MM1TX-ES
FP20-6TX1SM1TX
FP20-6TX1SM1TX-ES
FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX
FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX-ES
FP20-6TX2MM 7.7
FP20-6TX2MM-ES
FP20-6TX2SM
FP20-6TX2SM-ES
FP20-6TX2TX 5.3
FP20-6TX2TX-ES
MD20-8 5.0 at 24 VDC
MD20-8-ES 7.4 at 48 VDC
MD20-16 12.0 at 24 VDC
MD20-16-ES 15.6 at 48 VDC
MD20-24
MD20-24-ES
MD30-8 5.6 at 24 VDC
MD30-8-ES 8.6 at 48 VDC
MD30-16 12.6 at 24 VDC
MD30-16-ES 16.8 at 48 VDC
MD30-24
MD30-24-ES
MD4-2TX/SFP 5.8
MD4-2TX/SFP-ES

169
 2009 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Table 5-4: Heat dissipation for S-series I/O and DeltaV Smart Switches (continued)

Product Heat dissipation (Watts)

MD2-2FXM2 3.8
MD2-2FXM2-ES
MD2-2FXS2
MD2-2FXS2-ES
MD2-4TX1 0.8
MD2-4TX1-ES
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1 3.8
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1-ES
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1-ES
MD3-4FXM2 6.8
MD3-4FXM2-ES
MD3-4FXM4
MD3-4FXM4-ES
MD3-4FXS2
MD3-4FXS2-ES
MD3-2FXM4/2TX1 3.8
MD3-2FXM4/2TX1-ES
MD3-1FXS2/3TX1 2.3
MD3-1FXS2/3TX1-ES
MD2-4TX1-PoE 0.8
MD2-4TX1-PoE-ES
RM-100-Base Smart Switch 12.0
RM-100-Base Smart Switch-RP 13.0
RM100-8TX 12.0
RM100-24TX 16.0
RM100-EM-8TX 2.0
RM100-EM-8MM-FX 10.0
RM100-EM-8SM-FX 10.0
RM100-EM-8SFP 11.0 (including SFP)

Injecting additional power to S-series I/O

When one System Power Supply (24 VDC) does not provide sufficient power to the I/O,
power can be injected at specific points along the LocalBus.

Note
Most DeltaV systems will not require additional power.

170
 2010 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

It is assumed that you have correctly sized your system power requirements, that you are
sure that your system requires additional power, and that you know exactly where the
power is to be injected.

Power can be injected:

• At another carrier on the same DIN rail

• At another carrier on another DIN rail connected by a Left Extender and cable
• At another carrier that is remotely installed from the power supply

Inject power to I/O on the same DIN rail

When the cards that require additional power are on an 8-Wide I/O carrier on the same DIN
rail with another 8-Wide I/O carrier, inject the power between two 8-Wide carriers.
1. Snap the Power/Controller carrier onto the DIN rail between two 8-Wide I/O carriers.
2. Install simplex or redundant power supplies onto the carrier.
3. Connect each carrier to the adjacent carrier by sliding together the pins on the sides
of the carriers.
4. Remove the jumper from the power terminals on the Power/Controller carrier.

Figure 5-9: Redundant system power injected between carriers on the same DIN rail

Remove
jumper

– + G – A B – G – +

Redundant
power supplies
I/O on this carrier
require additional power.

8-Wide I/O Carrier Power/Controller 8-Wide I/O Carrier

Carrier

171
 2011 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Inject power to I/O on another DIN rail

When the cards that require additional system power are on an 8-Wide I/O carrier on a
different DIN rail connected with a Left Extender and cable, inject the power between the
Left Extender and the 8-Wide I/O carrier.
1. Snap the Power/Controller carrier onto the DIN rail between the Left Extender and
8-Wide I/O carrier.
2. Install simplex or redundant power supplies onto the Power/Controller carrier.
3. Connect each carrier to the adjacent carrier by sliding together the pins on the sides
of the carriers.
4. Remove the jumper from the power terminals on either the Power/Controller carrier
or the Left Extender.

Figure 5-10: Redundant system power injected between carriers on the same
DIN rail

Remove
either of these
jumpers

– + + – + G – A B – G – +
Connection
to a right
extender on + – + –
another – + +
DIN rail

– + +

Right
extender

Left
extender

I/O on this carrier

Redundant Power/ 8-Wide I/O Carrier require additional power
power Controller Connection
supplies to a left
Carrier extender on
another
DIN rail

172
 2012 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Inject power to I/O when the power source is remotely

installed
When the cards requiring additional power are installed remotely from the power source,
make a wired connection between the power terminals on the Power/Controller carrier
and the Left Extender connected to an 8-Wide I/O Carrier.

It is assumed that the power supplies are installed on a Power/Controller carrier that is
installed remotely from the Left Extender and 8-Wide I/O carrier on the same DIN rail.

1. Remove the jumpers from the Power/Controller carrier and from the Left Extender.
2. Connect terminal B on the Power/Controller carrier to the far right plus (+) terminal
on the Left Extender
3. Connect the negative (-) terminal adjacent to terminal B on the Power/Controller
carrier to the first negative terminal on the Left Extender.
4. Connect the Power/Controller carrier to the isolated common ground reference.

Figure 5-11: Redundant power injected between remote power supplies and a
Left Extender

Remove jumpers

+ G – A B – G – – + +
+

– + +

See note

– + +

Connection
to a left
extender on
another
DIN rail

Note: Connect to DC common ground, to DeltaV reference ground, and then to protective earth.
Refer to the Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual for more
information on grounding control systems.

173
 2013 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Power requirements for CHARMs I/O

Redundant 24 VDC bulk power is distributed to the CHARM I/O Carrier to power CHARM
I/O Cards (CIOCs), CHARMs, and field devices.

Each CHARM I/O Card (CIOC) supplies redundant 6.3 VDC power for 96 CHARMs, the
maximum number of CHARMs supported by a redundant CIOC pair. The CIOCs receive
redundant 24 VDC power through connectors on the CHARM I/O Carrier. The carrier
busses this 24 VDC power to the CHARM Baseplates to provide redundant 24 VDC power
to the field circuits.

Some isolated CHARMs may require separate field power from 24 VDC or 120/230 VAC
power sources. These CHARMs can be installed in CHARM Terminal Blocks for use as
isolated connections to an externally powered field device. The CHARM Terminal Block
provides four terminals: circuit power can be connected to one pair of terminals and the
field device to the other pair.

For installations with a significant number of isolated CHARMs, the baseplates provide an
internal power bus, called the injected power bus, that supports 24 VDC or 120/230 VAC.
This bus receives power through the CHARM Address Terminal. Individual CHARMs can
connect to this bus by using a CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block rather than a CHARM
Terminal Block. Field power is connected once at the CHARM Address Terminal and then
bussed to any CHARM installed in a CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block to power the
CHARM's field circuits. A pair of terminals on the CHARM Injected Power Terminal Block
connect to the field device.

Inject field power to CHARMs I/O

The baseplates' injected power bus that supports 24 VDC or 120/230 VAC can be used in
installations with many isolated CHARMs. This bus receives power through the CHARM
Address Terminal.
1. Connect two bulk power supplies for redundancy to create a redundant common
power distribution bus for redundant power to field devices.
2. Connect the common redundant power distribution bus to the Address Terminal
through a 10 A fuse to create a 12 channel, system powered baseplate.

174
 2014 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

Figure 5-12: Field power extended to CHARMs

Address plug 1

Power input + + Power input

terminals –
1 – terminals

CHARM Injected Power

terminal blocks installed
in any of these slots will
receive power.

CHARM Baseplate

175
 2015 of 2474

Power guidelines and specifications

176
 2016 of 2474

S-series controller specifications

6 S-series controller specifications

SD Plus and SX Controller specifications

Installation notes

• The controller installs in the right slot of the Power / Controller carrier.
• The DeltaV system supports redundant controllers. A redundant controller consists
of a pair of S-series controllers installed on separate Power / Controller Carriers.
• Power each controller in a redundant pair from a separate System Power Supply (24
VDC) installed to the left of the controller on the Power / Controller Carrier.

Specifications

Table 6-1: SD Plus and SX Controller specifications

Item SD Plus controller SX controller

Power requirement (supplied +5 VDC at 1.4 A maximum +5 VDC at 1.4 A maximum
by system power supply
through 2-wide power/control-
ler carrier)
Fuse protection 3.0 A, nonreplaceable fuses 3.0 A, nonreplaceable fuses
Power dissipation • 5.0 W typical • 5.0 W typical
• 7.0 W maximum • 7.0 W maximum
Mounting On right slot of power/control- On right slot of power/control-
ler carrier ler carrier

177
 2017 of 2474

S-series controller specifications

Front and side views and dimensions

Figure 6-1: SD Plus and SX Controllers

Side view Front view

19.9 cm
(7.84 in.)

14.0 cm 4.1 cm
(5.53 in.) (1.61 in.)

Related Links
Power/Controller Carrier specifications on page 89

178
 2018 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

7 LED descriptions for S-series

hardware and CHARMs I/O
Topics covered in this chapter:
• S-series classic I/O cards - LEDs
• S-series bussed I/O cards - LEDs
• CHARMs I/O - LEDs
• I/O Port LEDs
• Controllers, power supplies - LEDs
• DeltaV Smart Switches - LEDs
• Wireless components - LEDs

S-series classic I/O cards - LEDs

AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs
Table 7-1: AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs

Possible causes and corrective ac-

LED correct operating condition Fault indication tion
Power/Active-On (green): Off System power is not supplied to the
• Continuous green for the active card due to a possible line power prob-
card lem. Check the power connections.
• Flashing green for the standby Internal fault. Contact technical sup-
card port.
Error-Off Red (continuous) No field power. Check field power
source and connections.
Controller is not scanning card. Check
controller operation.
Card failed a self–test. Contact techni-
cal support
Redundant card (red flashing) No field power. Check field power
source and connections and use the
DeltaV Diagnostics Clear Saved Fault
Information command when the prob-
lem is fixed.
Controller is not scanning card. Check
controller operation.

179
 2019 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-1: AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs (continued)

Possible causes and corrective ac-

LED correct operating condition Fault indication tion
Hardware error. Replace card with
card of same type, contact technical
support.
Simplex card (red flashing) Controller is not scanning card. Check
controller operation.
Channel 1 to channel 8-On (yellow) Off Input is out of range and the channel is
disabled. Check input source and con-
nections and refer to the card’s speci-
fications for the correct input range.
No field power. Check field power
source and connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical sup-
port
Yellow (flashing) Input is out of range and the channel is
disabled. Check input source and con-
nections and refer to the card’s speci-
fications for the correct input range.
No field power. Check field power
source and connections.
Channel is configured for HART but
there is no HART communications.
Check HART input source and connec-
tions.
Channel is configured for NAMUR lim-
its and they have been exceeded.
Check input levels compared to NA-
MUR levels.

AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs

Table 7-2: AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card due to a possible
line power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

180
 2020 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-2: AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Error-Off On No field power. Check field
power source and connections.
Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) No field power. Check field
power source and connections.
Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Hardware error. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs

Table 7-3: AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power/Active–On (green): Off System power is not supplied
• Continuous green for the to the card due to possible line
active card power problems. Check the
• Flashing green for the power connections.
standby card Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Redundant card (red flashing) No field power. Check field
power source and connections.
Use the DeltaV Diagnostics
Clear Saved Fault Information
command when the problem is
fixed.
Controller is not scanning the
card. Check the controller op-
eration.

181
 2021 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-3: AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Hardware error. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.
Simplex card (red flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Channel 1 to Channel 8-On Off No output device (load) and
(yellow) channel is disabled. Check out-
put connections.
Field power is not supplied to
card. Check field power source
and communications.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Yellow (flashing) No output device (load) and
channel is enabled. Check out-
put connections.
Field power not supplied to the
card. Check field power source
and connections.
Channel is configured for HART
but there is no HART communi-
cation. Check HART input
source and connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

8-channel DI card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs on the 8-channel DI cards:

• DI 8-channel NAMUR
• DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated
• DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact
• DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated

Table 7-4: 8-channel DI card LEDs

LED correct operating condition Fault indication Possible causes and corrective action
Power/Active-(green): Off System power is not supplied to the card.
Check the power connections.

182
 2022 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-4: 8-channel DI card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condition Fault indication Possible causes and corrective action
• Continuous green for the active Internal fault. Contact technical support.
card
• Flashing green for the standby
card
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card. Check
controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact technical
support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card. Check
controller operation.
Hardware error. Replace card with known
good card of same type; contact techni-
cal support.
Channel 1 to Channel 8
• On (yellow)=input>detection
level.
• Off=input<detection level
Refer to the card's specifications for
the detection levels.

DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card LEDs

Table 7-5: DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off Power is not supplied to card.
Check the power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Communications error. Check
connections, cable, and exter-
nal device.
Red (flashing) Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

8-channel DO card LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs on the 8-channel DO cards:

183
 2023 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

• DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side

• DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated
• DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side
• DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated

Table 7-6: 8-channel DO card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power/Active-On (green): Off System power is not supplied
• Continuous green for active to the card due to possible line
card power problems. Check the
• Flashing green for the power connections.
standby card Internal fault. Contact technical
support
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Hardware error. Replace with
known good card of same type;
contact technical support.
Channel 1 to Channel 8-On
(yellow)
Depends on setpoint and con-
figuration.

DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card LEDs

Table 7-7: DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card. Check the power
connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Communications error. Check
connections, cable, and exter-
nal device.

184
 2024 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-7: DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Red (flashing) Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

Isolated input card LEDs

Table 7-8: Isolated input card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to card due to possible line
power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

Pulse count input card LEDs

Table 7-9: Pulse count input card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to card due to a possible line
power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

185
 2025 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-9: Pulse count input card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

RTD / Resistance and Thermocouple / mV input card

LEDs
Table 7-10: RTD / Resistance and Thermocouple / mV input card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card due to a possible
line power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.
Channel 1 to Channel 8-On Off Channel not enabled. Enable
(yellow) channel and download card.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support
Flashing Invalid configuration. Check
configuration.

186
 2026 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-10: RTD / Resistance and Thermocouple / mV input card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Input is out of range. Refer to
the card's specifications for the
correct range.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

Sequence of Events card LEDs

Table 7-11: Sequence of Events card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible cause and corrective

tion Fault indication action
Power-On (green) Off Power is not supplied to card.
Check the power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Communications error. Check
connections, cable, and exter-
nal device.
Red (flashing) Address conflict. Replace card
with know good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

S-series bussed I/O cards - LEDs

AS-Interface card LEDs
Table 7-12: AS-Interface card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card due to a possible
line power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

187
 2027 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-12: AS-Interface card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.
Port 1 and Port 2-On (yellow) Off No communications. Check
connections, cable, and exter-
nal devices.
Yellow (flashing) Communications error on this
port. Check connections, cable,
and external devices.

DeviceNet card LEDs

Table 7-13: DeviceNet card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card due to a possible
line power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning the
card. Check the controller op-
eration.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Address conflict. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.

188
 2028 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-13: DeviceNet card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Port 1-On (yellow) Off No communications. Check
Port 2 (reserved) connections, cable, and exter-
nal devices.
Port not enabled. Enable port.
No configuration for this port.
Configure port.
Yellow (flashing) Communication error on this
port. Check connections, cable,
and external device.

H1 card with Integrated Power LEDs

Table 7-14: H1 card with Integrated Power LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power/Active-On: Off System power is not supplied
• Continuous green for the to card due to a possible line
active card power problem. Check the
• Flashing green for the power connections.
standby card Internal fault. Contact technical
support
Simplex (flashing) Incorrect terminal block for
Redundant active and standby configured card type. Install a
(flashing) redundant terminal block for a
redundant card and a simplex
terminal block for a simplex
card.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Hardware error. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.
Port 1 and Port 2-On (yellow) Off No communications. Check
connections, cable, and exter-
nal devices.

189
 2029 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-14: H1 card with Integrated Power LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Port not enabled. Enable port.
Configuration mismatch such
as redundant card configured
in database and simplex card
installed. Fix configuration er-
rors.
Yellow (flashing) Communication error on this
port. Check connections, cable,
and external devices.
No configuration for this port.
Configure port.
Port 1 and Port 2 Red (continuous) Excessive current draw on the
fieldbus segment. Check the
field devices or the field wiring.
If no field problem is found, re-
place the card.

Fieldbus H1 card LEDs

Table 7-15: Fieldbus H1 card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power/Active-On: Off System power is not supplied
• Continuous green for the to card due to a possible line
active card power problem. Check the
• Flashing green for the power connections.
standby card Internal fault. Contact technical
support
Simplex (flashing) Incorrect terminal block for
Redundant active and standby configured card type. Install a
(flashing) redundant terminal block for a
redundant card and a simplex
terminal block for a simplex
card.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.

190
 2030 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-15: Fieldbus H1 card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Hardware error. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.
Port 1 and Port 2-On (yellow) Off No communications. Check
connections, cable, and exter-
nal devices.
Port not enabled. Enable port.
Configuration mismatch such
as redundant card configured
in database and simplex card
installed. Fix configuration er-
rors.
Yellow (flashing) Communication error on this
port. Check connections, cable,
and external devices.
No configuration for this port.
Configure port.

Profibus DP card LEDs

Table 7-16: Profibus DP card LEDs

LED correct operating con-

dition Fault indication Possible causes and corrective action
Power-On (green): Off System power is not supplied to card due to a
• Continuous green for the possible line power problem. Check the power
simplex card connections.
• Flashing green for the re- Internal fault. Contact technical support.
dundant card
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card. Check control-
ler operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact technical sup-
port.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card. Check control-
ler operation.
Address conflict. Replace card with known
good card of same type; contact technical
support.
Port 1 - On (yellow) Off No communications. Check connections, ca-
Port 2 is reserved ble, and external device.

191
 2031 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-16: Profibus DP card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating con-

dition Fault indication Possible causes and corrective action
Port not enabled. Enable port.
No configuration for this port. Configure port.
Yellow (flashing) Communication error on this port. Check con-
nections, cable, and external device.

Serial card LEDs

Table 7-17: Serial card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power/Active-On (green): Off System power is not supplied
• Continuous green for the to card due to a possible line
active card power problem. Check the
• Flashing green for the re- power connections.
dundant card Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Card failed self-test. Contact
technical support.
Red (flashing) Controller is not scanning card.
Check controller operation.
Hardware error. Replace card
with known good card of same
type; contact technical sup-
port.
Port 1 and Port 2 configured as Off No communications. Check
master-On (yellow) connections, cable, and exter-
nal device.
Yellow (flashing) Communication error on this
port. Check connections, cable,
and external device.
Port 1 and Port 2 configured as Off No communication.
slave-On (yellow) Flashing Intermittent communication.

192
 2032 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

VIM card LEDs

Table 7-18: VIM card LEDs

LED correct operating condition Fault indication Possible causes and corrective action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied to the card
due to a possible line power problem.
Check the power connections.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Indicates an error condition.
Active - On (green) Off Indicates that the card is not commis-
sioned and not active. Commission the
card.
Standby - On (green) for redundant Off (for redun- Indicates that the card is not commis-
applications; Off for simplex appli- dant applica- sioned. Commission the card.
cations tions)
Flashing No configuration.
Network - (yellow flashing) Off Indicates invalid network communica-
tions. Check the power connection; pow-
er cycle the card, be sure that the control-
ler is downloaded.
Ctlr IO - (yellow flashing) Off Indicates invalid LocalBus communica-
tions. Check the power connection; pow-
er cycle the card; be sure that the control-
ler is downloaded.
All except Power flashing; alternat- N/A N/A
ing even and odd indicates that a
user has issued a ping command
from the user interface to visually
identifier the controller.

CHARMs I/O - LEDs

CHARM I/O Card LEDs
Table 7-19: CHARM I/O card LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card due to a possible
line power problem. Check the
power connections.

193
 2033 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-19: CHARM I/O card LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Red (flashing - slow) The card is decommissioned.
Commission the CHARM I/O
Card.
Red (flashing - fast) Possible twin-active redundan-
cy state. Power cycle the CIOC.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Active-On (green) Off Card is decommissioned. Com-
mission the CHARM I/O Card.
Standby-On (green) for redun- Green (flashing) Card is not configured. Down-
dant CHARM I/O cards load the CHARM I/O Card's con-
Off for simplex CHARM I/O figuration.
cards
Pri. and Sec. ACN–Yellow (flash- Off For simplex CIOCs, Off could in-
ing) dicate that the CIOC lacks ac-
tive Ethernet communications.
Check the cable and network
switch connections.
For redundant CIOCs, Off could
indicate that the I/O Port is not
properly seated or that the I/O
Port needs to be replaced.

Analog CHARMs LED

The following table describes the meaning of the colors and patterns associated with the
single LED on the analog CHARMs:

• AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM

• AI 0-10 V CHARM
• AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM
• RTD / Resistance input CHARM
• Thermocouple / mV input CHARM

194
 2034 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-20: Analog CHARMs LEDs

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Green (continuous) The channel and CHARM status is good and the
CHARM is configured.
Green (flashing twice per second) The CHARM is not configured. If DeltaV Diag-
nostics displays BAD status for this CHARM, a
configuration error, such as a configuration mis-
match has occurred. If DeltaV Diagnostics dis-
plays GOOD status for the CHARM, the CHARM
has not been configured. In this case, configure
the CHARM in DeltaV Explorer.
Green (flashing ten times per second) A user has issued an identify CHARM command
from the DeltaV Diagnostics application. This is
not a fault and no action is required.
Red (continuous) No communications on the bus or no address.
• If this pattern is seen on an individual
CHARM, replace the CHARM.
• If this pattern is seen on a group of 12
CHARMs, ensure that the correct address
plug is installed.
• If this pattern is seen on all CHARMs, ensure
that the CHARM I/O card is functioning cor-
rectly.
Additionally, if this pattern is seen on all
CHARMs, the CIOC could be in simulate mode. If
the CIOC is in simulate mode, no corrective ac-
tion is required.
Red (flashing twice per second) Channel fault. Check wiring and associated field
device. If wiring and device are correct, replace
the CHARM.
Red (flashing ten times per second) Duplicate address. Check all CHARMs baseplates
for a duplicate address plug.

195
 2035 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-20: Analog CHARMs LEDs (continued)

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Green then red flashing four times per second A CHARM fault (such as a bad address or a faulty
CHARM bus) exists that does not affect the
channel status.
• If this pattern is seen on an individual
CHARM, replace the CHARM.
• If this pattern is seen on a group of 12
CHARMs, ensure that the correct address
plug is installed.
• If this pattern is seen on all CHARMs, ensure
that the CHARM I/O card is functioning cor-
rectly.
Green and red alternating two times per second The CHARM is being upgraded or is in upgrade
mode.
Green then red flashing briefly once every 1.5 The CIOC has placed the CHARM in a failsafe
seconds (for output CHARMs only) state.
No colors The CHARM is unpowered or not functioning.
• If all CHARMs' LEDs are not showing a color,
check the power connections.
• If the LEDs on all the CHARMS on a baseplate
are not showing a color, check the connec-
tion to the baseplate.
• If the LED on one CHARM is not showing a
color, replace the CHARM.

Discrete CHARMs LEDs

The following table describes the meaning of the colors and patterns associated with the
two LEDs on the discrete CHARMs:

• DI NAMUR CHARM
• DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM
• DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM
• DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM
• DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM
• DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM
• DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM
• DO VAC isolated CHARM
• DO VAC high-side CHARM

196
 2036 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-21: Discrete CHARMs LEDs

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Green (continuous) The channel and CHARM status is good and the
CHARM is configured.
Green (flashing twice per second) The CHARM is not configured. If DeltaV Diag-
nostics displays BAD status for this CHARM, a
configuration error such as a configuration mis-
match, has occurred. If DeltaV Diagnostics dis-
plays GOOD status for the CHARM, the CHARM
has not been configured. In this case, configure
the CHARM in DeltaV Explorer.
Green (flashing ten times per second) A user has issued an identify CHARM command
from the DeltaV Diagnostics application. This is
not a fault and no action is required.
Red (continuous) No communications on the bus or no address.
• If this pattern is seen on an individual
CHARM, replace the CHARM.
• If this pattern is seen on a group of 12
CHARMs, ensure that the correct address
plug is installed.
• If this pattern is seen on all CHARMs, ensure
that the CHARM I/O card is functioning cor-
rectly.
Additionally, if this pattern is seen on all
CHARMs, the CIOC could be in simulate mode. If
the CIOC is in simulate mode, no corrective ac-
tion is required.
Red (flashing twice per second) Channel fault. Check wiring and associated field
device. If wiring and device are correct, replace
the CHARM.
Red (flashing ten times per second) Duplicate address. Check all CHARMs baseplates
for a duplicate address plug.

197
 2037 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-21: Discrete CHARMs LEDs (continued)

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Green then red flashing four times per second A CHARM fault (such as a bad address or a faulty
CHARM bus) exists that does not affect the
channel status.
• If this pattern is seen on an individual
CHARM, replace the CHARM.
• If this pattern is seen on a group of 12
CHARMs, ensure that the correct address
plug is installed.
• If this pattern is seen on all CHARMs, ensure
that the CHARM I/O card is functioning cor-
rectly.
Green and red alternating two times per second The CHARM is being upgraded or is in upgrade
mode.
Green then red flashing briefly once every 1.5 The CIOC has placed the CHARM in a failsafe
seconds (for output CHARMs only) state.
No colors The CHARM is unpowered or not functioning.
• If all CHARMs' LEDs have no color, check the
power connections.
• If the LEDs on all the CHARMs on a baseplate
have no color, check the connection to the
baseplate.
• If the LED on one CHARM has no color, re-
place the CHARM.
Yellow This is the channel state indication:
• Yellow (continuous)-The actual input value
or the intended output value is ON.
• Off-The actual input value or the intended
output value is OFF.

I/O Port LEDs

The CHARM I/O Carrier and WirelessHART I/O Carrier house a primary and secondary I/O
Port (IOP). The IOP consists of a control network port and a cascade port.

198
 2038 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Copper I/O Port

Control network
port LED

Cascade port
LED

Table 7-22: Control network port LEDs

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Flashing green The link is established and active Ethernet traffic
is being transmitted and received. This is the
normal operating condition.
Solid green The link is established, but no Ethernet traffic is
occurring. This indicates that the IOP is connec-
ted to a network switch, but may not be connec-
ted to a controller or ProfessionalPlus worksta-
tion. This typically occurs during initial installa-
tion when network connections are not yet
complete.
Off The IOP is not communicating on the network.
Verify that the:
• Network cable is properly connected
• IOP is properly seated in the carrier
• CIOC or WIOC is properly installed in the car-
rier
• CIOC or WIOC is properly powered
For redundant CIOCs or WIOCs, verify that the
ACN LEDs are flashing. If the LED remains Off af-
ter ensuring the items in the preceding list, re-
place the IOP.

Table 7-23: Cascade port LEDs

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Flashing green The link is established and active Ethernet traffic
is being transmitted and received. This is the
normal operating condition when the cascade
port is enabled.

199
 2039 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-23: Cascade port LEDs (continued)

LED color and pattern Description and corrective action

Solid green The link is established, but no Ethernet traffic is
occurring. This indicates that the cascade port is
enabled and connected to a network switch, but
may not be connected to a controller or Profes-
sionalPlus workstation. This typically occurs dur-
ing initial installations when network connec-
tions are not yet complete.
Off This is the normal operating condition when the
cascade port is disabled. When the cascade port
is enabled, the LED blinks green indicating the
normal operating condition. Use the CIOC or
WIOC Property page in DeltaV Explorer to ena-
ble the cascade port.

Controllers, power supplies - LEDs

Controller LEDs
Table 7-24: SD and SX controller LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the controller due to a possi-
ble line power problem. Check
the power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Red-On for one second fol- Controller went through a reset
lowed by all LEDs on for five due to an unrecoverable soft-
seconds. ware error. Contact technical
support.
Red (flashing) The controller is decommis-
sioned. Commission the con-
troller.
Active-On (green) Off Controller is a standby. Ensure
that the Standby LED is On.
Controller is decommissioned.
Commission the controller.

200
 2040 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-24: SD and SX controller LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Green (flashing) Controller is not configured.
Download the controller con-
figuration.
Standby-On (green) for redun- Green (flashing) Controller is not configured.
dant controllers Download the controller con-
Off for simplex controllers figuration.
Pri. CN–Yellow (flashing) Off Controller lacks active Ethernet
communications on the pri-
mary control network connec-
tion. Check the cable and hub
connections on the primary
control network
Sec. CN–Yellow (flashing) Off Controller lacks active Ethernet
communications on the secon-
dary control network connec-
tion. Check the cable and hub
connections on the secondary
control network.

System Power Supply LEDs

Table 7-25: System power supply (24 VDC) LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off Power is not supplied to unit
due to a possible line power
problem. Check bulk power
supply and connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (continuous) Outputs are outside of toler-
ance. Verify loading calcula-
tions.
Input is over voltage and the
unit shuts down. Check input
supply voltages.

201
 2041 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

DeltaV Smart Switches - LEDs

DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switch LEDs
Types of LEDs on the MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches

There are two types of LEDs on the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches: device status
LEDs that describe the status of the MD20 and MD30 base switches and display status LEDs
that describe the status of the ports on the media modules that plug into the base
switches.

Device status LEDs

Table 7-26: DeltaV MD20 and MD30 device status LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
P (Power)-On (green) Off Internal supply voltage is too
low.
P1 (Power 1)-On (green) Off Supply voltage 1 is less than 18
V.
P2 (Power 1)-On (green) Off Supply voltage 2 is less than 18
V.
LOCK-On: Off The device is unlocked.
• Green (continuous)–The
device is locked.
• Yellow (continuous)–The
device is temporarily un-
locked but will be locked af-
ter the lockdown timer has
expired.
• Green(flashing)–The device
is entering the lockdown
state.
RL1 (Relay 1)–Off. The signal Red (continuous) Signal contact is open; report-
contact is closed; not reporting ing an error.
an error. Yellow (continuous) Signal contact is open; the
manual setting is active.
RL2 (Relay 2)–Off. The signal Red (continuous) Signal contact is open; report-
contact is closed; not reporting ing an error.
an error. Yellow (continuous) Signal contact is open; the
manual setting is active.

202
 2042 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-26: DeltaV MD20 and MD30 device status LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
RUN-On: Off The device is in reset mode.
• Green (continuous)–The
device is ready for opera-
tion.
• Green (flashing)–The de-
vice is booting.
TEST-On: Off LED test not activated.
• Green(continuous)–LED
test activated.
ACA/Flash Access (green)–Dis-
plays the ACA flash access with
the Run LED.

Display status LEDs

Every DeltaV media module that plugs into an MD20 or MD30 base switch, has one LED
per port. The LED selected on the base switch determines the type of information
displayed about the media modules' ports. For example, if you select the L/D LED on the
base switch, the LEDs on the media modules display the connection status for the ports.
Press the Select button to cycle through the LEDs on the base switch.

Table 7-27: Display status LEDs on the MD base switches and meaning on the media
modules

Display status LED on the MD base switches Meaning on media module

L/D (Data/link status) • Ports glowing green–valid connection.
The port LEDs on the media modules display the • Ports not glowing green–no valid connec-
connection status. tion.
• Ports flashing green once a period–port is
switched to standby.
• Ports flashing green three times a period–
port is locked by the Smart Switch Com-
mand Center application.
• Ports flashing yellow–port is receiving data.
FDX (full duplex) • Ports glowing green–full duplex is active.
The port LEDs on the media modules display the • Ports not glowing green–half duplex is ac-
half duplex or full duplex connection status tive.
1000 (10/100/1000Mbit/sec) • Ports glowing green–100Mbit/sec is active.
The port LEDs on the media modules display the • Ports not glowing green–10Mbit/sec is ac-
transmission speed. tive.
• Ports glowing yellow–1000Mbit/sec is ac-
tive.

203
 2043 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-27: Display status LEDs on the MD base switches and meaning on the media
modules (continued)

Display status LED on the MD base switches Meaning on media module

AN (autonegotiation) • Ports glowing green–autonegotiation is ac-
The port LEDs on the media modules display the tive.
autonegotiation setting. • Ports not glowing green–autonegotiation is
inactive.
TP (twisted pair/fiber-optic) • Ports glowing green–twisted pair ports.
The port LEDs on the media modules display the • Ports glowing yellow–fiber-optic ports
media type.
PoE (Power over Ethernet) • Ports not glowing–No PoE port or PoE disa-
The port LEDs on the media modules display the bled.
Power over Ethernet status. • Ports glowing yellow–PoE port searching for
terminal device (PD); PoE status is searching.
• Ports glowing green–PoE port supplying ter-
minal device (PD); PoE status is delivering
power.

DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switch LEDs

Table 7-28: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switch LEDs

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
P (Power)-On Off Supply voltage is off or too low.
• Green (continuous)-The
supply voltages are on.
• Yellow (continuous)-Only
one supply voltage is on.
RUN-On: Off Device is in reset mode.
• Green (continuous)-The de-
vice is ready for operation.
• Green (flashing)-The device
is booting.
LOCK-On: Off The device is unlocked.
• Green (continuous)-The de-
vice is locked.
• Yellow (continuous)-The
device is temporarily un-
locked but will enter the
locked state after the lock-
down timer expires.
• Green (flashing)-The device
is entering the locked state.
FAULT-Off Red (continuous) Device is reporting an error.

204
 2044 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-28: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switch LEDs (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
LS (link status) Off No valid link or connection.
• Green (continuous)-Valid
link or connection.
• Green (flashing once per
second)-Port is in standby.
• Green (flashing three times
per second)-Port is locked.
DA (data): Off Port is not receiving data.
• Yellow (flashing)-Port is re-
ceiving data.

Wireless components - LEDs

WirelessHART I/O card LEDs
Table 7-29: LEDs on the WirelessHART I/O card

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Power-On (green) Off System power is not supplied
to the card due to a possible
line power problem. Check the
power connections.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Error-Off Red (flashing - slow) The card is decommissioned.
Commission the WirelessHART
I/O card (WIOC).
Red (flashing - fast) Check connection to the Smart
Wireless Field Link and power
cycle the WIOC.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Active-On (green) Off Card is decommissioned. Com-
mission the WirelessHART I/O
card.
Internal fault. Contact technical
support.
Green (flashing) Card is not configured. Down-
load the WIOC's configuration.

205
 2045 of 2474

LED descriptions for S-series hardware and CHARMs I/O

Table 7-29: LEDs on the WirelessHART I/O card (continued)

LED correct operating condi- Possible causes and correc-

tion Fault indication tive action
Standby-On (green) for redun- Green (flashing) Card is not configured. Down-
dant WirelessHART I/O cards load the WIOC's configuration.
Off for simplex WirelessHART I/
O cards
Pri. and Sec. ACN–Yellow Off For simplex WIOCs, Off could
(flashing) indicate that the WIOC lacks
active Ethernet communica-
tions. Check the cable and net-
work switch connections.
For redundant WIOCs, Off
could indicate that the I/O Port
is not properly seated or that
the I/O Port needs to be re-
placed.

206
 2046 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

8 The DeltaV Control Network

Topics covered in this chapter:
• DeltaV Control Network overview
• Category 5(e) Screened 4 Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable guidelines
• Fiber-optic cable guidelines
• Cable accessories specifications
• Building twisted pair cable assemblies
• DeltaV Smart Switches overview
• The management station
• Connecting a management station to the DeltaV Control Network
• DeltaV Controller Firewall
• Reserved DeltaV IP addresses
• Example networks with DeltaV Smart Switches

DeltaV Control Network overview

The DeltaV Control Network is an isolated Ethernet local area network (LAN) that provides
communication between DeltaV controllers and workstations. Cat 5(e) ScTP cable and
fiber-optic cable can be used in DeltaV Control Networks.

A DeltaV Control Network is dedicated to the DeltaV system; no other devices can be
attached to a DeltaV Control Network. The DeltaV Control Network has been designed to
be redundant for communications reliability. It uses primary and secondary
communication channels that are implemented with separate Ethernet NIC cards as well
as separate Ethernet switches for each channel.

A small DeltaV system can contain one ProfessionalPLUS and one controller. An Ethernet
switch is not required to connect a single ProfessionalPLUS and controller. For small
systems, a shielded crossover cable with shielded RJ45 connectors at both ends can be
used so that the controller's RJ45 connector is properly grounded. For large DeltaV systems
with multiple workstations and controllers, Ethernet switches such as the DeltaV Smart
Switches can be used.

Category 5(e) Screened 4 Twisted Pair (ScTP)

cable guidelines
Certain requirements exist for using Cat5(e) ScTP cables in a DeltaV Control Network.

Cable that meets Category 5 specifications can be purchased from Emerson Process
Management or directly from the manufacturer, CommScope. Visit the CommScope
website for the most current specifications for Category 5(e) ScTP cable.

207
 2047 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

For Cat5(e) ScTP cables ensure that:

• All cables are made from screened Category 5 cable with a maximum length of 100
m (328 ft).
• Straight-through cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to EIA/TIA 568B pin-
outs at both ends.
• Crossover cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to 568B pinouts on one end
and 568A pinouts on the opposite end.
• Cables used to cascade switches have an unshielded connector on one end and a
shielded connector on the opposite end.
• Unshielded RJ45 connectors are used at all workstation connections.
• Shielded crossover cable with shielded RJ45 connectors are used at all controller
connections and all switch connections to nodes.

Fiber-optic cable guidelines

Fiber-optic cables can be used in DeltaV Control Networks when distances exceed 2
kilometers and when protection from electromagnetic noise interference, near lightning
strikes, and ground isolation is required.

For fiber-optic cables, use the cable and connector type specified by the equipment
manufacturer for the fiber-optic ports on their equipment. The type of fiber-optic cable
required could be multimode or single-mode and depends on the equipment's port
specifications, the site's physical layout, and the distance between fiber-optic ports from
device to device. The equipment manufacturer also specifies a fiber-optic loss budget. The
acceptable loss per kilometer for the fiber-optic cable can be determined from the loss
budget so that the overall cable loss does not exceed the equipment's loss budget. The
loss budget must include all fiber-optic splices and fiber-optic connector losses from end
to end.

Following are some guidelines for using fiber-optic cable in a DeltaV Control Network:

• Multimode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 100mb/s100BASE-FX fiber-optic

communications for up to 2 kilometers and either 50/125 micron or 62.5/125
micron multimode fiber can be used depending upon the equipment
manufacturer's specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to the manufacturer's
specifications for cable type and loss budget.
• Single mode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 1000mb/s 1000BASE-SX (gigabit)
fiber-optic communications for distances up to approximately 500 meters and
50/125 micron or 62.5/125 micron multimode fiber can be used depending upon
the equipment manufacturer's specification for the fiber-optic ports. Single mode
fiber-optic cable can also be used for 100BASE-FX communications. Refer to the
manufacturer's specifications for cable type and loss budget.
• Multimode fiber-optic cable has a Modal Bandwidth specification (MHz/km) which is
a distance limiting factor for gigabit communications on multimode fiber. Refer to
the manufacturer's specifications for distances supported for gigabit
communications over multimode fiber.

208
 2048 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

• Fiber-optic cables are terminated with ST, SC, MTRJ, or LC connectors depending
upon the physical port that is used on the fiber-optic device. Refer to the
manufacturer's specifications for the fiber-optic port type used on their equipment.
• All fiber-optic links should be tested for attenuation (light loss) with an optical power
meter. The entire link, including all assembled cables, connectors and splices from
end to end should be measured. This measurement should not exceed the
equipment manufacturer's loss budget specification and at least a 3dB margin
should be left.

CAUTION!
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all cables meet the
specifications listed in this document.

Cable accessories specifications

Specifications for connectors, terminating tools, boots, tape, and cable markers used to
install a DeltaV Control Network.

Table 8-1: Cable accessories specifications

Item Specification
Connectors Category 5, 8-position RJ45 plug connectors (1)
Terminating tool Hand or automatic machine tool for 8-position
connectors (1)
Boots (color-coded) • Yellow - primary control network cable(1)
• Black - secondary control network cable (1)
Vinyl plastic tape • Yellow
• Black

Note
Color marking tape also can be used.

Cable markers Self laminating vinyl film (1)

Building twisted pair cable assemblies

Straight-through and crossover twisted pair cable assemblies are used in DeltaV Control
Networks. Shielded, metal-enclosed and isolated or unshielded, plastic-enclosed RJ45
connectors are used with both types of assemblies.

(1) Available from Emerson Process Management

209
 2049 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Types of cable assemblies

You will need to build four types of cable assembly combinations for a DeltaV Control
Network:

• Crossover cable with one shielded end (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and one
isolated end (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
• Crossover cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)
• Straight-through cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and
one end isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
• Straight-through cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)

The control network examples in this manual contain notes that indicate where metal-
enclosed and plastic-enclosed RJ45 connectors and straight-through and crossover cable
are required. These examples will help you to determine the correct combination of
shielded and unshielded RJ45 connectors for your DeltaV Control Network.

When building cable assemblies with shielded and unshielded connectors, always refer to
the connector and tool manufacturer's latest assembly instructions and application
specifications. These specifications show the correct jacket and shield preparation length
for the specific connectors being used.

Build an unshielded plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector

Use unshielded plastic-enclosed RJ45 connectors at the workstations in a DeltaV Control
Network.

Figure 8-1: Unshielded plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector

Plastic-enclosed
RJ45 connector

Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Boot

Load bar

1. Slide the boot onto the cable.

2. Load the load bar with eight inner cable conductors.
3. Insert the load bar/cable assembly into the connector housing and crimp it.

210
 2050 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

4. Slide the boot over the assembly for additional strain relief.

Build a shielded metal-enclosed RJ45 connector

Use shielded metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors at the switches in a DeltaV Control Network.

Figure 8-2: Shielded metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors

Metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector

Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Drain wire
Shielding
Boot
Load bar

1. Slide the boot onto the cable.

2. Fold back the cable shield and drain wire.
3. Load the load bar with eight inner cable conductors.
4. Insert the load bar/cable assembly into the connector housing and crimp it.
5. Slide the boot over the assembly for additional strain relief.

Build straight-through cable

Build straight-through cable with the same pin outs on both ends of the cable.

211
 2051 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Figure 8-3: Pin outs for both ends of straight-through cable

Build crossover cable

Build crossover cable with different pin outs on each end of the cable.

Figure 8-4: Pin outs for each end of crossover cable

DeltaV Smart Switches overview

DeltaV Smart Switches are used to construct DeltaV Control Networks according to the
IEEE 802.3 Local and Metropolitan Area Networks standards.

There are three families of DeltaV Smart switches:

• DeltaV MD base Smart Switches and media modules

• DeltaV RM100 base Smart Switches and media modules
• DeltaV FP20 8-port Smart Switches

212
 2052 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

DeltaV Smart Switches are intended for plug and play use with a DeltaV system as
unmanaged switches. No configuration is necessary unless you want to use the Smart
Switch Command Center (SSCC) to manage the switches (commission and decommission,
lock switches and ports, and so on). If you do not use SSCC, or you need to perform some
initial switch setup such as configuring an IP address before SSCC is available, you can use
the switch’s command line interface by connecting a terminal or a Management station
running a terminal emulator to the switch's serial port. A serial interface cable is required
to connect the switch’s serial port to the Management station. The serial interface cable
can be purchased separately from Emerson Process Management or you can build the
cable assembly. Once the switch has an IP address you can access it from a Telnet session
or monitor it from the web browser interface.

Refer to the topics on DeltaV Smart Switches in the System Administration and Maintenance
manual in Books Online for information on the Smart Switch Command Center, for
information on configuring, monitoring, and accessing the switches with Telnet, and for
information on downloading Java software.

Before installing and using DeltaV Smart Switches and media modules, refer to the
important safety information in the System Administration and Maintenance manual in
Books Online.

Important information about using uplinks between

DeltaV Smart Switches and third party switches
Some third party, fiber-optic switches used in DeltaV Control Networks operate in 100mb/
s half duplex mode. These switches must be reconfigured to operate at 100mb/s full
duplex if connected to DeltaV Smart Switches.

With the exception of the fiber-optic SFP transceivers, all other fiber-optic ports on the
DeltaV Smart Switches operate at 100mb/s full duplex. When a fiber-optic uplink
connection between a DeltaV Smart Switch to a third party switch is used, it is important
to determine if the other switch's fiber-optic port is also configured to operate at 100mb/s
full duplex. Some switches on DeltaV networks, in particular some 3Com switches, operate
in 100mb/s half duplex mode. These switches must be reconfigured to operate at
100mb/s full duplex. You must reconfigure the third party switch before making the fiber
optic connection between the two switches or a duplex mismatch will occur resulting in
unpredictable communications. Be sure to save the configuration into permanent memory
or the next time the switch is rebooted the old configuration may restart. Additionally, the
third party switch may require a reboot after reconfiguring the switch and saving the
configuration. Refer to the switch manufacturer's documentation for the proper method
of making these changes. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System
manual (part number D800001X192) for information on third party switches that can be
used with a DeltaV system.

Do not connect an SFP module's gigabit port to a 100mb/s port of any switch. The SFP
transceivers do not autosense speed and must be connected to a port with the same
configured speed. That is, connect gigabit ports to gigabit ports and 100mb/s ports to
100mb/s ports. Additionally, all DeltaV Smart Switch twisted pair ports are configured to
autosense speed to 10mb/s or 100mb/s or 1000mb/s and autonegotiate to half or full
duplex depending on what they are connected to. Never connect a DeltaV Smart Switch's

213
 2053 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

twisted pair port to another type of switch with a hard-set twisted pair port such as a port
that is hard set to 100mb/s full duplex. This will cause a duplex mismatch and
unpredictable communications issues.

Pin outs on the serial interface cable used with DeltaV

Smart Switches
Though most switch management tasks can be performed from the Smart Switch
Command Center (SCCC), you may need a serial interface cable to connect the switch to a
terminal for some tasks such as changing passwords. The serial interface cable can be
purchased separately from Emerson Process Management or you can build the cable
assembly using the pin outs shown in the following figure.

Figure 8-5: Serial interface cable pin outs

RJ11 DB9
CTS 1
Pin 5 n.c. 2 2
Pin 6 TX 3 3
Pin 8
Pin 1 GND 4
RX 5 5
Pin 1 RTS 6

DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches

Installation notes

• The MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches consist of a base switch and backplane.
The base switch functions as the power supply and the backplane houses the
switching circuits.
• The MD media modules plug into the slots on the backplane and provide the
interfaces to the DeltaV Control Network in a variety of media types.
• All media modules are hot pluggable.

214
 2054 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Port information

Table 8-2: Port information for the DeltaV MD20/30 Base Smart Switches

Number and types of

Model ports Image
• MD20-8 Up to 8, 10/100mb/s Slots for media modules
• MD20-8-ES(2) Ethernet ports with addi- LOCK
P P1 | P2
RL 1 | RL2

tional modules
L/D AN | T P
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-8

Base switch Ground screw

• MD20-16 Up to 16, 10/100mb/s Slots for media modules

• MD20-16-ES Ethernet ports with addi- LOCK
P P1 | P2
RL 1 | RL2

tional modules
L/D AN | T P
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-16

Base switch Ground screw

• MD20-24(3) Up to 24, 10/100mb/s 2 slot expansion

• MD20-24-ES Ethernet ports with addi- Slots for media modules backplane
tional modules
P P1 | P2
LOCK RL 1 | RL2

L/D AN | T P
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-16

Base switch Ground screw

(2) The ES versions of the switches have an extended temperature range and conformal coating.
(3) The MD20 16-port switch can be expanded to 24 ports with a two slot expansion backplane as shown in the image in the table or the 24
port switch can be purchased as a single product.

215
 2055 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Table 8-2: Port information for the DeltaV MD20/30 Base Smart Switches (continued)

Number and types of

Model ports Image
• MD30-8 • Up to 8, 10/100mb/s Gigabit
slot Slots for media modules
• MD30-8-ES Ethernet ports with P P1 | P2

additional modules LOCK

L/D
RL 1 | RL2

AN | T P

• 2, gigabit ports
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-8

Base switch Ground screw

• MD30-16 • Up to 16, 10/100mb/s Gigabit

slot Slots for media modules
• MD30-16-ES Ethernet ports with P P1 | P2

additional modules LOCK

L/D
RL 1 | RL2

AN | T P

• 2, gigabit ports
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-16

Base switch Ground screw

• MD30-24(4) • Up to 24, 10/100mb/s Gigabit 2 slot expansion

slot Slots for media modules
• MD30-24-ES Ethernet ports with backplane
P P1 | P2

additional modules LOCK

L/D
RL 1 | RL2

AN | T P

• 2, gigabit ports FDX

1000
RUN
6|3
5|2
TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-16

Base switch Ground screw

Media modules used with the DeltaV MD20 and MD30

Base Smart Switches
Installation notes

• The media modules used with the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches plug into
the slots on the base switches' backplanes.

(4) The MD30 16-port switch can be expanded to 24 ports with a two slot expansion backplane as shown in the image in the table or the 24
port switch can be purchased as a single product.

216
 2056 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Port information

Table 8-3: Port information for the media modules used with the DeltaV MD20/30
Base Smart Switches

Media module Number and types of ports Port layout

• MD4-2TX/SFP • 2, gigabit (only) multimode
• MD4-2TX/SFP-ES(5) fiber SFP slots
Port 1
• 2, gigabit (only), RJ45 twisted
pair ports Port 2

These media modules install in

the gigabit slot to the left of the
MD30 Base Switch. Port 1 Port 2
Either the twisted pair port or the Connector end
fiber SFP slots can be used. Both
cannot be used at the same time.
• MD2-2FXM2 2, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet
• MD2-2FXM2-ES ports over multimode fiber (SC
connectors) Port 1

Port 2

Connector end

• MD2-2FXS2 2, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet

• MD2-2FXS2-ES ports over multimode fiber (SC
connectors) Port 1

Port 2

Connector end

• MD2-4TX1 4, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, fast

• MD2-4TX1-ES Ethernet twisted pair ports (RJ45
Port 1 Port 2
connectors)

Port 3 Port 4

Connector end

(5) The ES versions of the media modules have an extended temperature range and conformal coating.

217
 2057 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Table 8-3: Port information for the media modules used with the DeltaV MD20/30
Base Smart Switches (continued)

Media module Number and types of ports Port layout

• MD2-4TX1-POE 4, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (only),
Port 1
• MD2-4TX1-POE-ES fast Ethernet twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors) with Power Port 2

over Ethernet (PoE) (6) Port 3

Pins 4 and 5 and 7 and 8 provide
Port 4
power over Ethernet to the at-
tached devices. Connect a 48 48 VDC
VDC external power supply to Connector end
the 3-pin power terminal on this
module to power it. Use only the
Hirshmann power supply model
RPS60/48 EEC.
• MD3-2FXM2/2TX1 • 2, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet
• MD3-2FXM2/2TX1-ES over multimode fiber ports Port 1
(SC connectors)
Port 2
• 2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
twisted pair ports (RJ45 con- Port 3

nectors) Port 4

Connector end

• MD3-2FXS2/2TX1 • 2, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet

• MD3-2FXS2/2TX1-ES over single mode fiber ports Port 1
(SC connectors)
Port 2
• 2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
twisted pair ports (RJ45 con- Port 3

nectors) Port 4

Connector end

• MD3-4FXM2 4, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet over

• MD3-4FXM2-ES multimode fiber ports (SC con-
Port 1

nectors)
Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Connector end

(6) This module is not a standard product. It is available from Emerson Sure Services.

218
 2058 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Table 8-3: Port information for the media modules used with the DeltaV MD20/30
Base Smart Switches (continued)

Media module Number and types of ports Port layout

• MD3-4FXM4 4, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet over
• MD3-4FXM4-ES multimode fiber ports (ST con-
Port 1

nectors)
Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Connector end

• MD3-4FXS2 4, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet over

• MD3-4FXS2-ES single mode fiber ports (SC con-
Port 1

nectors)
Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Connector end

• MD3-2FXM4/2TX1 • 2, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet

• MD3-2FXM4/2TX1-ES over multimode fiber ports Port 1
(ST connectors)
Port 2
• 2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
twisted pair ports (RJ45 con- Port 3

nectors) Port 4

Connector end

• MD3-1FXS2/3TX1 • 1, 100BASE-FX fast Ethernet

• MD3-1FXS2/3TX1-ES over single mode fiber port Port 1
(SC connectors)
Port 2
• 3, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
twisted pair ports (RJ45 con- Port 3

nectors) Port 4

Connector end

Power specifications for the DeltaV MD20 and MD30

Base Smart Switches
Installation notes

• As shown in the figure, a detachable screw terminal block is used to supply the
required power to the switches.

219
 2059 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

• A ground screw on the left side of the switch's mounting chassis connects to an
instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground for the switch and device
communication cables.

Power specifications

Table 8-4: Power specifications for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches

Item Specification
Input voltage +18 to +32 VDC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if:
• Power supply fails
• Internal voltage supply fails
• Self-test failure occurs
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail.

Figure 8-6: Power connectors on the bottom of the MD20 and MD30 switches

Serial port

USB port

Dip switch
(not used) Power 1
1 = +24 VDC
1 2 3 4
Power 1 2 = 0 VDC
connectors 3,4 = Relay 1

Power 2 Power 2
connectors
4 3 2 1
1 = +24 VDC
2 = 0 VDC
3,4 = Relay 2

DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches

Installation notes

• The RM100 Base Smart Switches can be mounted on a 19 inch rack or on a wall. If
the switch is mounted on a 19 inch rack, be sure to install sliding mounting rails to
properly hold the switch.
• The RM100 Base Smart Switches consist of a base switch and, depending upon the
switch type, up to two media modules that plug into the base switch and provide
the media options.

220
 2060 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

• All of the 8-port and SFP media modules are hot-pluggable; however, when a
twisted pair media module is replaced with a fiber-optic media module, the switch
performs a warm restart that temporarily disrupts communications.
• The RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power.

Port information

Table 8-5: Port information for the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches

Model Number and types of ports Image

RM100-Base Smart • 2, 10/100/1000mb/s twisted pair Signal contact
USB Port Ethernet ports
Sockets for media modules

Switch ports with RJ45 connectors v.24

Network Switch RM100
RM100 Base Module

• 8, fast Ethernet ports

1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK

• 2, 100/1000mb/s SFP-based ports

P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

• 2 sockets for media modules for an Twisted pair

SFP ports

additional 8 or 16 ports. ports

Either the 10/100/1000mb/s twisted

pair ports or the SFP ports can be used.
Both port types cannot be used at the
same time.
RM100-Base Smart • 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports Signal contact
USB Port Ethernet ports
Sockets for media modules

Switch-RP • 8, fast Ethernet ports v.24

Network Switch RM100
RM100 Base Module

• 2, 100/1000mb/s SFP-based ports

1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK

• 2 sockets for media modules for an

P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

additional 8 or 16 ports. Twisted pair

SFP ports

ports

Redundant input pow- Redundant power Standard power

supply 100-240 VAC supply 100-240 VAC
er

The standard power supply alone supplies power to

the RM100-Base Smart Switch-RP. The redundant
power supply automatically becomes active if the
standard supply fails.
RM100-8TX • 8, 10/100mb/s twisted pair ports Signal contact
USB Port 10/100Mbit TP ports
with RJ45 connectors v.24
Network Switch RM100 1.1
RM100 Base Module

• 2, 10/100/1000mb/s twisted pair

2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK

ports with RJ45 connectors

P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

SFP ports
• 2, 100/1000mb/s SFP-based ports 10/100/1000Mbit
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no TP ports

additional media modules can be added

to it.
Either the 10/100/1000mb/s twisted
pair ports or the SFP ports can be used.
Both port types cannot be used at the
same time.

221
 2061 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Table 8-5: Port information for the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches (continued)

Model Number and types of ports Image

RM100-24TX • 24, 10/100mb/s twisted pair ports Signal contact
USB Port
10/100Mbit TP ports
with RJ45 connectors v.24
Network Switch RM100 1.1
RM100 Base Module

• 2, 10/100/1000mb/s twisted pair

2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK

ports with RJ45 connectors

P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

SPF ports
• 2, 100/1000mb/s SFP-based ports 10/100/1000Mbit
TP ports
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no
additional media modules can be added
to it.
Either the 10/100/1000mb/s twisted
pair ports or the SFP ports can be used.
Both port types cannot be used at the
same time.

Connection capacities for the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart

Switches
Table 8-6: Number of slots and connectable network segments for the DeltaV RM100
Base Smart Switches

RM100 Base Switch

Item and Switch-RP RM100-8TX RM100-24 TX
Number of slots for 10/ 2 0 2
100mb/s media mod-
ules.(7)
Number of ports for 2 2 2
gigabit connections.
Maximum number of 24 8 24
connectable 10/
100mb/s network seg-
ments.(8)
Maximum number of 2 2 2
connectable gigabit
network segments.

(7) Up to two modules can be installed in any combination of fiber and twisted pair for the RM100 Base Smart Switch and Base Smart Switch-
RP.
(8) Up to 24 ports when all slots are filled.

222
 2062 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Media modules used with the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart

Switches
Table 8-7: Port information for the media modules used with the RM100 Base Switches

Number and types of

Model ports Port layout
RM100-EM-8TX 8, twisted pair ports with
RJ45 connectors; auto-
negotiates to 10/
100mb/s; half or full du-
plex
RM100-EM-8MM-FX 8, 100mb/s multimode,
full duplex, fiber ports
with dual SC connectors

RM100-EM-8SM-FX 8, 100mb/s single mode Same physical layout as RM100-EM-8MM-FX

fiber ports with dual SC
connectors
RM100-EM-8SFP 8, 100mb/s full duplex
single and multimode
SFP slots

Note
Gigabit SFP transceivers
cannot be used in these
slots.

Power specifications for the DeltaV RM100 Base Smart

Switches
Table 8-8: Power specifications for DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches

Item Specification
Input voltage 100 - 240 VAC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if:
• Power supply fails
• Internal voltage supply fails
• Self-test failure occurs
Input current 0.4 - 0.2 A

223
 2063 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Figure 8-7: Alarm relays on the RM100 Base Smart Switches

RM100 Base Module
Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

Fault

To any alarm
input or DI

DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches

Installation notes

• DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches have eight ports.

• Two ports on each switch are fiber uplink, twisted pair uplink, or a combination of
fiber and twisted pair uplink ports. The remaining 6 ports are 10/100mb/s twisted
pair.

Port information

Table 8-9: Port information for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches

Model Number and types of ports Port layout

• FP20-6TX2TX 8, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted pair Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
connectors
• FP20-6TX2TX-ES(9) ports RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
LEDs

USB USB port

24 V
V.24

1 2

3 4

8 twisted
5 6
pair ports

Ground 7 8

screw

(9) The ES version of the switches have an extended temperature range and conformal coating.

224
 2064 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Table 8-9: Port information for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches (continued)

Model Number and types of ports Port layout

• FP20-6TX1MM1TX • 6, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
connectors
• FP20-6TX1MM1TX-ES pair ports LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
LEDs
Fiber uplink
• 1, 100mb/s multimode fiber port
1

USB USB port

uplink port (SC connector); 24 V
full duplex
V.24

• 1, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted

pair uplink port
1 2

Twisted pair DA

uplink port 2

LS 3 4 Twisted pair
ports
Ground 5 6

screw

• FP20-6TX1SM1TX • 6, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted Network Switch

FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
connectors
• FP20-6TX1SM1TX-ES pair ports LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
LEDs
Fiber uplink
• 1, 100mb/s single mode fi- port
1

USB USB port

ber uplink port (SC connec- 24 V
tor);full duplex
V.24

• 1, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted

pair uplink port
1 2

Twisted pair DA

uplink port 2

LS 3 4 Twisted pair
ports
Ground 5 6

screw

• FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX • 6, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted Network Switch

FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
connectors
• FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX-ES pair ports LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
LEDs
Fiber uplink
• 1, 100mb/s single mode fi- port
1

USB USB port

ber, long haul uplink port (SC 24 V
connector); full duplex
V.24

• 1, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted

pair uplink port
1 2

Twisted pair DA

uplink port 2

LS 3 4 Twisted pair
ports
Ground 5 6

screw

• FP20-6TX2MM • 6, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted Network Switch

FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
• FP20-6TX2MM-ES pair ports LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
connectors
LEDs
Fiber uplink
• 2, 100mb/s multimode fiber port
1

USB USB port

uplink ports (SC connectors); 24 V
full duplex
V.24

LS DA

1 2

Fiber uplink
port
2
3 4 Twisted pair
ports
Ground 5 6

screw

225
 2065 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Table 8-9: Port information for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches (continued)

Model Number and types of ports Port layout

• FP20-6TX2SM • 6, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
• FP20-6TX2SM-ES pair ports LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
connectors
LEDs
Fiber uplink
• 2, 100mb/s single mode fi- port
1

USB USB port

ber uplink ports (SC connec- 24 V
tors); full duplex
V.24

LS DA

1 2

Fiber uplink
port
2
3 4 Twisted pair
ports
Ground 5 6

screw

• FP20-6TX2SMLH • 6, 10/100mb/s RJ45 twisted Network Switch

FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)
Power/relay
• FP20-6TX2SMLH-ES pair ports LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
connectors
LEDs
Fiber uplink
• 2, 100mb/s single mode fi- port
1

USB USB port

ber, long haul uplink ports 24 V
(SC connectors); full duplex
V.24

LS DA

1 2

Fiber uplink
port
2
3 4 Twisted pair
ports
Ground 5 6

screw

Power specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches

Table 8-10: Power specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches

Item Specification
Input voltage • 9.6 - 60 VDC
• 18 - 30 VAC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if:
• Power supply fails
• Internal voltage supply fails
• Self-test failure occurs
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail. A rack kit is
available.

226
 2066 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Alarm relays

Figure 8-8: Blowup of alarm relays on the FP20 Smart Switch

FAULT
To any alarm Fault To any alarm
Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
input or DI input or DI

P FAULT
RUN LOCK

USB
24 VDC 24 VDC
0 VDC
V.24 0 VDC

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

The management station

A management station is a qualified PC that is user-installed with web-based software to
run DeltaV Smart Switch management software. A PC is qualified when it has been
certified for use with the DeltaV system.

Qualified PCs for use as management stations can be ordered from Emerson Process
Management; however, Emerson Process Management does not install the switch
management software. Users must install the switch management software on the
management station. Switch management software and DeltaV Controller Firewall
management software are supported only on management stations, not on DeltaV
workstations.

If a management station connected to the DeltaV Control Network is also connected to

another network for plant area access outside of the DeltaV system, it is imperative that
the management station is properly maintained with the latest Microsoft security patches
and virus software. This ensures that the management station does not become infected
with viruses that could affect the operation of the DeltaV control system equipment. Like
other DeltaV stations, the management station's outside network connection, which is
usually a third NIC card in the PC, must be isolated via a router to other local area networks
and a firewall to the wide area network or internet. If you do not have the resources or
expertise to connect to the outside world using a properly configured router and firewall,
then do not attach the management station to the DeltaV Control Network and other
networks outside the DeltaV control system. This way, the management station will have
the same protection as the ProfessionalPLUS and Operator Stations.

227
 2067 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

A TFTP server application can be installed on the management station. A TFTP server can
be used to flash Ethernet switches or archive Ethernet switch configurations. Do not
confuse a management station with a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
station that contains additional network management software. The management station
is a basic PC with a web browser that can access DeltaV Smart Switches using its IP address
and is capable of displaying graphics, switch network statistics, bar and line graphs, and
firewall logs.

Emerson Process Management cannot be responsible for the operation of a DeltaV system
if these requirements for a management station are not strictly followed.

Related Links
Connecting a management station to the DeltaV Control Network on page 228

Connecting a management station to the

DeltaV Control Network
Connect the management station to the primary and secondary DeltaV Control Networks
with Cat 5(e)shielded twisted pair cable. This enables the management station to access
any DeltaV Smart Switch on the network and creates one central location for switch
management.

Qualified Ethernet cables must be used to connect a management station to the DeltaV
Control Network. When considering cable shielding, treat the management station like a
DeltaV device.

The Management station can be connected to a switch through the management station's
communication port and the switch's console port. The switch's console port is a rear-
facing port at a low speed serial connection. This port is used to set up the switch for telnet
and web management and to give the switch an IP address, name, and password
protection. Once the switch has an IP address, the serial port connection can be
disconnected and the switch can be managed from anywhere on the network using the
management station's web browser or telnet. Optionally, the serial connection can be kept
intact and the link can be used to observe network statistics, configure ports, and save
switch data to the management station.

DeltaV Controller Firewall

The DeltaV Controller Firewall is designed to protect DeltaV controllers from Denial of
Service (DoS) attacks originating from DeltaV workstations or other computers on the
DeltaV Control Network.

Important
The DeltaV system requires a specific hardware and software version of the firewall and a special
firewall configuration that includes the packet inspection rules and packet rate limits that have been
tested with the DeltaV system. DeltaV Controller Firewalls ordered from Emerson Process

228
 2068 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Management are shipped with the supported software and are pre-configured to operate properly
with the DeltaV system. To ensure that you have the proper firewall configuration and the correct
hardware and software versions, you must purchase the firewall through normal Emerson channels.

Installation notes

• Connect the required 24 VDC system power to the DeltaV Controller Firewall
through the detachable screw terminal block. The firewall can use the same system
power supply as the controllers. The terminal block also contains a set of normally
closed, potential-free relay contacts to monitor the firewall.
• Install the DeltaV Controller Firewall close to the controllers on the DIN rail. To more
tightly control physical access to the firewall, it can be installed on a DIN rail with a
24 VDC power supply in the equipment room.
• Connect the ground screw to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground
for the controller and firewall communications cables.
• Connect only DeltaV workstations to the 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled
Workstations. Typically, the workstations are connected to a managed switch and
the switch is connected to the firewall's workstation port. For controllers that are
distributed over wider geographic areas, consider using a firewall on a one-to-one
basis with each controller. This is a more secure arrangement because it eliminates
the possibility of open switch ports on the controller side.
• Connect DeltaV controllers to the 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Controllers .
Typically, the controllers are connected to a managed switch and the switch is
connected to the firewall's controller port.
• Install the DeltaV Controller Firewall on the primary and secondary control networks
to provide protection on both access ports of the controllers. Among the things to
consider when determining the best location in which to install the DeltaV
Controller Firewall are:
- Power and grounding requirements
- Cable shielding requirements
- Securing access to the firewall

Specifications

Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC
Input current 400 mA (max)
Twisted pair ports: controller (protected) and 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet
workstation (unprotected)
Cable type Category 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP)
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Configurable to opened if:
• Redundant power supply fails
• Cables on either or both ports are discon-
nected
• Internal fault occurs
• Self-Test fails

229
 2069 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Item Specification
Controllers supported 8
If more than 8 controllers require firewall pro-
tection, add more firewalls in parallel to share
the communications load.
Workstations supported All combinations of workstations up to normal
DeltaV limits for workstations. Refer to the Sys-
tem Capacities table in DeltaV Books Online for
complete information on workstation limits
Mounting DIN rail. The firewall can be mounted on the
same DIN rail as the controller.

Connectors on the firewall

Figure 8-9: DeltaV Controller Firewall connections

Controller Firewall
Power/
Relay
connectors
P1 2 FAULT Status LEDs
LS/DA STATUS
1 2 V.24
R Reset button

Controllers
Controller port

Workstation
port
Workstations
FAULT
+24V (P1)

+24V (P2)

Serial port
0V
0V

(not used)

V.24

Ground screw

230
 2070 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Reserved DeltaV IP addresses

The DeltaV system automatically assigns IP addresses to the ProfessionalPLUS, Operator
and Application stations, and controllers. If Network Time Protocol servers are used, they
must be assigned specific IP addresses. Reserved IP addresses can be used for other
equipment such as switches, domain controllers, management stations, and so on.

IP addresses for Network Time Protocol servers

If the NTP server is a DeltaV workstation, it is automatically assigned an IP address. If you

use an external Network Time Protocol (NTP) server, you must assign it the following IP
addresses:
• Primary NTP server on the primary network: 10.4.128.1
• Backup NTP server on the primary network:10.4.128.2
• Primary NTP server on the secondary network:10.8.128.1
• Backup NTP server on the secondary network:10.8.128.2

IP addresses reserved for other equipment

Reserved primary IP addresses Reserved secondary IP addresses

10.4.128.41 10.8.128.41
10.4.128.42 10.8.128.42
10.4.128.43 10.8.128.43
10.4.128.44 10.8.128.44
10.4.128.45 10.8.128.45
10.4.128.46 10.8.128.46
10.4.128.47 10.8.128.47
10.5.128.16 10.9.128.16
10.5.128.17 10.9.128.17
10.5.128.18 10.9.128.18
10.5.128.19 10.9.128.19
10.5.128.20 10.9.128.20
10.5.128.21 10.9.128.21
10.5.128.22 10.9.128.22
10.5.128.23 10.9.128.23
10.5.128.24 10.9.128.24
10.5.128.25 10.9.128.25
10.5.128.26 10.9.128.26
10.5.128.27 10.9.128.27
10.5.128.28 10.9.128.28
10.5.128.29 10.9.128.29
10.5.128.30 10.9.128.30

231
 2071 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Reserved primary IP addresses Reserved secondary IP addresses

10.5.128.31 10.9.128.31
10.5.128.32 10.9.128.32
10.5.128.33 10.9.128.33
10.5.128.34 10.9.128.34
10.5.128.35 10.9.128.35
10.5.128.36 10.9.128.36
10.5.128.37 10.9.128.37
10.5.128.38 10.9.128.38
10.5.128.39 10.9.128.39
10.5.128.40 10.9.128.40
10.5.128.41 10.9.128.41
10.5.128.42 10.9.128.42
10.5.128.43 10.9.128.43
10.5.128.44 10.9.128.44
10.5.128.45 10.9.128.45
10.5.128.46 10.9.128.46
10.5.128.47 10.9.128.47

232
 2072 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Example networks with DeltaV Smart Switches

Twisted pair network with DeltaV RM100 and FP20
switches with twisted pair uplinks

Figure 8-10: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 switches in a twisted pair network with twisted pair uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

7 8 7 8

1,2,12 To additional 1,2,12 To additional

FP20 switch FP20 switch

3,12

11
FP20-6TX2TX
10 11 10
Primary Secondary

Shield To additional Shield

Ground 8,6 Ground 8,6
1,2,12 FP20 switch
5 5
To additional
FP20 switch
1,2,12

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted
Pair cable is required between switches.

233
 2073 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-en-
closed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 con-
nector on the other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link
can be placed on either switch.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the control-
ler’s RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to
the controller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and
the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is con-
nected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 con-
nector on both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops,
build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on
one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end.
The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the
switch and not on the PC.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a
suitable shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair
Ethernet shielded connectors.
6 The type of ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have 8 10/100mb/s twisted pair ports and any
number of them can be used for uplinks to other switches. Other uplink port
types are available in fixed hardware configurations. SFP ports are not availa-
ble on this switch and this switch has no gigabit capable ports.
7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000mb/s uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for
long distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in
any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information
for the available SFP transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to autosense speed, autonegotiate du-
plex, and autodetect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the
twisted pair switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communica-
tions failures, could occur. Always allow the switch to autosense speed and
autonegotiate duplex. All unused ports on the switch can be deactivated
(locked down) by the Smart Switch Command Center (SSCC) after all initial
connections are made to the switch. If additional controllers or workstations
need to be connected to unused ports after the initial lock down, an addition-
al software command from the SSCC is required to unlock the ports. After the
final connections are made, the lock down command should be reissued to
the switch to lock down any remaining unused ports. Once the ports are in a
lock down state, only the original device can communicate on its original
port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area,
use any of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to pro-
vide ample performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mb/s links
can also be used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for sin-
gle devices on the edge of the network such as controllers and workstations
that require much less bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

234
 2074 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for
occasional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100mb/s twisted pair link.

Twisted pair network with DeltaV RM100 and FP20

switches with SFP and fiber uplinks

Figure 8-11: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with SFP and fiber-optic
uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,13

To additional
RM100 switch 3,13

9,12 9,12 To additional

RM100 switch
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5 7
RM100-EM-8TX Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7 RM100
Primary Secondary
FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2

8 7 8
7

1,2,13 14 1,2,13 14
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch

6 6 3,13

11
FP20 FP20
11
10 10
Primary Secondary
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch

8 Shield 5 8
Shield 5
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,13
Redundant 3,13
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

235
 2075 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-en-
closed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on the other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be
placed on either switch.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the
PC.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number.
In this example, all FP20 switches have two 100mb/s full duplex multimode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware configu-
rations. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no gigabit ca-
pable ports.
7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000mb/s uplink ports and two SFP uplink ports.
The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long dis-
tance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to autosense speed, autonegotiate duplex,
and autodetect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to autosense speed and autonegotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) from the Smart
Switch Command Center (SSCC) after all initial connections are made to the
switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused
ports after the initial lock down, an additional command from the SSCC is required
to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down command
should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused ports. Once
the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can communicate on its
original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use
any of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide am-
ple performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mb/s links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on
the edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much
less bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

236
 2076 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 In this example, an SFP transceiver is used for the connection to the next switch.
The SFP module type must be matched to the type of fiber-optic cable that is in-
stalled. Single mode and multimode fiber-optic cable in various core/cladding di-
ameters which contribute to the overall distance limit, can be used with specific
SFP modules.
13 This is a 10/100mb/s twisted pair link.

14 This is a 100mb/s full duplex multimode fiber-optic link. Distances up to 5 km can

be achieved depending upon the fiber-optic port option ordered and the number
of intermediate splices and patch panels used.

Other twisted pair network examples

There can be no more than six switches in series between any two devices in any path in
this type of network.

237
 2077 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Figure 8-12: DeltaV RM100 and MD30 switches in a twisted pair network
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

8 8
7 7
10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary
MD30 Switch MD30 Switch
1,2,6,8 1,2,6,8

8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

238
 2078 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Figure 8-13: DeltaV RM100, MD30, and FP20 switches in a twisted pair network
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

7 8 7 8
FP20 FP20
Switch Switch

1,2 1,2,6,8 1,2

1,2,6,8

10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary

MD30 Switch MD30 Switch

8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
1,2 Controllers 1,2
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

239
 2079 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the
PC.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the optional modules
chosen. In this example, all MD30 switches have a gigabit module installed on the
left side of the switch that used for the uplink to the RM100 switch. This module
contains two, 10/100/1000mb/s twisted pair ports and two gigabit SFP slots for
various types of optional SFP transceivers. Only two ports on this module can be
used simultaneously in any mix. The SFP transceivers are available in singlemode
and multimode fiber-optic versions. Each of the remaining six port modules on the
right side of the switch have four 10/100mb/s twisted pair ports for a total of 24
ports and any combination of ports can be used for 10/100mb/s uplinks to other
switches or for edge devices such as workstations and controllers. Other modules
are available in 100mb/s only communications in single and multimode fiber-optic
versions.
7 The type of uplink ports on this switch consists of two fixed 10/100/1000mb/s
ports and two SFP ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP
transceivers for long distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a
time in any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information
for the available SFP transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to autosense speed, autonegotiate duplex,
and autodetect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to autosense speed and autonegotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) from the Smart
Switch Command Center (SSCC) after all initial connections are made to the
switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused
ports after the initial lock down, an additional software command from the SSCC is
required to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use
any of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide am-
ple performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mb/s links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 The power connector (not shown) is used for a +24VDC power supply input and re-
lay contacts.

240
 2080 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
12 This is a 10/100mb/s twisted pair link.

Network with fiber-optic and twisted pair uplinks

Figure 8-14: DeltaV RM100s with fiber uplinks and FP20s with fiber and twisted pair uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus

4,12

Network Switch RM100 1.1

2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100
FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24

Primary FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24

Secondary
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2 1.2

7,9 8,12 Primary FP20 7,9 8

6 Secondary FP20 6
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB

To additional
V.24

13 13 To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

To additional
USB
V.24

To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

1,2,12 5 6

6 1,2,12
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB

To additional
V.24

To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
8 Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB
V.24

V.24

1 2
DA
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

11 Ground
Shield
11 Ground
Shield
5
Network Switch FAULT Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2) FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

LS

1
DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
1,2,12 LS

1
DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK

5
USB USB

V.24
10 V.24 10
1 2 1 2
DA DA

8
2 2

LS 3 4 LS 3 4

5 6 5 6

8 3
1,2,12

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

241
 2081 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-en-
closed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on the other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be
placed on either switch.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected.
Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both
ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal
connector end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not
on the PC.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suita-
ble shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ether-
net shielded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part num-
ber. In this example, all FP20 switches have one 100mb/s full duplex single mode
fiber-optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware
configurations. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no
gigabit capable ports.
7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000mb/s uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for
long distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any
combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the
available SFP transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to autosense speed, autonegotiate duplex,
and autodetect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted
pair switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures,
could occur. Always allow the switch to autosense speed and autonegotiate du-
plex. All unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) from the
Smart Switch Command Center (SSCC) after all initial connections are made to
the switch. If additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to un-
used ports after the initial lock down, an additional command from the SSCC is
required to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can com-
municate on its original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use
any of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide am-
ple performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mb/s links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on
the edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much
less bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

242
 2082 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for oc-
casional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100mb/s twisted pair link.

13 This is a 100mb/s full duplex single mode fiber-optic link. Distances up to 40 km

can be achieved depending upon the fiber-optic port option ordered and the
number of intermediate splices and patch panels used.

243
 2083 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Twisted pair network with DeltaV Smart Switches,

CHARMs I/O, and S-series I/O

Figure 8-15: DeltaV Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O and S-series I/O

ProPlus

Operator Stations
or
1 Application Stations 1

RM100 RM100
primary secondary

9 8 9 8
7 7

MD30 MD30
primary secondary

2 2
10 10

3 S-series 3
I/O 4

4
S-series
I/O

5 5 5

6
Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec

CIOC with
network
interfaces

Baseplate for 12
CHARMs; up to
7 more Baseplates
for a total of 96
CHARMs per CIOC

244
 2084 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
2 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable assembly can be placed on either end of the link.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. In this figure, the CIOC cards
are daisy-chained, so that the cable shield grounding is passed through from the
first switch's shield ground to the first CIOC's shield ground and then from CIOC to
CIOC throughout the chain. Note that the Primary and Secondary RJ45 shielded
connectors are isolated from each other so there is no ground loop possible be-
tween Primary and Secondary shield grounds. CIOCs are daisy-chained (cascaded)
in order to use short lengths of cable, for example within a cabinet, where the links
are protected against damage. The Cascade port, which is used to create the dai-
sy-chain, is the bottom port on the CIOC Carrier. It is recommended that for long
lengths of cable, a star-wired connection from each CIOC back to the switch is
used. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on
both ends.
6 The I/O ports on the CHARM I/O Carrier hold a control network port and a cascade
port. The I/O ports are powered by the CIOCs installed in the carrier. If both CIOCs
are removed from a CIOC carrier, enabled cascade ports become unpowered caus-
ing loss of communication to downstream CIOCs. Use redundant CIOCs if cascade
ports are enabled to ensure that the cascade ports are powered and the CIOC is
communicating with downstream CIOCs. In DeltaV Explorer, use the CIOC's Prop-
erties page to enable the cascade ports.
7 Any combination of DeltaV RM100, MD30, and FP20 Smart Switches can be daisy-
chained in series up to 12 total.

245
 2085 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
8 If more than one RM100 or MD30 switch is required to increase port count in an
area, use the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide
ample performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mbit/s links can al-
so be used for this purpose but normally those links are reserved for single devices
on the edge of the network such as controllers and workstations. The RM100 and
MD30 switches have two fixed 10/100/1000mbit/s uplink ports and two SFP up-
link ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for
long distance communications. Only two of the four uplinks in this area of the
switch can be active at a time in any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to
the Smart Switch Product Data Sheet for available SFP fiber optic transceivers for
the RM100 and MD30 switches.
9 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
10 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the switch's ground screw to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

246
 2086 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Twisted pair network with DeltaV Smart Switches and

CHARMs I/O

Figure 8-16: DeltaV Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O

ProPlus

Operator Stations
or
1 Application Stations 1

RM100 RM100
primary secondary

9 8 9 8
7 7

MD30 MD30
primary secondary

2 2
10 10
S-series
3 redundant 3
controller 4

4 S-series
redundant
controller

5 5 5
6

6
Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec

CIOC with
network
interfaces

Baseplate for 12
CHARMs; up to
7 more Baseplates
for a total of 96
CHARMs per CIOC

247
 2087 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
2 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable assembly can be placed on either end of the link.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. In this figure, the CIOC cards
are daisy-chained, so that the cable shield grounding is passed through from the
first switch's shield ground to the first CIOC's shield ground and then from CIOC to
CIOC throughout the chain. Note that the Primary and Secondary RJ45 shielded
connectors are isolated from each other so there is no ground loop possible be-
tween Primary and Secondary shield grounds. CIOCs are daisy-chained in order to
use short lengths of cable, for example within a cabinet, where the links are pro-
tected against damage. The Cascade port, which is used to create the daisy-chain,
is the bottom port on the CIOC Carrier. It is recommended that for long lengths of
cable, a star-wired connection from each CIOC back to the switch is used. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
6 The I/O ports on the CHARM I/O Carrier hold a control network port and a cascade
port. The I/O ports are powered by the CIOCs installed in the carrier. If both CIOCs
are removed from a CIOC carrier, enabled cascade ports become unpowered caus-
ing loss of communication to downstream CIOCs. Use redundant CIOCs if cascade
ports are enabled to ensure that the cascade ports are powered and the CIOC is
communicating with downstream CIOCs. In DeltaV Explorer, use the CIOC's Prop-
erties page to enable the cascade ports.
7 Any combination of DeltaV RM100, MD30, and FP20 Smart Switches can be daisy-
chained in series up to 12 total.

248
 2088 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
8 If more than one RM100 or MD30 switch is required to increase port count in an
area, use the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide
ample performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mbit/s links can al-
so be used for this purpose but normally those links are reserved for single devices
on the edge of the network such as controllers and workstations. The RM100 and
MD30 switches have two fixed 10/100/1000mbit/s uplink ports and two SFP up-
link ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for
long distance communications. Only two of the four uplinks in this area of the
switch can be active at a time in any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to
the Smart Switch Product Data Sheet for available SFP fiber optic transceivers for
the RM100 and MD30 switches.
9 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
10 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the switch's ground screw to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

249
 2089 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O,S-series I/O, and

DeltaV Controller Firewall

Figure 8-17: DeltaV Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O, S-series I/O, and
DeltaV Controller Firewall

ProPlus

Operator Stations
or
1 Application Stations 1

RM100 RM100
primary secondary

8 8
+24 VDC in +24 VDC in
2 2
DeltaV DeltaV
Controller 7 Controller 7
Firewall Firewall
9 9
10 10
MD30 MD30
primary secondary

2 2
9 9

3 S-series 3
I/O 4

4
S-series
I/O

5 5 5

6
Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec

CIOC with
network
interfaces

Baseplate for 12
CHARMs; up to
7 more Baseplates
for a total of 96
CHARMs per CIOC

250
 2090 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
2 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable assembly can be placed on either end of the link.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. In this figure, the CIOC cards
are daisy-chained, so that the cable shield grounding is passed through from the
first switch's shield ground to the first CIOC's shield ground and then from CIOC to
CIOC throughout the chain. Note that the Primary and Secondary RJ45 shielded
connectors are isolated from each other so there is no ground loop possible be-
tween Primary and Secondary shield grounds. CIOCs are daisy-chained in order to
use short lengths of cable, for example within a cabinet, where the links are pro-
tected against damage. The Cascade port, which is used to create the daisy-chain,
is the bottom port on the CIOC Carrier. It is recommended that for long lengths of
cable, a star-wired connection from each CIOC back to the switch is used. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
6 The I/O ports on the CHARM I/O Carrier hold a control network port and a cascade
port. The I/O ports are powered by the CIOCs installed in the carrier. If both CIOCs
are removed from a CIOC carrier, enabled cascade ports become unpowered caus-
ing loss of communication to downstream CIOCs. Use redundant CIOCs if cascade
ports are enabled to ensure that the cascade ports are powered and the CIOC is
communicating with downstream CIOCs. In DeltaV Explorer, use the CIOC's Prop-
erties page to enable the cascade ports.
7 Any combination of DeltaV RM100, MD30, and FP20 Smart Switches can be daisy-
chained in series up to 12 total.
8 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
9 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the switch's ground screw to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

251
 2091 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
10 The DeltaV Controller Firewall supports up to eight redundant controllers on its
protected side in any combination of M-series and S-series controllers, and any
number of CIOCs.

252
 2092 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Twisted pair network with DeltaV Smart Switches

CHARMs I/O and DeltaV Controller Firewall

Figure 8-18: DeltaV Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with CHARMs I/O and DeltaV Controller
Firewall

ProPlus

Operator Stations
or
1 Application Stations 1

RM100 RM100
primary secondary
8 8
+24 VDC in +24 VDC in
2 2
DeltaV DeltaV
Controller 7 Controller 7
Firewall Firewall
10 10

MD30 MD30
primary secondary

2 2
9 9
S-series
3 redundant 3
controller 4

4 S-series
redundant
controller

5 5 5

6
Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec Pri Sec

CIOC with
network
interfaces

Baseplate for 12
CHARMs; up to
7 more Baseplates
for a total of 96
CHARMs per CIOC

253
 2093 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
2 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end
and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal con-
nector end of this cable assembly can be placed on either end of the link.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller’s
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the con-
troller’s DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single
point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the CIOC's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the CIOC; not to the CIOC's DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the switch to which the CIOC is connected. In this figure, the CIOC cards
are daisy-chained, so that the cable shield grounding is passed through from the
first switch's shield ground to the first CIOC's shield ground and then from CIOC to
CIOC throughout the chain. Note that the Primary and Secondary RJ45 shielded
connectors are isolated from each other so there is no ground loop possible be-
tween Primary and Secondary shield grounds. CIOCs are daisy-chained in order to
use short lengths of cable, for example within a cabinet, where the links are pro-
tected against damage. The Cascade port, which is used to create the daisy-chain,
is the bottom port on the CIOC Carrier. It is recommended that for long lengths of
cable, a star-wired connection from each CIOC back to the switch is used. Build
this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
6 The I/O ports on the CHARM I/O Carrier hold a control network port and a cascade
port. The I/O ports are powered by the CIOCs installed in the carrier. If both CIOCs
are removed from a CIOC carrier, enabled cascade ports become unpowered caus-
ing loss of communication to downstream CIOCs. Use redundant CIOCs if cascade
ports are enabled to ensure that the cascade ports are powered and the CIOC is
communicating with downstream CIOCs. In DeltaV Explorer, use the CIOC's Prop-
erties page to enable the cascade ports.
7 Any combination of DeltaV RM100, MD30, and FP20 Smart Switches can be daisy-
chained in series up to 12 total.
8 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
9 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the switch's ground screw to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

254
 2094 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
10 The DeltaV Controller Firewall supports up to eight redundant controllers on its
protected side in any combination of M-series and S-series controllers, and any
number of CIOCs.

255
 2095 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Twisted pair network with DeltaV Smart Switches and

WirelessHART I/O cards

Figure 8-19: DeltaV Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with WirelessHART I/O
cards

ProPlus

Operator Stations
or
1 Application Stations 1

RM100 RM100
primary secondary

9 8 9 8
7 7

MD30 MD30
primary secondary

2 2
10 10
S-series
3 redundant 3
controller 4

4 S-series
redundant
controller

5 5 5
6

6 Pri Sec Pri Sec

WIOCs with
network interfaces

Smart Wireless
Field Links

256
 2096 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops,
build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on
one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The
metal connector end of this cable must be placed on the switch and not on the
PC.
2 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops,
build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on
one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The
metal connector end of this cable assembly can be placed on either end of the
link.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the
controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the sin-
gle point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is connected.
Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on
both ends.
4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the WIOC's
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the WIOC; not to the WIOC's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the switch to which the WIOC is connected. Build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the WIOC's
RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the WIOC; not to the WIOC's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the switch to which the WIOC is connected. In this figure,
the WIOC cards are daisy-chained, so that the cable shield grounding is passed
through from the first switch's shield ground to the first WIOC's shield ground
and then from WIOC to WIOC throughout the chain. Note that the Primary and
Secondary RJ45 shielded connectors are isolated from each other so there is no
ground loop possible between Primary and Secondary shield grounds. WIOCs
are daisy-chained in order to use short lengths of cable, for example within a
cabinet, where the links are protected against damage. The Cascade port,
which is used to create the daisy-chain, is the bottom port on the WIOC Carrier.
It is recommended that for long lengths of cable, a star-wired connection from
each WIOC back to the switch is used. Build this cable assembly with a shielded,
metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
6 Enabled cascade ports on the WIOC carrier are powered by the WIOCs installed
in the carrier. If both WIOCs are removed from a WIOC carrier, enabled cascade
ports become unpowered causing loss of communication to downstream
WIOCs. Use redundant WIOCs if cascade ports are enabled to ensure that the
cascade ports are powered and the WIOC is communicating with downstream
WIOCs. Use the WIOC's Properties page in DeltaV Explorer to enable the cas-
cade ports.
7 Any combination of DeltaV RM100, MD30, and FP20 Smart Switches can be
daisy-chained in series up to 12 total.

257
 2097 of 2474

The DeltaV Control Network

Callout Description
8 If more than one RM100 or MD30 switch is required to increase port count in
an area, use the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to pro-
vide ample performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100mbit/s links
can also be used for this purpose but normally those links are reserved for sin-
gle devices on the edge of the network such as controllers and workstations.
The RM100 and MD30 switches have two fixed 10/100/1000mbit/s uplink
ports and two SFP uplink ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-
optic SFP transceivers for long distance communications. Only two of the four
uplinks in this area of the switch can be active at a time in any combination of
twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the Smart Switch Product Data Sheet for availa-
ble SFP fiber optic transceivers for the RM100 and MD30 switches.
9 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for
occasional out-of-band switch setup and management.
10 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the switch's ground screw to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet
shielded connectors.

258
 2098 of 2474

Environmental specifications for S-series and CHARMs hardware

9 Environmental specifications for S-

series and CHARMs hardware
Topics covered in this chapter:
• Temperature and humidity specifications for DeltaV hardware
• Contaminants, vibration, and shock specifications for DeltaV hardware

Temperature and humidity specifications for

DeltaV hardware
Table 9-1: Temperature and humidity specifications for DeltaV hardware

Operating temperature Storage temperature

Device range range Relative humidity
Workstation 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F) -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F) 20% to 80% noncondensing
maximum change per hour
is 10°C (18°F)
Non ES versions of: 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 10% to 95%, noncondensing
• DeltaV MD20 and MD30 185°F)
base Smart Switches
and media modules
• DeltaV FP20 Smart
Switches
ES versions of: -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 10% to 95%, noncondensing
• DeltaV MD20 and MD30 158°F) 185°F)
base Smart Switches conformal coating
and media modules
• DeltaV FP20 Smart
Switches
DeltaV RM100 base Smart 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) -20°C to 85°C (-4°F to 185°F) 10% to 95%, noncondensing
Switches and media mod-
ules
SD Plus controllers -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
158°F) 185°F)
SX controllers -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
140°F) 185°F)
I/O cards (except AS-Inter- -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
face and VIM card) 158°F) 185°F)
AS-Interface card -25°C to 70°C (-40°F to -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
158°F) 185°F)

259
 2099 of 2474

Environmental specifications for S-series and CHARMs hardware

Table 9-1: Temperature and humidity specifications for DeltaV hardware (continued)

Operating temperature Storage temperature

Device range range Relative humidity
VIM card O°C to 60°C (-4O°F to 140°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95% noncondensing
185°F)
System power supply (24 -40 to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F) -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
VDC) 158°F)
CHARM I/O Card -40 to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
185°F)
CHARMs -40 to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
185°F)
WirelessHART I/O Card -40 to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 5% to 95%, noncondensing
185°F)

Contaminants, vibration, and shock

specifications for DeltaV hardware
Table 9-2: Contaminants, vibration, and shock specifications for DeltaV hardware

Airborne contami-
Device nants Vibration Shock
Workstation Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufacturer's Refer to manufactur-
er's specifications. specifications. er's specifications.
All DeltaV Smart • 1 mm , 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz 15 g, 11 ms duration at
Switches and media for 90 minutes 18 shocks
modules • 0.7g, 13.2 Hz to 100
Hz for 90 minutes
• 3.5 mm, 3 Hz to 9 Hz,
10 cycles, 1 octave/mi-
nute
• 1g, 9 Hz to 150 Hz, 10
cycles, 1 octave/mi-
nute
System power sup- ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- • 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½ sine wave for
ply (24 VDC) borne Contaminants from 5 Hz to 16 Hz 11 ms
Class G3 • 0.5 g from 16 Hz to
150 Hz
Controllers ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- • 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½ sine wave for
borne Contaminants from 5 Hz to 16 Hz 11 ms
Class G3 • 0.5 g from 16 Hz to
150 Hz

260
 2100 of 2474

Environmental specifications for S-series and CHARMs hardware

Table 9-2: Contaminants, vibration, and shock specifications for DeltaV hardware
(continued)

Airborne contami-
Device nants Vibration Shock
I/O cards ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- • 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½ sine wave for
borne Contaminants from 5 Hz to 16 Hz 11 ms
Class G3 • 0.5 g from 16 Hz to
150 Hz
CHARMs I/O card ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- • 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½ sine wave for
borne Contaminants from 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz 11 ms
Class G3 • 0.7 g from 13.2 Hz to
150 Hz
CHARMs ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- • 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½ sine wave for
borne Contaminants from 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz 11 ms
Class G3 • 0.7 g from 13.2 Hz to
150 Hz
WirelessHART I/O ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- • 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g ½ sine wave for
card borne Contaminants from 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz 11 ms
Class G3 • 0.7 g from 13.2 Hz to
150 Hz

261
 2101 of 2474

Environmental specifications for S-series and CHARMs hardware

262
 2102 of 2474

Hazardous area, NAMUR, and ATEX documents

10 Hazardous area, NAMUR, and ATEX

documents

DeltaV Hazardous area and NAMUR installation

manuals and ATEX instruction sheets
The following files related to Hazardous Area installations and NAMUR compliant
installations are on the DeltaV installation disk #2\_Support\Supplemental_Docs. The files are in
Portable Document Format (.PDF). A letter (A-Z) is appended to the filenames that begin
with 12P and is incremented for each release of the document. The 12P numbers are the
document part numbers (PN).

• PN 12P1293:DeltaV™ Scalable Process System, Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions

• PN 12P1892:DeltaV™ Scalable Process System, Class I Div. 2 with Class I, II, III Div. 1 Field
Circuits Installation Instructions
• PN 12P1990:DeltaV™ Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits Installation
Instructions
• PN 12P2046:DeltaV™ Scalable Process System, Zone 2 Installation Instructions
• PN 12P2524:DeltaV™ IS I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas
• PN 12P2822:DeltaV™ Digital Automation System Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions
• PN 12P3292:DeltaV™ Type KJ7000 Series Zone 1 I/O System Installation Instructions
• PN 12P3517:DeltaV™ KJ1710 Single Port Fiber Switch Installation Instructions
• PN 12P5401:DeltaV™ Electronic Marshalling (Charm I/O Subsystem) Class 1 Division 2
Installation Instructions
• PN 12P5402:DeltaV™ S-Series Digital Automation System Class 1 Division 2 Installation
Instructions
• PN 12P5403:DeltaV™ Electronic Marshalling (Charm I/O Subsystem) Zone 2 Installation
Instructions
• PN 12P5404:DeltaV™ S-Series Digital Automation System Zone 2 Installation
Instructions
• ATEX Instruction Sheets: The DeltaV ATEX Instruction Sheets (in PDF format) can be
found on the DeltaV website.

263
 2103 of 2474

Hazardous area, NAMUR, and ATEX documents

264
 2104 of 2474

Product type numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware

11 Product type numbers for S-series

and CHARMs hardware

Product type numbers for DeltaV S-series and

CHARMs hardware
Table 11-1: DeltaV S-series and CHARMS hardware products cross referenced to
product type numbers

Product type number DeltaV product name

KJ1501X1-BK1 System Power Supply (24 VDC)
KJ2003X1-BK1 SD Plus Controller
KJ2005X1-BK1 SX Controller
KJ2006X1-BK1 VIM card
KJ3201X1-BK1 DI 8-channel NAMUR card
KJ3202X1-BK1 DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card
KJ3203X1-BK1 DI 32-channel 24VDC dry contact card
KJ3204X1-BK1 DO 32-channel 24VDC high-side card
KJ3206X1-BK1 DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card
KJ3207X1-BK1 DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card
KJ3207X1-BL1 DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card
KJ3208X1-BK1 DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card
KJ3209X1-BK1 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card
KJ3210X1-BK1 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card
KJ3211X1-BK1 Sequence of Events card
KJ3212X1-BK1 Pulse count input card
KJ3221X1-BK1 AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card
KJ3222X1-BK1 AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card
KJ3223X1-BK1 AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card
KJ3224X1-BK1 Thermocouple / mV input card
KJ3225X1-BK1 RTD / Resistance input card
KJ3231X1-BK1 Isolated input card
KJ3241X1-BK1 Serial card
KJ3242X1-BK1 Fieldbus H1 card
KJ3243X1-BK1 Profibus DP card
KJ3244X1-BK1 DeviceNet card

265
 2105 of 2474

Product type numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware

Table 11-1: DeltaV S-series and CHARMS hardware products cross referenced to
product type numbers (continued)

Product type number DeltaV product name

KJ3245X1-BK1 AS-Interface card
KJ4005X1-BA1 Power / Controller Carrier
KJ4005X1-BB1 Left Extender
KJ4005X1-BC1 Right Extender
KJ4005X1-BD1 DeltaV SIS adapter
KJ4005X1-BE1 8-Wide I/O Carrier
KJ4005X1-BF1 Power Plug Terminal
KJ4005X1-BG1 Power Plug Bus
KJ4006X1-BA1 H1 Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BB1 8-Channel Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BC1 Fused 8-Channel Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BD1 Interface Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BE1 Thermocouple Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BF1 Discrete 32 Channel Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BG1 AI 16-Channel Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BH1 Isolated Input Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BJ1 RTD / Resistance Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BK1 Redundant Interface Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BL1 AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4 wire)
KJ4006X1-BM1 16-Pin Mass Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BN1 24-Pin Mass Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BP1 40-Pin Mass Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BQ1 Profibus DP Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BR1 Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BS1 Redundant AI 8-Channel Terminal Block (2 or 4 wire)
KJ4006X1-BT1 Redundant AO 8-Channel Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BU1 Redundant Discrete 8-Channel Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BV1 Redundant H1 Terminal Block
KJ4006X1-BW1 DeviceNet Terminal Block
KL1601X1-BA1 I/O Port (Copper)
KL2101X1-BA1 CHARM I/O Card
KL2102X1-BA1 WirelessHART I/O Card
KL3001X1-BA1 DI NAMUR CHARM
KL3002X1-BA1 DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM
KL3004X1-BA1 DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM

266
 2106 of 2474

Product type numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware

Table 11-1: DeltaV S-series and CHARMS hardware products cross referenced to
product type numbers (continued)

Product type number DeltaV product name

KL3005X1-BA1 DI 24 VDC Isolated CHARM
KL3006X1-BA1 DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM
KL3011X1-BA1 DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM
KL3012X1-BA1 DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM
KL3013X1-BA1 DO VAC isolated CHARM
KL3021X1-BA1 AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM
KL3022X1-BA1 AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM
KL3023X1-BA1 AI 0-10 V isolated CHARM
KL3031X1-BA1 RTD / Resistance input CHARM
KL3032X1-BA1 Thermocouple / mV input CHARM
KL3032X1-DA1 Thermocouple cold junction compensation (CJC) sensor
KL4101X1-BA1 CHARM I/O Carrier
KL4102X1-BA1 WirelessHART I/O Carrier
KL4201X1-BA1 CHARM Baseplate
KL4302X1-CA1 WirelessHART I/O Terminal Block (redundant)
KL4501X1 Address Plug
KL4502X1-BA1 CHARM Terminal Block
KL4502X1-DA1 CHARM Address Terminal
KL4502X1-EA1/FA1 CHARM Column Terminator
KL4502X1-LA1 CHARM Fused Injected Power Terminal Block
KL4502X1-MA1 CHARM Relay Output Terminal Block
KL4503X1-BA1/CA1 CHARM Column Extenders

267
 2107 of 2474

Product type numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware

268
 2108 of 2474

Index

Index
16-pin mass terminal block 85 specifications 129–131
24-pin mass terminal block 85, 86 wiring diagram 129–131
32-channel Discrete terminal block 67, 68 AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card
40-pin mass terminal block 86, 87 installation notes 9–11
8-channel terminal block 61, 62 specifications 9–11
8-Wide I/O carrier terminal block usage 9–11
dimensions 94–96 wiring diagram 9–11
installation notes 94–96 LEDs 181
specifications 94–96 AS-Interface card
installation notes 45–47
specifications 45–47
A terminal block usage 45–47
AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply wiring diagram 45–47
connecting multiple for redundancy or load LEDs 187
sharing 165, 166
sizing 160, 161
B
adapter, See DeltaV SIS adapter
Address Plug 118 bulk power supplies 157, 158
AI 0-10 V CHARM bulk power supply
installation notes 153, 154 connecting multiple for redundancy or load
LEDs 194 sharing 165, 166
specifications 153, 154
terminal block usage 153, 154 C
wiring diagram 153, 154 cable accessories 209
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card carriers
installation notes 8, 9 8-Wide I/O 94–96
specifications 8, 9 CHARM I/O carrier 112–114
terminal block usage 8, 9 left and right extenders 92, 93
wiring diagram 8, 9 Power / Controller 89–92
LEDs 180 WirelessHART I/O 101–103
AI 16-channel terminal block 65, 66 Cat5(e) ScTP cables
AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM requirements for using 207
installation notes 127–129 CHARM address terminal 126, 127
LEDs 194 CHARM Baseplates
specifications 127–129 installation notes 114–116
wiring diagram 127–129 specifications 114–116
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card CHARM Column Extenders
installation notes 4, 6 top and bottom 119–121
specifications 4, 6 CHARM Fused Injected Power terminal block 122, 123
terminal block usage 4, 6 CHARM I/O card
wiring diagram 4, 6 installation notes 110, 111
LEDs 179 LEDs 193
AI 8-channel terminal block (2 or 4-wire) 64, 65 specifications 110, 111
AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM CHARM I/O carrier
installation notes 129–131 dimensions 112–114
LEDs 194 installation notes 112–114
specifications 112–114

269
 2109 of 2474

Index

CHARM Injected Power terminal block 124, 125 example twisted pair network with RM100 and MD30
CHARM relay output terminal block 125, 126 switches 237
CHARM terminal block 121, 122 network requirements 207
CHARMs types of cable used 207
AI 0-10 V 153, 154 DeltaV Controller Firewall 228–230
AI 4-20 mA HART 127–129 DeltaV M-series hardware 1
AO 4-20 mA HART 129–131 DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches
DI 120 VAC isolated 133, 134 LEDs 202, 203
DI 230 VAC isolated 135, 136 specifications 214, 215
DI 24 VDC isolated 131, 132 DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches
DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) 136–138 LEDs 204
DI NAMUR 138–140 DeltaV S-series hardware 1
DO 100 mA energy limited 144, 145 DeltaV SIS adapter
DO 24 VDC high-side 140, 141 dimensions 96, 97
DO 24 VDC isolated 142, 143 installation notes 96, 97
DO VAC isolated 146, 147 specifications 96, 97
RTD / Resistance 148, 150 DeltaV Smart Switches
Thermocouple / mV input 150–152 important usage information 213
CHARMs hardware DeviceNet card
product type numbers 265 installation notes 47, 48
CHARMs I/O specifications 47, 48
delivering field power to 174 terminal block usage 47, 48
power requirements for 174 wiring diagram 47, 48
CIOC, See CHARM I/O card LEDs 188
Column extenders DeviceNet terminal block 68, 69
top and bottom 119–121 DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM
control network 207, 227 installation notes 133, 134
control network cables LEDs 196
Cat5(e) ScTP 207 specifications 133, 134
fiber-optic 208 wiring diagram 133, 134
controller firewall 228–230 DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM
controllers installation notes 135, 136
LEDs 200 LEDs 196
providing redundant power to 162–164 specifications 135, 136
redundant 177, 178 wiring diagram 135, 136
SD Plus 177, 178 DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM
specifications 177, 178 installation notes 131, 132
SX 177, 178 LEDs 196
crossover cable specifications 131, 132
building 212 wiring diagram 131, 132
DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM
D installation notes 136–138
LEDs 196
DC current requirements for S-series I/O 161
specifications 136–138
DeltaV Control Network
wiring diagram 136–138
example fiber-optic and twisted pair network 241
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card
example network with DeltaV Controller Firewall 250
LEDs 183
example network with S-series I/O and CHARMs I/
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contract card
O 244
installation notes 20, 21
example twisted pair network with RM100 and FP20
specifications 20, 21
switches 233

270
 2110 of 2474

Index

terminal block usage 20, 21 specifications 142, 143

wiring diagram 20, 21 wiring diagram 142, 143
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card
LEDs 182 installation notes 31, 32
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contract card LEDs 184
installation notes 17, 18 specifications 31, 32
specifications 17, 18 terminal block usage 31, 32
terminal block usage 17, 18 wiring diagram 31, 32
wiring diagram 17, 18 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card installation notes 27, 29
installation notes 18, 19 LEDs 183
LEDs 182 specifications 27, 29
specifications 18, 19 terminal block usage 27, 29
terminal block usage 18, 19 wiring diagram 27, 29
wiring diagram 18, 19 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card installation notes 29, 31
installation notes 15, 16 LEDs 183
LEDs 182 specifications 29, 31
specifications 15, 16 terminal block usage 29, 31
terminal block usage 15, 16 wiring diagram 29, 31
wiring diagram 15, 16 DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card
DI 8-channel NAMUR card installation notes 21, 22, 24
installation notes 12–14 LEDs 183
LEDs 182 specifications 21, 22, 24
specifications 12–14 terminal block usage 21, 22, 24
terminal block usage 12–14 wiring diagram 21, 22, 24
wiring diagram 12–14 DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card
DI NAMUR CHARM installation notes 25–27
installation notes 138–140 LEDs 183
LEDs 196 specifications 25–27
specifications 138–140 terminal block usage 25–27
wiring diagram 138–140 wiring diagram 25–27
dimensions DO VAC high-side CHARM
8-wide I/O carrier 94–96 LEDs 196
CHARM I/O carrier 112–114 DO VAC isolated CHARM
DeltaV SIS adapter 96, 97 installation notes 146, 147
left and right extenders 92, 93 LEDs 196
Power / Controller carrier 89–92 specifications 146, 147
Discrete 32-channel terminal block 67, 68 wiring diagram 146, 147
DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM
installation notes 144, 145 E
specifications 144, 145
extenders (left and right
wiring diagram 144, 145
length of cables used with extenders 159
DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM
extenders (left and right)
installation notes 140, 141
dimensions 92, 93
LEDs 196
installation notes 92, 93
specifications 140, 141
left and right 92, 93
wiring diagram 140, 141
specifications 92, 93
DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM
installation notes 142, 143
LEDs 196

271
 2111 of 2474

Index

F Serial 56–58
fiber-optic cables 208 Thermocouple / mV input 43, 45
field power VIM card 60, 61
delivering to isolated CHARMs 174 I/O interface
field power delivery to CHARMs 174 number of cards supported 2
Fieldbus H1 card I/O port
installation notes 49, 50 LEDs 198
specifications 49, 50 installation notes
terminal block usage 49, 50 AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card 8, 9
wiring diagram 49, 50 AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 4, 6
LEDs 190 AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 9–11
firewall 228–230 AS-Interface card 45–47
Fused 8-channel terminal block 63, 64 DeviceNet card 47, 48
Fieldbus H1 card 49, 50
H1 card with integrated power 51–53
H Profibus DP card 55
H1 card with integrated power VIM card 60, 61
installation notes 51–53 8-Wide I/O carrier 94–96
specifications 51–53 AI 0-10 V CHARM 153, 154
terminal block usage 51–53 AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM 127–129
wiring diagram 51–53 AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM 129–131
H1 card with Integrated Power CHARM Baseplates 114–116
LEDs 189 CHARM I/O card 110, 111
H1 terminal block 69, 70 CHARM I/O carrier 112–114
H1 with integrated power terminal block (simplex) 70, 71 DeltaV SIS adapter 96, 97
heat dissipation 167 DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM 133, 134
DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM 135, 136
I DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM 131, 132
I/O cards DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact)
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART 8, 9 CHARM 136–138
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART 4, 6 DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card 20, 21
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART 9–11 DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card 17, 18
AS-Interface 45–47 DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card 18, 19
DeviceNet 47, 48 DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 15, 16
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact 20, 21 DI 8-channel NAMUR card 12–14
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact 17, 18 DI NAMUR CHARM 138–140
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated 18, 19 DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM 144, 145
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated 15, 16 DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM 140, 141
DI 8-channel NAMUR 12–14 DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM 142, 143
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side 31, 32 DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card 31, 32
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side 27, 29 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card 27, 29
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated 29, 31 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card 29, 31
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side 21, 22, 24 DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card 21, 22, 24
DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated 25–27 DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 25–27
Fieldbus H1 49, 50 DO VAC isolated CHARM 146, 147
H1 with integrated power 51–53 Isolated input card 33, 36
Isolated input 33, 36 left and right extenders 92, 93
Profibus DP 55 Power / Controller carrier 89–92
Pulse count input 36–38 Pulse count input card 36–38
RTD / Resistance input 39, 40 RTD / Resistance CHARM 148, 150
Sequence of Events 40–42

272
 2112 of 2474

Index

RTD / Resistance input card DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM 196

wiring diagram 39, 40 DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM 196
Sequence of Events card 40–42 DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card 184
Serial card 56–58 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card 183
Smart Wireless Field Link 104, 105 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card 183
Thermocouple / mV input card 43, 45 DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card 183
Thermocouple / mV input CHARM 150–152 DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 183
Interface terminal block 71, 72 DO VAC high-side CHARM 196
IOP DO VAC isolated CHARM 196
LEDs 198 Fieldbus H1 card 190
IP address H1 card with integrated Power 189
reserved addresses 231 I/O port 198
isolated CHARMs IOP 198
delivering field power to 174 Isolated input card 185
Isolated input card power supply (24 VDC) 201
installation notes 33, 36 Profibus DP card 191
LEDs 185 Pulse count input card 185
specifications 33, 36 RTD / Resistance CHARM 194
terminal block usage 33, 36 RTD / Resistance input card 186
wiring diagram 33, 36 SD controller 200
Isolated input terminal block 72, 73 Sequence of Events card 187
Serial card 192
K SX controller 200
Thermocouple / mV input card 186
KJ numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware 265
Thermocouple / mV input CHARM 194
KL numbers for S-series and CHARMs hardware 265
VIM card 193
WirelessHART I/O card 205
L left carrier extender, See extenders
LEDs LocalBus
AI 0-10 V CHARM 194 definition 155, 156
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card 180 extending 159
AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM 194 injecting additional power 170
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 179
AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM 194 M
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 181
M-series hardware 1
AS-Interface card 187
management station 227
CHARM I/O card 193
modules, See I/O cards by name
controllers 200
DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches 202, 203
DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches 204 N
DeviceNet card 188 Network Time Protocol server
DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM 196 IP addresses reserved for 231
DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM 196 NTP server
DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM 196 IP addresses reserved for 231
DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) CHARM 196
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card 183 P
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card 182
Power / Controller carrier
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card 182
dimensions 89–92
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 182
installation notes 89–92
DI 8-channel NAMUR card 182
specifications 89–92
DI NAMUR CHARM 196
power in a DeltaV system 155, 156

273
 2113 of 2474

Index

power requirements terminal block usage 39, 40

for CHARMs I/O 174 wiring diagram 39, 40
power supply (24 VDC) RTD / Resistance terminal block 74, 75
dimensions 156, 157
LEDs 201 S
specifications 156, 157
S-series hardware
using multiple for redundancy 162–164
product type numbers 265
product type numbers for S-series and CHARMs
S-series I/O
hardware 265
DC current requirements for 161
Profibus DP card
SD controller
installation notes 55
LEDs 200
specifications 55
SD Plus controller
terminal block usage 55
dimensions 177, 178
wiring diagram 55
specifications 177, 178
LEDs 191
Sequence of Events card
Profibus DP terminal block 73, 74
installation notes 40–42
Pulse count input card
LEDs 187
installation notes 36–38
specifications 40–42
LEDs 185
terminal block usage 40–42
specifications 36–38
wiring diagram 40–42
terminal block usage 36–38
Serial card
wiring diagram 36–38
installation notes 56–58
LEDs 192
R specifications 56–58
Redundant AI 8-channel terminal block 77, 78 terminal block usage 56–58
Redundant AO 8-channel terminal block 78, 79 wiring diagram 56–58
redundant controllers 177, 178 SIS adapter, See DeltaV SIS adapter
Redundant Discrete 8-channel terminal block 79, 80 sizing the AC to 24 VDC bulk power supply 160, 161
Redundant H1 terminal block 80, 81 sizing the system power supply 160
Redundant H1 with Integrated Power Terminal Block 82, Smart Wireless Field Link
83 installation notes 104, 105
Redundant Interface terminal block 81, 82 specifications 104, 105
Redundant Profibus DP terminal block 83, 84 specifications
redundant WirelessHART I/O terminal block 103, 104 AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card 8, 9
reserved IP address 231 AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 4, 6
right carrier extender, See extenders AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 9–11
RJ45 connector (shielded) AS-Interface card 45–47
building 211 DeviceNet card 47, 48
RJ45 connector (unshielded) Fieldbus H1 card 49, 50
building 210 H1 card with integrated power 51–53
RJ45 connectors 209, 210 Profibus DP card 55
RTD / Resistance CHARM VIM card 60, 61
installation notes 148, 150 8-Wide I/O carrier 94–96
LEDs 194 AI 0-10 V CHARM 153, 154
specifications 148, 150 AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM 127–129
wiring diagram 148, 150 AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM 129–131
RTD / Resistance input card CHARM Baseplates 114–116
installation notes 39, 40 CHARM I/O card 110, 111
LEDs 186 CHARM I/O carrier 112–114
specifications 39, 40 controllers 177, 178
DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches 214, 215

274
 2114 of 2474

Index

DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM 133, 134 Profibus DP card 55

DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM 135, 136 AI 0-10 V CHARM 153, 154
DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM 131, 132 DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card 20, 21
DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact) DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card 17, 18
CHARM 136–138 DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card 18, 19
DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card 20, 21 DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 15, 16
DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card 17, 18 DI 8-channel NAMUR card 12–14
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card 18, 19 DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card 31, 32
DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 15, 16 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card 27, 29
DI 8-channel NAMUR card 12–14 DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card 29, 31
DI NAMUR CHARM 138–140 DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card 21, 22, 24
DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM 144, 145 DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 25–27
DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM 140, 141 H1 card with integrated power 51–53
DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM 142, 143 Isolated input card 33, 36
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card 31, 32 Pulse count input card 36–38
DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card 27, 29 RTD / Resistance input card 39, 40
DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card 21, 22, 24 Sequence of Events card 40–42
DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 25–27 Serial card 56–58
DO 8-channel, 120/230 VAC isolated card 29, 31 Thermocouple / mV input card 43, 45
DO VAC isolated CHARM 146, 147 terminal blocks
Isolated input card 33, 36 16-pin mass terminal 85
left and right extenders 92, 93 24-pin mass terminal 85, 86
Power / Controller carrier 89–92 32-channel discrete 67, 68
Pulse count input card 36–38 40-pin mass terminal 86, 87
RTD / Resistance CHARM 148, 150 8-channel 61, 62
RTD / Resistance input card 39, 40 8-channel, fused 63, 64
Sequence of Events card 40–42 AI 16-channel 65, 66
Serial card 56–58 AI 8-channel 2 or 4-wire 64, 65
Smart Wireless Field Link 104, 105 CHARM Fused Injected Power 122, 123
Thermocouple / mV input card 43, 45 CHARM Relay Output 125, 126
Thermocouple / mV input CHARM 150–152 CHARM terminal block 121, 122
straight-through cable DeviceNet 68, 69
building 211 fused 8-channel 63–65
SX controller H1 69, 70
dimensions 177, 178 H1 with integrated power 70, 71
LEDs 200 Interface 71, 72
specifications 177, 178 Isolated input 72, 73
System power supply (24 VDC Profibus DP 73, 74
sizing 160 Redundant AI 8-channel 77, 78
System power supply (24 VDC) Redundant AO 8-channel 78, 79
dimensions 156, 157 Redundant Discrete 8-channel 79, 80
specifications 156, 157 Redundant H1 80, 81
Redundant H1 with Integrated Power 82, 83
T Redundant Interface 81, 82
Redundant Profibus DP 83, 84
terminal block usage
RTD /resistance 74, 75
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card 8, 9
Thermocouple 75, 76
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 4, 6
WirelessHART I/O (redundant) 103, 104
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 9–11
Thermocouple / mV input card
AS-Interface card 45–47
installation notes 43, 45
DeviceNet card 47, 48
LEDs 186
Fieldbus H1 card 49, 50

275
 2115 of 2474

Index

specifications 43, 45 Fieldbus H1 card 49, 50

terminal block usage 43, 45 Profibus DP card 55
wiring diagram 43, 45 AI 0-10 V CHARM 153, 154
Thermocouple / mV input CHARM AI 4-20 mA HART CHARM 127–129
installation notes 150–152 AO 4-20 mA HART CHARM 129–131
LEDs 194 DI 120 VAC isolated CHARM 133, 134
specifications 150–152 DI 230 VAC isolated CHARM 135, 136
wiring diagram 150–152 DI 24 VDC isolated CHARM 131, 132
Thermocouple terminal block 75, 76 DI 24 VDC low-side sense (dry contact)
Top and bottom CHARM Column Extenders 119–121 CHARM 136–138
torque limits for mounting screws, See DeltaV S-series and DI 32-channel 24 VDC dry contact card 20, 21
CHARMs Hardware Installation manual DI 8-channel 120 VAC dry contact card 17, 18
DI 8-channel 120 VAC isolated card 18, 19
V DI 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 15, 16
DI 8-channel NAMUR card 12–14
VIM card
DI NAMUR CHARM 138–140
installation notes 60, 61
DO 100 mA energy limited CHARM 144, 145
specifications 60, 61
DO 24 VDC high-side CHARM 140, 141
LEDs 193
DO 24 VDC isolated CHARM 142, 143
DO 32-channel 24 VDC high-side card 31, 32
W DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC high-side card 27, 29
WIOC, See WirelessHART I/O card DO 8-channel 120/230 VAC isolated card 29, 31
WirelessHART I/O card DO 8-channel 24 VDC high-side card 21, 22, 24
installation notes 99, 100 DO 8-channel 24 VDC isolated card 25–27
LEDs 205 DO VAC isolated CHARM 146, 147
specifications 99, 100 H1 card with integrated power 51–53
terminal block usage 99, 100 Isolated input card 33, 36
WirelessHART I/O terminal block (redundant) 103, 104 Pulse count input card 36–38
wiring diagrams RTD / Resistance CHARM 148, 150
AI 16-channel 4-20 mA HART card 8, 9 RTD / Resistance input card 39, 40
AI 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 4, 6 Sequence of Events card 40–42
AO 8-channel 4-20 mA HART card 9–11 Serial card 56–58
AS-Interface card 45–47 Thermocouple / mV input card 43, 45
DeviceNet card 47, 48 Thermocouple / mV input CHARM 150–152

276